diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
215 files changed, 6925 insertions, 1433 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-ib_srp b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-ib_srp index 5c53d28f775c..b9688de8455b 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-ib_srp +++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-ib_srp @@ -61,6 +61,12 @@ Description: Interface for making ib_srp connect to a new target. interrupt is handled by a different CPU then the comp_vector parameter can be used to spread the SRP completion workload over multiple CPU's. + * tl_retry_count, a number in the range 2..7 specifying the + IB RC retry count. + * queue_size, the maximum number of commands that the + initiator is allowed to queue per SCSI host. The default + value for this parameter is 62. The lowest supported value + is 2. What: /sys/class/infiniband_srp/srp-<hca>-<port_number>/ibdev Date: January 2, 2006 @@ -153,6 +159,13 @@ Contact: linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org Description: InfiniBand service ID used for establishing communication with the SRP target. +What: /sys/class/scsi_host/host<n>/sgid +Date: February 1, 2014 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org +Description: InfiniBand GID of the source port used for communication with + the SRP target. + What: /sys/class/scsi_host/host<n>/zero_req_lim Date: September 20, 2006 KernelVersion: 2.6.18 diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-transport-srp b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-transport-srp index b36fb0dc13c8..ec7af69fea0a 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-transport-srp +++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-transport-srp @@ -5,6 +5,24 @@ Contact: linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org, linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org Description: Instructs an SRP initiator to disconnect from a target and to remove all LUNs imported from that target. +What: /sys/class/srp_remote_ports/port-<h>:<n>/dev_loss_tmo +Date: February 1, 2014 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org, linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org +Description: Number of seconds the SCSI layer will wait after a transport + layer error has been observed before removing a target port. + Zero means immediate removal. Setting this attribute to "off" + will disable the dev_loss timer. + +What: /sys/class/srp_remote_ports/port-<h>:<n>/fast_io_fail_tmo +Date: February 1, 2014 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org, linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org +Description: Number of seconds the SCSI layer will wait after a transport + layer error has been observed before failing I/O. Zero means + failing I/O immediately. Setting this attribute to "off" will + disable the fast_io_fail timer. + What: /sys/class/srp_remote_ports/port-<h>:<n>/port_id Date: June 27, 2007 KernelVersion: 2.6.24 @@ -12,8 +30,29 @@ Contact: linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org Description: 16-byte local SRP port identifier in hexadecimal format. An example: 4c:49:4e:55:58:20:56:49:4f:00:00:00:00:00:00:00. +What: /sys/class/srp_remote_ports/port-<h>:<n>/reconnect_delay +Date: February 1, 2014 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org, linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org +Description: Number of seconds the SCSI layer will wait after a reconnect + attempt failed before retrying. Setting this attribute to + "off" will disable time-based reconnecting. + What: /sys/class/srp_remote_ports/port-<h>:<n>/roles Date: June 27, 2007 KernelVersion: 2.6.24 Contact: linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org Description: Role of the remote port. Either "SRP Initiator" or "SRP Target". + +What: /sys/class/srp_remote_ports/port-<h>:<n>/state +Date: February 1, 2014 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org, linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org +Description: State of the transport layer used for communication with the + remote port. "running" if the transport layer is operational; + "blocked" if a transport layer error has been encountered but + the fast_io_fail_tmo timer has not yet fired; "fail-fast" + after the fast_io_fail_tmo timer has fired and before the + "dev_loss_tmo" timer has fired; "lost" after the + "dev_loss_tmo" timer has fired and before the port is finally + removed. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-ffs b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-ffs new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..14343e237e83 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-ffs @@ -0,0 +1,9 @@ +What: /config/usb-gadget/gadget/functions/ffs.name +Date: Nov 2013 +KenelVersion: 3.13 +Description: The purpose of this directory is to create and remove it. + + A corresponding USB function instance is created/removed. + There are no attributes here. + + All parameters are set through FunctionFS. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-loopback b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-loopback new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..852b2365a5b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-loopback @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +What: /config/usb-gadget/gadget/functions/Loopback.name +Date: Nov 2013 +KenelVersion: 3.13 +Description: + The attributes: + + qlen - depth of loopback queue + bulk_buflen - buffer length diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-sourcesink b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-sourcesink new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a30f3093ef6c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-sourcesink @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +What: /config/usb-gadget/gadget/functions/SourceSink.name +Date: Nov 2013 +KenelVersion: 3.13 +Description: + The attributes: + + pattern - 0 (all zeros), 1 (mod63), 2 (none) + isoc_interval - 1..16 + isoc_maxpacket - 0 - 1023 (fs), 0 - 1024 (hs/ss) + isoc_mult - 0..2 (hs/ss only) + isoc_maxburst - 0..15 (ss only) + qlen - buffer length diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-driver-genwqe b/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-driver-genwqe new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1c2f25674e8c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-driver-genwqe @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ +What: /sys/kernel/debug/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/ddcb_info +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: DDCB queue dump used for debugging queueing problems. + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/curr_regs +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: Dump of the current error registers. + Only available for PF. + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/curr_dbg_uid0 +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: Internal chip state of UID0 (unit id 0). + Only available for PF. + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/curr_dbg_uid1 +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: Internal chip state of UID1. + Only available for PF. + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/curr_dbg_uid2 +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: Internal chip state of UID2. + Only available for PF. + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/prev_regs +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: Dump of the error registers before the last reset of + the card occured. + Only available for PF. + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/prev_dbg_uid0 +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: Internal chip state of UID0 before card was reset. + Only available for PF. + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/prev_dbg_uid1 +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: Internal chip state of UID1 before card was reset. + Only available for PF. + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/prev_dbg_uid2 +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: Internal chip state of UID2 before card was reset. + Only available for PF. + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/info +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: Comprehensive summary of bitstream version and software + version. Used bitstream and bitstream clocking information. + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/err_inject +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: Possibility to inject error cases to ensure that the drivers + error handling code works well. + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/vf<0..14>_jobtimeout_msec +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: Default VF timeout 250ms. Testing might require 1000ms. + Using 0 will use the cards default value (whatever that is). + + The timeout depends on the max number of available cards + in the system and the maximum allowed queue size. + + The driver ensures that the settings are done just before + the VFs get enabled. Changing the timeouts in flight is not + possible. + Only available for PF. + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/jobtimer +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: Dump job timeout register values for PF and VFs. + Only available for PF. + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/queue_working_time +Date: Dec 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: Dump queue working time register values for PF and VFs. + Only available for PF. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio index b20e829d350f..6e02c5029152 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio @@ -197,6 +197,19 @@ Description: Raw pressure measurement from channel Y. Units after application of scale and offset are kilopascal. +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_humidityrelative_raw +KernelVersion: 3.14 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Raw humidity measurement of air. Units after application of + scale and offset are milli percent. + +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_humidityrelative_input +KernelVersion: 3.14 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Scaled humidity measurement in milli percent. + What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_accel_offset What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_accel_x_offset What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_accel_y_offset diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci index 5210a51c90fd..a3c5a6685036 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci @@ -70,18 +70,15 @@ Date: September, 2011 Contact: Neil Horman <nhorman@tuxdriver.com> Description: The /sys/devices/.../msi_irqs directory contains a variable set - of sub-directories, with each sub-directory being named after a - corresponding msi irq vector allocated to that device. Each - numbered sub-directory N contains attributes of that irq. - Note that this directory is not created for device drivers which - do not support msi irqs + of files, with each file being named after a corresponding msi + irq vector allocated to that device. -What: /sys/bus/pci/devices/.../msi_irqs/<N>/mode +What: /sys/bus/pci/devices/.../msi_irqs/<N> Date: September 2011 Contact: Neil Horman <nhorman@tuxdriver.com> Description: This attribute indicates the mode that the irq vector named by - the parent directory is in (msi vs. msix) + the file is in (msi vs. msix) What: /sys/bus/pci/devices/.../remove Date: January 2009 diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb index 1430f584b266..614d451cee41 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb @@ -50,13 +50,19 @@ Description: This may allow the driver to support more hardware than was included in the driver's static device ID support table at compile time. The format for the device ID is: - idVendor idProduct bInterfaceClass. + idVendor idProduct bInterfaceClass RefIdVendor RefIdProduct The vendor ID and device ID fields are required, the - interface class is optional. + rest is optional. The Ref* tuple can be used to tell the + driver to use the same driver_data for the new device as + it is used for the reference device. Upon successfully adding an ID, the driver will probe for the device and attempt to bind to it. For example: # echo "8086 10f5" > /sys/bus/usb/drivers/foo/new_id + Here add a new device (0458:7045) using driver_data from + an already supported device (0458:704c): + # echo "0458 7045 0 0458 704c" > /sys/bus/usb/drivers/foo/new_id + Reading from this file will list all dynamically added device IDs in the same format, with one entry per line. For example: diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-genwqe b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-genwqe new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1870737a1f5e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-genwqe @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +What: /sys/class/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/version +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: Unique bitstream identification e.g. + '0000000330336283.00000000475a4950'. + +What: /sys/class/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/appid +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: Identifies the currently active card application e.g. 'GZIP' + for compression/decompression. + +What: /sys/class/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/type +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: Type of the card e.g. 'GenWQE5-A7'. + +What: /sys/class/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/curr_bitstream +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: Currently active bitstream. 1 is default, 0 is backup. + +What: /sys/class/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/next_bitstream +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: Interface to set the next bitstream to be used. + +What: /sys/class/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/tempsens +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: Interface to read the cards temperature sense register. + +What: /sys/class/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/freerunning_timer +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: Interface to read the cards free running timer. + Used for performance and utilization measurements. + +What: /sys/class/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/queue_working_time +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: Interface to read queue working time. + Used for performance and utilization measurements. + +What: /sys/class/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/state +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: State of the card: "unused", "used", "error". + +What: /sys/class/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/base_clock +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: Base clock frequency of the card. + +What: /sys/class/genwqe/genwqe<n>_card/device/sriov_numvfs +Date: Oct 2013 +Contact: haver@linux.vnet.ibm.com +Description: Enable VFs (1..15): + sudo sh -c 'echo 15 > \ + /sys/bus/pci/devices/0000\:1b\:00.0/sriov_numvfs' + Disable VFs: + Write a 0 into the same sysfs entry. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-ryos b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-ryos new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1d6a8cf9dc0a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-ryos @@ -0,0 +1,178 @@ +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/control +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one select which data from which + profile will be read next. The data has to be 3 bytes long. + This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/profile +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. profile holds index of actual profile. + This value is persistent, so its value determines the profile + that's active when the device is powered on next time. + When written, the device activates the set profile immediately. + The data has to be 3 bytes long. + The device will reject invalid data. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/keys_primary +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one set the default of all keys for + a specific profile. Profile index is included in written data. + The data has to be 125 bytes long. + Before reading this file, control has to be written to select + which profile to read. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/keys_function +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one set the function of the + function keys for a specific profile. Profile index is included + in written data. The data has to be 95 bytes long. + Before reading this file, control has to be written to select + which profile to read. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/keys_macro +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one set the function of the macro + keys for a specific profile. Profile index is included in + written data. The data has to be 35 bytes long. + Before reading this file, control has to be written to select + which profile to read. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/keys_thumbster +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one set the function of the + thumbster keys for a specific profile. Profile index is included + in written data. The data has to be 23 bytes long. + Before reading this file, control has to be written to select + which profile to read. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/keys_extra +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one set the function of the + capslock and function keys for a specific profile. Profile index + is included in written data. The data has to be 8 bytes long. + Before reading this file, control has to be written to select + which profile to read. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/keys_easyzone +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one set the function of the + easyzone keys for a specific profile. Profile index is included + in written data. The data has to be 294 bytes long. + Before reading this file, control has to be written to select + which profile to read. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/key_mask +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one deactivate certain keys like + windows and application keys, to prevent accidental presses. + Profile index for which this settings occur is included in + written data. The data has to be 6 bytes long. + Before reading this file, control has to be written to select + which profile to read. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/light +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one set the backlight intensity for + a specific profile. Profile index is included in written data. + This attribute is only valid for the glow and pro variant. + The data has to be 16 bytes long. + Before reading this file, control has to be written to select + which profile to read. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/macro +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one store macros with max 480 + keystrokes for a specific button for a specific profile. + Button and profile indexes are included in written data. + The data has to be 2002 bytes long. + Before reading this file, control has to be written to select + which profile and key to read. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/info +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When read, this file returns general data like firmware version. + The data is 8 bytes long. + This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/reset +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one reset the device. + The data has to be 3 bytes long. + This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/talk +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one trigger easyshift functionality + from the host. + The data has to be 16 bytes long. + This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/light_control +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one switch between stored and custom + light settings. + This attribute is only valid for the pro variant. + The data has to be 8 bytes long. + This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/stored_lights +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one set per-key lighting for different + layers. + This attribute is only valid for the pro variant. + The data has to be 1382 bytes long. + Before reading this file, control has to be written to select + which profile to read. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/custom_lights +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one set the actual per-key lighting. + This attribute is only valid for the pro variant. + The data has to be 20 bytes long. + This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/light_macro +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one set a light macro that is looped + whenever the device gets in dimness mode. + This attribute is only valid for the pro variant. + The data has to be 2002 bytes long. + Before reading this file, control has to be written to select + which profile to read. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-wiimote b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-wiimote index ed5dd567d397..39dfa5cb1cc5 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-wiimote +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-wiimote @@ -57,3 +57,21 @@ Description: This attribute is only provided if the device was detected as a Calibration data is already applied by the kernel to all input values but may be used by user-space to perform other transformations. + +What: /sys/bus/hid/drivers/wiimote/<dev>/pro_calib +Date: October 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: David Herrmann <dh.herrmann@gmail.com> +Description: This attribute is only provided if the device was detected as a + pro-controller. It provides a single line with 4 calibration + values for all 4 analog sticks. Format is: "x1:y1 x2:y2". Data + is prefixed with a +/-. Each value is a signed 16bit number. + Data is encoded as decimal numbers and specifies the offsets of + the analog sticks of the pro-controller. + Calibration data is already applied by the kernel to all input + values but may be used by user-space to perform other + transformations. + Calibration data is detected by the kernel during device setup. + You can write "scan\n" into this file to re-trigger calibration. + You can also write data directly in the form "x1:y1 x2:y2" to + set the calibration values manually. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-efi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-efi new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..05874da7ce80 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-efi @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +What: /sys/firmware/efi/fw_vendor +Date: December 2013 +Contact: Dave Young <dyoung@redhat.com> +Description: It shows the physical address of firmware vendor field in the + EFI system table. +Users: Kexec + +What: /sys/firmware/efi/runtime +Date: December 2013 +Contact: Dave Young <dyoung@redhat.com> +Description: It shows the physical address of runtime service table entry in + the EFI system table. +Users: Kexec + +What: /sys/firmware/efi/config_table +Date: December 2013 +Contact: Dave Young <dyoung@redhat.com> +Description: It shows the physical address of config table entry in the EFI + system table. +Users: Kexec diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-efi-runtime-map b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-efi-runtime-map new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c61b9b348e99 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-efi-runtime-map @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +What: /sys/firmware/efi/runtime-map/ +Date: December 2013 +Contact: Dave Young <dyoung@redhat.com> +Description: Switching efi runtime services to virtual mode requires + that all efi memory ranges which have the runtime attribute + bit set to be mapped to virtual addresses. + + The efi runtime services can only be switched to virtual + mode once without rebooting. The kexec kernel must maintain + the same physical to virtual address mappings as the first + kernel. The mappings are exported to sysfs so userspace tools + can reassemble them and pass them into the kexec kernel. + + /sys/firmware/efi/runtime-map/ is the directory the kernel + exports that information in. + + subdirectories are named with the number of the memory range: + + /sys/firmware/efi/runtime-map/0 + /sys/firmware/efi/runtime-map/1 + /sys/firmware/efi/runtime-map/2 + /sys/firmware/efi/runtime-map/3 + ... + + Each subdirectory contains five files: + + attribute : The attributes of the memory range. + num_pages : The size of the memory range in pages. + phys_addr : The physical address of the memory range. + type : The type of the memory range. + virt_addr : The virtual address of the memory range. + + Above values are all hexadecimal numbers with the '0x' prefix. +Users: Kexec diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-boot_params b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-boot_params new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..eca38ce2852d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-boot_params @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +What: /sys/kernel/boot_params +Date: December 2013 +Contact: Dave Young <dyoung@redhat.com> +Description: The /sys/kernel/boot_params directory contains two + files: "data" and "version" and one subdirectory "setup_data". + It is used to export the kernel boot parameters of an x86 + platform to userspace for kexec and debugging purpose. + + If there's no setup_data in boot_params the subdirectory will + not be created. + + "data" file is the binary representation of struct boot_params. + + "version" file is the string representation of boot + protocol version. + + "setup_data" subdirectory contains the setup_data data + structure in boot_params. setup_data is maintained in kernel + as a link list. In "setup_data" subdirectory there's one + subdirectory for each link list node named with the number + of the list nodes. The list node subdirectory contains two + files "type" and "data". "type" file is the string + representation of setup_data type. "data" file is the binary + representation of setup_data payload. + + The whole boot_params directory structure is like below: + /sys/kernel/boot_params + |__ data + |__ setup_data + | |__ 0 + | | |__ data + | | |__ type + | |__ 1 + | |__ data + | |__ type + |__ version + +Users: Kexec diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-tahvo-usb b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-tahvo-usb new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f6e20ce4b538 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-tahvo-usb @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/tahvo-usb/otg_mode +Date: December 2013 +Contact: Aaro Koskinen <aaro.koskinen@iki.fi> +Description: + Set or read the current OTG mode. Valid values are "host" and + "peripheral". + + Reading: returns the current mode. + +What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/tahvo-usb/vbus +Date: December 2013 +Contact: Aaro Koskinen <aaro.koskinen@iki.fi> +Description: + Read the current VBUS state. + + Reading: returns "on" or "off". diff --git a/Documentation/Changes b/Documentation/Changes index b17580885273..07c75d18154e 100644 --- a/Documentation/Changes +++ b/Documentation/Changes @@ -196,13 +196,6 @@ chmod 0644 /dev/cpu/microcode as root before you can use this. You'll probably also want to get the user-space microcode_ctl utility to use with this. -Powertweak ----------- - -If you are running v0.1.17 or earlier, you should upgrade to -version v0.99.0 or higher. Running old versions may cause problems -with programs using shared memory. - udev ---- udev is a userspace application for populating /dev dynamically with @@ -366,10 +359,6 @@ Intel P6 microcode ------------------ o <http://www.urbanmyth.org/microcode/> -Powertweak ----------- -o <http://powertweak.sourceforge.net/> - udev ---- o <http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/hotplug/udev.html> diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt b/Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt index e59480db9ee0..cc2450d80310 100644 --- a/Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt +++ b/Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ all pending DMA writes to complete, and thus provides a mechanism to strictly order DMA from a device across all intervening busses and bridges. This barrier is not specific to a particular type of interconnect, it applies to the system as a whole, and so its -implementation must account for the idiosyncracies of the system all +implementation must account for the idiosyncrasies of the system all the way from the DMA device to memory. As an example of a situation where DMA_ATTR_WRITE_BARRIER would be @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ such mapping is non-trivial task and consumes very limited resources Buffers allocated with this attribute can be only passed to user space by calling dma_mmap_attrs(). By using this API, you are guaranteeing that you won't dereference the pointer returned by dma_alloc_attr(). You -can threat it as a cookie that must be passed to dma_mmap_attrs() and +can treat it as a cookie that must be passed to dma_mmap_attrs() and dma_free_attrs(). Make sure that both of these also get this attribute set on each call. @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ to 'device' domain, what synchronizes CPU caches for the given region (usually it means that the cache has been flushed or invalidated depending on the dma direction). However, next calls to dma_map_{single,page,sg}() for other devices will perform exactly the -same sychronization operation on the CPU cache. CPU cache sychronization +same synchronization operation on the CPU cache. CPU cache synchronization might be a time consuming operation, especially if the buffers are large, so it is highly recommended to avoid it if possible. DMA_ATTR_SKIP_CPU_SYNC allows platform code to skip synchronization of diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/.gitignore b/Documentation/DocBook/.gitignore index 720f245ceb1f..7ebd5465d927 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/.gitignore +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/.gitignore @@ -10,5 +10,6 @@ *.out *.png *.gif +*.svg media-indices.tmpl media-entities.tmpl diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile index bc3d9f8c0a90..0f9c6ff41aac 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile @@ -54,6 +54,7 @@ htmldocs: $(HTML) MAN := $(patsubst %.xml, %.9, $(BOOKS)) mandocs: $(MAN) + $(if $(wildcard $(obj)/man/*.9),gzip -f $(obj)/man/*.9) installmandocs: mandocs mkdir -p /usr/local/man/man9/ @@ -145,7 +146,7 @@ build_main_index = rm -rf $(main_idx); \ cat $(HTML) >> $(main_idx) quiet_cmd_db2html = HTML $@ - cmd_db2html = xmlto xhtml $(XMLTOFLAGS) -o $(patsubst %.html,%,$@) $< && \ + cmd_db2html = xmlto html $(XMLTOFLAGS) -o $(patsubst %.html,%,$@) $< && \ echo '<a HREF="$(patsubst %.html,%,$(notdir $@))/index.html"> \ $(patsubst %.html,%,$(notdir $@))</a><p>' > $@ @@ -159,7 +160,7 @@ quiet_cmd_db2html = HTML $@ cp $(PNG-$(basename $(notdir $@))) $(patsubst %.html,%,$@); fi quiet_cmd_db2man = MAN $@ - cmd_db2man = if grep -q refentry $<; then xmlto man $(XMLTOFLAGS) -o $(obj)/man $< ; gzip -f $(obj)/man/*.9; fi + cmd_db2man = if grep -q refentry $<; then xmlto man $(XMLTOFLAGS) -o $(obj)/man $< ; fi %.9 : %.xml @(which xmlto > /dev/null 2>&1) || \ (echo "*** You need to install xmlto ***"; \ diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl index 6c9d9d37c83a..f5170082bdb3 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ </sect1> <sect1><title>Wait queues and Wake events</title> !Iinclude/linux/wait.h -!Ekernel/wait.c +!Ekernel/sched/wait.c </sect1> <sect1><title>High-resolution timers</title> !Iinclude/linux/ktime.h diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl index f75ab4c1b281..ecfd0ea40661 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl @@ -109,6 +109,7 @@ X!Ilib/string.c <sect1><title>The Slab Cache</title> !Iinclude/linux/slab.h !Emm/slab.c +!Emm/util.c </sect1> <sect1><title>User Space Memory Access</title> !Iarch/x86/include/asm/uaccess_32.h diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-expbuf.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-expbuf.xml index e287c8fc803b..4165e7bfa4ff 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-expbuf.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-expbuf.xml @@ -73,7 +73,8 @@ range from zero to the maximal number of valid planes for the currently active format. For the single-planar API, applications must set <structfield> plane </structfield> to zero. Additional flags may be posted in the <structfield> flags </structfield> field. Refer to a manual for open() for details. -Currently only O_CLOEXEC is supported. All other fields must be set to zero. +Currently only O_CLOEXEC, O_RDONLY, O_WRONLY, and O_RDWR are supported. All +other fields must be set to zero. In the case of multi-planar API, every plane is exported separately using multiple <constant> VIDIOC_EXPBUF </constant> calls. </para> @@ -170,8 +171,9 @@ multi-planar API. Otherwise this value must be set to zero. </entry> <entry>__u32</entry> <entry><structfield>flags</structfield></entry> <entry>Flags for the newly created file, currently only <constant> -O_CLOEXEC </constant> is supported, refer to the manual of open() for more -details.</entry> +O_CLOEXEC </constant>, <constant>O_RDONLY</constant>, <constant>O_WRONLY +</constant>, and <constant>O_RDWR</constant> are supported, refer to the manual +of open() for more details.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>__s32</entry> diff --git a/Documentation/HOWTO b/Documentation/HOWTO index 27faae3e3846..57cf5efb044d 100644 --- a/Documentation/HOWTO +++ b/Documentation/HOWTO @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ required reading: Other excellent descriptions of how to create patches properly are: "The Perfect Patch" - http://kerneltrap.org/node/3737 + http://www.ozlabs.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt "Linux kernel patch submission format" http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html @@ -579,7 +579,7 @@ all time. It should describe the patch completely, containing: For more details on what this should all look like, please see the ChangeLog section of the document: "The Perfect Patch" - http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt + http://www.ozlabs.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt diff --git a/Documentation/IRQ-domain.txt b/Documentation/IRQ-domain.txt index 9bc95942ec22..03df71aeb38c 100644 --- a/Documentation/IRQ-domain.txt +++ b/Documentation/IRQ-domain.txt @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ will use a legacy domain only if an IRQ range is supplied by the system and will otherwise use a linear domain mapping. The semantics of this call are such that if an IRQ range is specified then descriptors will be allocated on-the-fly for it, and if no range is -specified it will fall through to irq_domain_add_linear() which meand +specified it will fall through to irq_domain_add_linear() which means *no* irq descriptors will be allocated. A typical use case for simple domains is where an irqchip provider diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/00-INDEX b/Documentation/PCI/00-INDEX index 812b17fe3ed0..147231f1613e 100644 --- a/Documentation/PCI/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/PCI/00-INDEX @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ - this file MSI-HOWTO.txt - the Message Signaled Interrupts (MSI) Driver Guide HOWTO and FAQ. -PCI-DMA-mapping.txt - - info for PCI drivers using DMA portably across all platforms PCIEBUS-HOWTO.txt - a guide describing the PCI Express Port Bus driver pci-error-recovery.txt - info on PCI error recovery +pci-iov-howto.txt + - the PCI Express I/O Virtualization HOWTO pci.txt - info on the PCI subsystem for device driver authors pcieaer-howto.txt diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/MSI-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/PCI/MSI-HOWTO.txt index a09178086c30..a8d01005f480 100644 --- a/Documentation/PCI/MSI-HOWTO.txt +++ b/Documentation/PCI/MSI-HOWTO.txt @@ -82,93 +82,111 @@ Most of the hard work is done for the driver in the PCI layer. It simply has to request that the PCI layer set up the MSI capability for this device. -4.2.1 pci_enable_msi +4.2.1 pci_enable_msi_range -int pci_enable_msi(struct pci_dev *dev) +int pci_enable_msi_range(struct pci_dev *dev, int minvec, int maxvec) -A successful call allocates ONE interrupt to the device, regardless -of how many MSIs the device supports. The device is switched from -pin-based interrupt mode to MSI mode. The dev->irq number is changed -to a new number which represents the message signaled interrupt; -consequently, this function should be called before the driver calls -request_irq(), because an MSI is delivered via a vector that is -different from the vector of a pin-based interrupt. +This function allows a device driver to request any number of MSI +interrupts within specified range from 'minvec' to 'maxvec'. -4.2.2 pci_enable_msi_block +If this function returns a positive number it indicates the number of +MSI interrupts that have been successfully allocated. In this case +the device is switched from pin-based interrupt mode to MSI mode and +updates dev->irq to be the lowest of the new interrupts assigned to it. +The other interrupts assigned to the device are in the range dev->irq +to dev->irq + returned value - 1. Device driver can use the returned +number of successfully allocated MSI interrupts to further allocate +and initialize device resources. -int pci_enable_msi_block(struct pci_dev *dev, int count) +If this function returns a negative number, it indicates an error and +the driver should not attempt to request any more MSI interrupts for +this device. -This variation on the above call allows a device driver to request multiple -MSIs. The MSI specification only allows interrupts to be allocated in -powers of two, up to a maximum of 2^5 (32). +This function should be called before the driver calls request_irq(), +because MSI interrupts are delivered via vectors that are different +from the vector of a pin-based interrupt. -If this function returns 0, it has succeeded in allocating at least as many -interrupts as the driver requested (it may have allocated more in order -to satisfy the power-of-two requirement). In this case, the function -enables MSI on this device and updates dev->irq to be the lowest of -the new interrupts assigned to it. The other interrupts assigned to -the device are in the range dev->irq to dev->irq + count - 1. +It is ideal if drivers can cope with a variable number of MSI interrupts; +there are many reasons why the platform may not be able to provide the +exact number that a driver asks for. -If this function returns a negative number, it indicates an error and -the driver should not attempt to request any more MSI interrupts for -this device. If this function returns a positive number, it is -less than 'count' and indicates the number of interrupts that could have -been allocated. In neither case is the irq value updated or the device -switched into MSI mode. - -The device driver must decide what action to take if -pci_enable_msi_block() returns a value less than the number requested. -For instance, the driver could still make use of fewer interrupts; -in this case the driver should call pci_enable_msi_block() -again. Note that it is not guaranteed to succeed, even when the -'count' has been reduced to the value returned from a previous call to -pci_enable_msi_block(). This is because there are multiple constraints -on the number of vectors that can be allocated; pci_enable_msi_block() -returns as soon as it finds any constraint that doesn't allow the -call to succeed. - -4.2.3 pci_enable_msi_block_auto - -int pci_enable_msi_block_auto(struct pci_dev *dev, unsigned int *count) - -This variation on pci_enable_msi() call allows a device driver to request -the maximum possible number of MSIs. The MSI specification only allows -interrupts to be allocated in powers of two, up to a maximum of 2^5 (32). - -If this function returns a positive number, it indicates that it has -succeeded and the returned value is the number of allocated interrupts. In -this case, the function enables MSI on this device and updates dev->irq to -be the lowest of the new interrupts assigned to it. The other interrupts -assigned to the device are in the range dev->irq to dev->irq + returned -value - 1. +There could be devices that can not operate with just any number of MSI +interrupts within a range. See chapter 4.3.1.3 to get the idea how to +handle such devices for MSI-X - the same logic applies to MSI. -If this function returns a negative number, it indicates an error and -the driver should not attempt to request any more MSI interrupts for -this device. +4.2.1.1 Maximum possible number of MSI interrupts + +The typical usage of MSI interrupts is to allocate as many vectors as +possible, likely up to the limit returned by pci_msi_vec_count() function: + +static int foo_driver_enable_msi(struct pci_dev *pdev, int nvec) +{ + return pci_enable_msi_range(pdev, 1, nvec); +} + +Note the value of 'minvec' parameter is 1. As 'minvec' is inclusive, +the value of 0 would be meaningless and could result in error. -If the device driver needs to know the number of interrupts the device -supports it can pass the pointer count where that number is stored. The -device driver must decide what action to take if pci_enable_msi_block_auto() -succeeds, but returns a value less than the number of interrupts supported. -If the device driver does not need to know the number of interrupts -supported, it can set the pointer count to NULL. +Some devices have a minimal limit on number of MSI interrupts. +In this case the function could look like this: -4.2.4 pci_disable_msi +static int foo_driver_enable_msi(struct pci_dev *pdev, int nvec) +{ + return pci_enable_msi_range(pdev, FOO_DRIVER_MINIMUM_NVEC, nvec); +} + +4.2.1.2 Exact number of MSI interrupts + +If a driver is unable or unwilling to deal with a variable number of MSI +interrupts it could request a particular number of interrupts by passing +that number to pci_enable_msi_range() function as both 'minvec' and 'maxvec' +parameters: + +static int foo_driver_enable_msi(struct pci_dev *pdev, int nvec) +{ + return pci_enable_msi_range(pdev, nvec, nvec); +} + +4.2.1.3 Single MSI mode + +The most notorious example of the request type described above is +enabling the single MSI mode for a device. It could be done by passing +two 1s as 'minvec' and 'maxvec': + +static int foo_driver_enable_single_msi(struct pci_dev *pdev) +{ + return pci_enable_msi_range(pdev, 1, 1); +} + +4.2.2 pci_disable_msi void pci_disable_msi(struct pci_dev *dev) -This function should be used to undo the effect of pci_enable_msi() or -pci_enable_msi_block() or pci_enable_msi_block_auto(). Calling it restores -dev->irq to the pin-based interrupt number and frees the previously -allocated message signaled interrupt(s). The interrupt may subsequently be -assigned to another device, so drivers should not cache the value of -dev->irq. +This function should be used to undo the effect of pci_enable_msi_range(). +Calling it restores dev->irq to the pin-based interrupt number and frees +the previously allocated MSIs. The interrupts may subsequently be assigned +to another device, so drivers should not cache the value of dev->irq. Before calling this function, a device driver must always call free_irq() on any interrupt for which it previously called request_irq(). Failure to do so results in a BUG_ON(), leaving the device with MSI enabled and thus leaking its vector. +4.2.3 pci_msi_vec_count + +int pci_msi_vec_count(struct pci_dev *dev) + +This function could be used to retrieve the number of MSI vectors the +device requested (via the Multiple Message Capable register). The MSI +specification only allows the returned value to be a power of two, +up to a maximum of 2^5 (32). + +If this function returns a negative number, it indicates the device is +not capable of sending MSIs. + +If this function returns a positive number, it indicates the maximum +number of MSI interrupt vectors that could be allocated. + 4.3 Using MSI-X The MSI-X capability is much more flexible than the MSI capability. @@ -188,26 +206,31 @@ in each element of the array to indicate for which entries the kernel should assign interrupts; it is invalid to fill in two entries with the same number. -4.3.1 pci_enable_msix +4.3.1 pci_enable_msix_range -int pci_enable_msix(struct pci_dev *dev, struct msix_entry *entries, int nvec) +int pci_enable_msix_range(struct pci_dev *dev, struct msix_entry *entries, + int minvec, int maxvec) -Calling this function asks the PCI subsystem to allocate 'nvec' MSIs. +Calling this function asks the PCI subsystem to allocate any number of +MSI-X interrupts within specified range from 'minvec' to 'maxvec'. The 'entries' argument is a pointer to an array of msix_entry structs -which should be at least 'nvec' entries in size. On success, the -device is switched into MSI-X mode and the function returns 0. -The 'vector' member in each entry is populated with the interrupt number; +which should be at least 'maxvec' entries in size. + +On success, the device is switched into MSI-X mode and the function +returns the number of MSI-X interrupts that have been successfully +allocated. In this case the 'vector' member in entries numbered from +0 to the returned value - 1 is populated with the interrupt number; the driver should then call request_irq() for each 'vector' that it decides to use. The device driver is responsible for keeping track of the interrupts assigned to the MSI-X vectors so it can free them again later. +Device driver can use the returned number of successfully allocated MSI-X +interrupts to further allocate and initialize device resources. If this function returns a negative number, it indicates an error and the driver should not attempt to allocate any more MSI-X interrupts for -this device. If it returns a positive number, it indicates the maximum -number of interrupt vectors that could have been allocated. See example -below. +this device. -This function, in contrast with pci_enable_msi(), does not adjust +This function, in contrast with pci_enable_msi_range(), does not adjust dev->irq. The device will not generate interrupts for this interrupt number once MSI-X is enabled. @@ -218,28 +241,103 @@ It is ideal if drivers can cope with a variable number of MSI-X interrupts; there are many reasons why the platform may not be able to provide the exact number that a driver asks for. -A request loop to achieve that might look like: +There could be devices that can not operate with just any number of MSI-X +interrupts within a range. E.g., an network adapter might need let's say +four vectors per each queue it provides. Therefore, a number of MSI-X +interrupts allocated should be a multiple of four. In this case interface +pci_enable_msix_range() can not be used alone to request MSI-X interrupts +(since it can allocate any number within the range, without any notion of +the multiple of four) and the device driver should master a custom logic +to request the required number of MSI-X interrupts. + +4.3.1.1 Maximum possible number of MSI-X interrupts + +The typical usage of MSI-X interrupts is to allocate as many vectors as +possible, likely up to the limit returned by pci_msix_vec_count() function: static int foo_driver_enable_msix(struct foo_adapter *adapter, int nvec) { - while (nvec >= FOO_DRIVER_MINIMUM_NVEC) { - rc = pci_enable_msix(adapter->pdev, - adapter->msix_entries, nvec); - if (rc > 0) - nvec = rc; - else - return rc; + return pci_enable_msi_range(adapter->pdev, adapter->msix_entries, + 1, nvec); +} + +Note the value of 'minvec' parameter is 1. As 'minvec' is inclusive, +the value of 0 would be meaningless and could result in error. + +Some devices have a minimal limit on number of MSI-X interrupts. +In this case the function could look like this: + +static int foo_driver_enable_msix(struct foo_adapter *adapter, int nvec) +{ + return pci_enable_msi_range(adapter->pdev, adapter->msix_entries, + FOO_DRIVER_MINIMUM_NVEC, nvec); +} + +4.3.1.2 Exact number of MSI-X interrupts + +If a driver is unable or unwilling to deal with a variable number of MSI-X +interrupts it could request a particular number of interrupts by passing +that number to pci_enable_msix_range() function as both 'minvec' and 'maxvec' +parameters: + +static int foo_driver_enable_msix(struct foo_adapter *adapter, int nvec) +{ + return pci_enable_msi_range(adapter->pdev, adapter->msix_entries, + nvec, nvec); +} + +4.3.1.3 Specific requirements to the number of MSI-X interrupts + +As noted above, there could be devices that can not operate with just any +number of MSI-X interrupts within a range. E.g., let's assume a device that +is only capable sending the number of MSI-X interrupts which is a power of +two. A routine that enables MSI-X mode for such device might look like this: + +/* + * Assume 'minvec' and 'maxvec' are non-zero + */ +static int foo_driver_enable_msix(struct foo_adapter *adapter, + int minvec, int maxvec) +{ + int rc; + + minvec = roundup_pow_of_two(minvec); + maxvec = rounddown_pow_of_two(maxvec); + + if (minvec > maxvec) + return -ERANGE; + +retry: + rc = pci_enable_msix_range(adapter->pdev, adapter->msix_entries, + maxvec, maxvec); + /* + * -ENOSPC is the only error code allowed to be analized + */ + if (rc == -ENOSPC) { + if (maxvec == 1) + return -ENOSPC; + + maxvec /= 2; + + if (minvec > maxvec) + return -ENOSPC; + + goto retry; } - return -ENOSPC; + return rc; } +Note how pci_enable_msix_range() return value is analized for a fallback - +any error code other than -ENOSPC indicates a fatal error and should not +be retried. + 4.3.2 pci_disable_msix void pci_disable_msix(struct pci_dev *dev) -This function should be used to undo the effect of pci_enable_msix(). It frees -the previously allocated message signaled interrupts. The interrupts may +This function should be used to undo the effect of pci_enable_msix_range(). +It frees the previously allocated MSI-X interrupts. The interrupts may subsequently be assigned to another device, so drivers should not cache the value of the 'vector' elements over a call to pci_disable_msix(). @@ -255,18 +353,32 @@ MSI-X Table. This address is mapped by the PCI subsystem, and should not be accessed directly by the device driver. If the driver wishes to mask or unmask an interrupt, it should call disable_irq() / enable_irq(). +4.3.4 pci_msix_vec_count + +int pci_msix_vec_count(struct pci_dev *dev) + +This function could be used to retrieve number of entries in the device +MSI-X table. + +If this function returns a negative number, it indicates the device is +not capable of sending MSI-Xs. + +If this function returns a positive number, it indicates the maximum +number of MSI-X interrupt vectors that could be allocated. + 4.4 Handling devices implementing both MSI and MSI-X capabilities If a device implements both MSI and MSI-X capabilities, it can run in either MSI mode or MSI-X mode, but not both simultaneously. This is a requirement of the PCI spec, and it is enforced by the -PCI layer. Calling pci_enable_msi() when MSI-X is already enabled or -pci_enable_msix() when MSI is already enabled results in an error. -If a device driver wishes to switch between MSI and MSI-X at runtime, -it must first quiesce the device, then switch it back to pin-interrupt -mode, before calling pci_enable_msi() or pci_enable_msix() and resuming -operation. This is not expected to be a common operation but may be -useful for debugging or testing during development. +PCI layer. Calling pci_enable_msi_range() when MSI-X is already +enabled or pci_enable_msix_range() when MSI is already enabled +results in an error. If a device driver wishes to switch between MSI +and MSI-X at runtime, it must first quiesce the device, then switch +it back to pin-interrupt mode, before calling pci_enable_msi_range() +or pci_enable_msix_range() and resuming operation. This is not expected +to be a common operation but may be useful for debugging or testing +during development. 4.5 Considerations when using MSIs @@ -381,5 +493,5 @@ or disabled (0). If 0 is found in any of the msi_bus files belonging to bridges between the PCI root and the device, MSIs are disabled. It is also worth checking the device driver to see whether it supports MSIs. -For example, it may contain calls to pci_enable_msi(), pci_enable_msix() or -pci_enable_msi_block(). +For example, it may contain calls to pci_enable_msi_range() or +pci_enable_msix_range(). diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt b/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt index 6f458564d625..9518006f6675 100644 --- a/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt +++ b/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt @@ -123,8 +123,10 @@ initialization with a pointer to a structure describing the driver The ID table is an array of struct pci_device_id entries ending with an -all-zero entry; use of the macro DEFINE_PCI_DEVICE_TABLE is the preferred -method of declaring the table. Each entry consists of: +all-zero entry. Definitions with static const are generally preferred. +Use of the deprecated macro DEFINE_PCI_DEVICE_TABLE should be avoided. + +Each entry consists of: vendor,device Vendor and device ID to match (or PCI_ANY_ID) diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt index f3778f8952da..910870b15acd 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt @@ -396,14 +396,14 @@ o Each element of the form "3/3 ..>. 0:7 ^0" represents one rcu_node The output of "cat rcu/rcu_sched/rcu_pending" looks as follows: - 0!np=26111 qsp=29 rpq=5386 cbr=1 cng=570 gpc=3674 gps=577 nn=15903 - 1!np=28913 qsp=35 rpq=6097 cbr=1 cng=448 gpc=3700 gps=554 nn=18113 - 2!np=32740 qsp=37 rpq=6202 cbr=0 cng=476 gpc=4627 gps=546 nn=20889 - 3 np=23679 qsp=22 rpq=5044 cbr=1 cng=415 gpc=3403 gps=347 nn=14469 - 4!np=30714 qsp=4 rpq=5574 cbr=0 cng=528 gpc=3931 gps=639 nn=20042 - 5 np=28910 qsp=2 rpq=5246 cbr=0 cng=428 gpc=4105 gps=709 nn=18422 - 6!np=38648 qsp=5 rpq=7076 cbr=0 cng=840 gpc=4072 gps=961 nn=25699 - 7 np=37275 qsp=2 rpq=6873 cbr=0 cng=868 gpc=3416 gps=971 nn=25147 + 0!np=26111 qsp=29 rpq=5386 cbr=1 cng=570 gpc=3674 gps=577 nn=15903 ndw=0 + 1!np=28913 qsp=35 rpq=6097 cbr=1 cng=448 gpc=3700 gps=554 nn=18113 ndw=0 + 2!np=32740 qsp=37 rpq=6202 cbr=0 cng=476 gpc=4627 gps=546 nn=20889 ndw=0 + 3 np=23679 qsp=22 rpq=5044 cbr=1 cng=415 gpc=3403 gps=347 nn=14469 ndw=0 + 4!np=30714 qsp=4 rpq=5574 cbr=0 cng=528 gpc=3931 gps=639 nn=20042 ndw=0 + 5 np=28910 qsp=2 rpq=5246 cbr=0 cng=428 gpc=4105 gps=709 nn=18422 ndw=0 + 6!np=38648 qsp=5 rpq=7076 cbr=0 cng=840 gpc=4072 gps=961 nn=25699 ndw=0 + 7 np=37275 qsp=2 rpq=6873 cbr=0 cng=868 gpc=3416 gps=971 nn=25147 ndw=0 The fields are as follows: @@ -432,6 +432,10 @@ o "gpc" is the number of times that an old grace period had o "gps" is the number of times that a new grace period had started, but this CPU was not yet aware of it. +o "ndw" is the number of times that a wakeup of an rcuo + callback-offload kthread had to be deferred in order to avoid + deadlock. + o "nn" is the number of times that this CPU needed nothing. @@ -443,7 +447,7 @@ The output of "cat rcu/rcuboost" looks as follows: balk: nt=0 egt=6541 bt=0 nb=0 ny=126 nos=0 This information is output only for rcu_preempt. Each two-line entry -corresponds to a leaf rcu_node strcuture. The fields are as follows: +corresponds to a leaf rcu_node structure. The fields are as follows: o "n:m" is the CPU-number range for the corresponding two-line entry. In the sample output above, the first entry covers diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/apei/einj.txt b/Documentation/acpi/apei/einj.txt index a58b63da1a36..f51861bcb07b 100644 --- a/Documentation/acpi/apei/einj.txt +++ b/Documentation/acpi/apei/einj.txt @@ -45,11 +45,22 @@ directory apei/einj. The following files are provided. injection. Before this, please specify all necessary error parameters. +- flags + Present for kernel version 3.13 and above. Used to specify which + of param{1..4} are valid and should be used by BIOS during injection. + Value is a bitmask as specified in ACPI5.0 spec for the + SET_ERROR_TYPE_WITH_ADDRESS data structure: + Bit 0 - Processor APIC field valid (see param3 below) + Bit 1 - Memory address and mask valid (param1 and param2) + Bit 2 - PCIe (seg,bus,dev,fn) valid (param4 below) + If set to zero, legacy behaviour is used where the type of injection + specifies just one bit set, and param1 is multiplexed. + - param1 This file is used to set the first error parameter value. Effect of parameter depends on error_type specified. For example, if error type is memory related type, the param1 should be a valid physical - memory address. + memory address. [Unless "flag" is set - see above] - param2 This file is used to set the second error parameter value. Effect of @@ -58,6 +69,12 @@ directory apei/einj. The following files are provided. address mask. Linux requires page or narrower granularity, say, 0xfffffffffffff000. +- param3 + Used when the 0x1 bit is set in "flag" to specify the APIC id + +- param4 + Used when the 0x4 bit is set in "flag" to specify target PCIe device + - notrigger The EINJ mechanism is a two step process. First inject the error, then perform some actions to trigger it. Setting "notrigger" to 1 skips the diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt b/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt index b994bcb32b92..2a1519b87177 100644 --- a/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt +++ b/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt @@ -293,36 +293,13 @@ the device to the driver. For example: These GPIO numbers are controller relative and path "\\_SB.PCI0.GPI0" specifies the path to the controller. In order to use these GPIOs in Linux -we need to translate them to the Linux GPIO numbers. +we need to translate them to the corresponding Linux GPIO descriptors. -In a simple case of just getting the Linux GPIO number from device -resources one can use acpi_get_gpio_by_index() helper function. It takes -pointer to the device and index of the GpioIo/GpioInt descriptor in the -device resources list. For example: +There is a standard GPIO API for that and is documented in +Documentation/gpio.txt. - int gpio_irq, gpio_power; - int ret; - - gpio_irq = acpi_get_gpio_by_index(dev, 1, NULL); - if (gpio_irq < 0) - /* handle error */ - - gpio_power = acpi_get_gpio_by_index(dev, 0, NULL); - if (gpio_power < 0) - /* handle error */ - - /* Now we can use the GPIO numbers */ - -Other GpioIo parameters must be converted first by the driver to be -suitable to the gpiolib before passing them. - -In case of GpioInt resource an additional call to gpio_to_irq() must be -done before calling request_irq(). - -Note that the above API is ACPI specific and not recommended for drivers -that need to support non-ACPI systems. The recommended way is to use -the descriptor based GPIO interfaces. The above example looks like this -when converted to the GPIO desc: +In the above example we can get the corresponding two GPIO descriptors with +a code like this: #include <linux/gpio/consumer.h> ... @@ -339,4 +316,5 @@ when converted to the GPIO desc: /* Now we can use the GPIO descriptors */ -See also Documentation/gpio.txt. +There are also devm_* versions of these functions which release the +descriptors once the device is released. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt index 8b46c79679c4..0ebd7e2244d0 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt @@ -85,21 +85,10 @@ between the calls. Headers ------- - See arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/include/mach/regs-gpio.h for the list + See arch/arm/mach-s3c24xx/include/mach/regs-gpio.h for the list of GPIO pins, and the configuration values for them. This is included by using #include <mach/regs-gpio.h> - The GPIO management functions are defined in the hardware - header arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/include/mach/hardware.h which can be - included by #include <mach/hardware.h> - - A useful amount of documentation can be found in the hardware - header on how the GPIO functions (and others) work. - - Whilst a number of these functions do make some checks on what - is passed to them, for speed of use, they may not always ensure - that the user supplied data to them is correct. - PIN Numbers ----------- diff --git a/Documentation/assoc_array.txt b/Documentation/assoc_array.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2f2c6cdd73c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/assoc_array.txt @@ -0,0 +1,574 @@ + ======================================== + GENERIC ASSOCIATIVE ARRAY IMPLEMENTATION + ======================================== + +Contents: + + - Overview. + + - The public API. + - Edit script. + - Operations table. + - Manipulation functions. + - Access functions. + - Index key form. + + - Internal workings. + - Basic internal tree layout. + - Shortcuts. + - Splitting and collapsing nodes. + - Non-recursive iteration. + - Simultaneous alteration and iteration. + + +======== +OVERVIEW +======== + +This associative array implementation is an object container with the following +properties: + + (1) Objects are opaque pointers. The implementation does not care where they + point (if anywhere) or what they point to (if anything). + + [!] NOTE: Pointers to objects _must_ be zero in the least significant bit. + + (2) Objects do not need to contain linkage blocks for use by the array. This + permits an object to be located in multiple arrays simultaneously. + Rather, the array is made up of metadata blocks that point to objects. + + (3) Objects require index keys to locate them within the array. + + (4) Index keys must be unique. Inserting an object with the same key as one + already in the array will replace the old object. + + (5) Index keys can be of any length and can be of different lengths. + + (6) Index keys should encode the length early on, before any variation due to + length is seen. + + (7) Index keys can include a hash to scatter objects throughout the array. + + (8) The array can iterated over. The objects will not necessarily come out in + key order. + + (9) The array can be iterated over whilst it is being modified, provided the + RCU readlock is being held by the iterator. Note, however, under these + circumstances, some objects may be seen more than once. If this is a + problem, the iterator should lock against modification. Objects will not + be missed, however, unless deleted. + +(10) Objects in the array can be looked up by means of their index key. + +(11) Objects can be looked up whilst the array is being modified, provided the + RCU readlock is being held by the thread doing the look up. + +The implementation uses a tree of 16-pointer nodes internally that are indexed +on each level by nibbles from the index key in the same manner as in a radix +tree. To improve memory efficiency, shortcuts can be emplaced to skip over +what would otherwise be a series of single-occupancy nodes. Further, nodes +pack leaf object pointers into spare space in the node rather than making an +extra branch until as such time an object needs to be added to a full node. + + +============== +THE PUBLIC API +============== + +The public API can be found in <linux/assoc_array.h>. The associative array is +rooted on the following structure: + + struct assoc_array { + ... + }; + +The code is selected by enabling CONFIG_ASSOCIATIVE_ARRAY. + + +EDIT SCRIPT +----------- + +The insertion and deletion functions produce an 'edit script' that can later be +applied to effect the changes without risking ENOMEM. This retains the +preallocated metadata blocks that will be installed in the internal tree and +keeps track of the metadata blocks that will be removed from the tree when the +script is applied. + +This is also used to keep track of dead blocks and dead objects after the +script has been applied so that they can be freed later. The freeing is done +after an RCU grace period has passed - thus allowing access functions to +proceed under the RCU read lock. + +The script appears as outside of the API as a pointer of the type: + + struct assoc_array_edit; + +There are two functions for dealing with the script: + + (1) Apply an edit script. + + void assoc_array_apply_edit(struct assoc_array_edit *edit); + + This will perform the edit functions, interpolating various write barriers + to permit accesses under the RCU read lock to continue. The edit script + will then be passed to call_rcu() to free it and any dead stuff it points + to. + + (2) Cancel an edit script. + + void assoc_array_cancel_edit(struct assoc_array_edit *edit); + + This frees the edit script and all preallocated memory immediately. If + this was for insertion, the new object is _not_ released by this function, + but must rather be released by the caller. + +These functions are guaranteed not to fail. + + +OPERATIONS TABLE +---------------- + +Various functions take a table of operations: + + struct assoc_array_ops { + ... + }; + +This points to a number of methods, all of which need to be provided: + + (1) Get a chunk of index key from caller data: + + unsigned long (*get_key_chunk)(const void *index_key, int level); + + This should return a chunk of caller-supplied index key starting at the + *bit* position given by the level argument. The level argument will be a + multiple of ASSOC_ARRAY_KEY_CHUNK_SIZE and the function should return + ASSOC_ARRAY_KEY_CHUNK_SIZE bits. No error is possible. + + + (2) Get a chunk of an object's index key. + + unsigned long (*get_object_key_chunk)(const void *object, int level); + + As the previous function, but gets its data from an object in the array + rather than from a caller-supplied index key. + + + (3) See if this is the object we're looking for. + + bool (*compare_object)(const void *object, const void *index_key); + + Compare the object against an index key and return true if it matches and + false if it doesn't. + + + (4) Diff the index keys of two objects. + + int (*diff_objects)(const void *object, const void *index_key); + + Return the bit position at which the index key of the specified object + differs from the given index key or -1 if they are the same. + + + (5) Free an object. + + void (*free_object)(void *object); + + Free the specified object. Note that this may be called an RCU grace + period after assoc_array_apply_edit() was called, so synchronize_rcu() may + be necessary on module unloading. + + +MANIPULATION FUNCTIONS +---------------------- + +There are a number of functions for manipulating an associative array: + + (1) Initialise an associative array. + + void assoc_array_init(struct assoc_array *array); + + This initialises the base structure for an associative array. It can't + fail. + + + (2) Insert/replace an object in an associative array. + + struct assoc_array_edit * + assoc_array_insert(struct assoc_array *array, + const struct assoc_array_ops *ops, + const void *index_key, + void *object); + + This inserts the given object into the array. Note that the least + significant bit of the pointer must be zero as it's used to type-mark + pointers internally. + + If an object already exists for that key then it will be replaced with the + new object and the old one will be freed automatically. + + The index_key argument should hold index key information and is + passed to the methods in the ops table when they are called. + + This function makes no alteration to the array itself, but rather returns + an edit script that must be applied. -ENOMEM is returned in the case of + an out-of-memory error. + + The caller should lock exclusively against other modifiers of the array. + + + (3) Delete an object from an associative array. + + struct assoc_array_edit * + assoc_array_delete(struct assoc_array *array, + const struct assoc_array_ops *ops, + const void *index_key); + + This deletes an object that matches the specified data from the array. + + The index_key argument should hold index key information and is + passed to the methods in the ops table when they are called. + + This function makes no alteration to the array itself, but rather returns + an edit script that must be applied. -ENOMEM is returned in the case of + an out-of-memory error. NULL will be returned if the specified object is + not found within the array. + + The caller should lock exclusively against other modifiers of the array. + + + (4) Delete all objects from an associative array. + + struct assoc_array_edit * + assoc_array_clear(struct assoc_array *array, + const struct assoc_array_ops *ops); + + This deletes all the objects from an associative array and leaves it + completely empty. + + This function makes no alteration to the array itself, but rather returns + an edit script that must be applied. -ENOMEM is returned in the case of + an out-of-memory error. + + The caller should lock exclusively against other modifiers of the array. + + + (5) Destroy an associative array, deleting all objects. + + void assoc_array_destroy(struct assoc_array *array, + const struct assoc_array_ops *ops); + + This destroys the contents of the associative array and leaves it + completely empty. It is not permitted for another thread to be traversing + the array under the RCU read lock at the same time as this function is + destroying it as no RCU deferral is performed on memory release - + something that would require memory to be allocated. + + The caller should lock exclusively against other modifiers and accessors + of the array. + + + (6) Garbage collect an associative array. + + int assoc_array_gc(struct assoc_array *array, + const struct assoc_array_ops *ops, + bool (*iterator)(void *object, void *iterator_data), + void *iterator_data); + + This iterates over the objects in an associative array and passes each one + to iterator(). If iterator() returns true, the object is kept. If it + returns false, the object will be freed. If the iterator() function + returns true, it must perform any appropriate refcount incrementing on the + object before returning. + + The internal tree will be packed down if possible as part of the iteration + to reduce the number of nodes in it. + + The iterator_data is passed directly to iterator() and is otherwise + ignored by the function. + + The function will return 0 if successful and -ENOMEM if there wasn't + enough memory. + + It is possible for other threads to iterate over or search the array under + the RCU read lock whilst this function is in progress. The caller should + lock exclusively against other modifiers of the array. + + +ACCESS FUNCTIONS +---------------- + +There are two functions for accessing an associative array: + + (1) Iterate over all the objects in an associative array. + + int assoc_array_iterate(const struct assoc_array *array, + int (*iterator)(const void *object, + void *iterator_data), + void *iterator_data); + + This passes each object in the array to the iterator callback function. + iterator_data is private data for that function. + + This may be used on an array at the same time as the array is being + modified, provided the RCU read lock is held. Under such circumstances, + it is possible for the iteration function to see some objects twice. If + this is a problem, then modification should be locked against. The + iteration algorithm should not, however, miss any objects. + + The function will return 0 if no objects were in the array or else it will + return the result of the last iterator function called. Iteration stops + immediately if any call to the iteration function results in a non-zero + return. + + + (2) Find an object in an associative array. + + void *assoc_array_find(const struct assoc_array *array, + const struct assoc_array_ops *ops, + const void *index_key); + + This walks through the array's internal tree directly to the object + specified by the index key.. + + This may be used on an array at the same time as the array is being + modified, provided the RCU read lock is held. + + The function will return the object if found (and set *_type to the object + type) or will return NULL if the object was not found. + + +INDEX KEY FORM +-------------- + +The index key can be of any form, but since the algorithms aren't told how long +the key is, it is strongly recommended that the index key includes its length +very early on before any variation due to the length would have an effect on +comparisons. + +This will cause leaves with different length keys to scatter away from each +other - and those with the same length keys to cluster together. + +It is also recommended that the index key begin with a hash of the rest of the +key to maximise scattering throughout keyspace. + +The better the scattering, the wider and lower the internal tree will be. + +Poor scattering isn't too much of a problem as there are shortcuts and nodes +can contain mixtures of leaves and metadata pointers. + +The index key is read in chunks of machine word. Each chunk is subdivided into +one nibble (4 bits) per level, so on a 32-bit CPU this is good for 8 levels and +on a 64-bit CPU, 16 levels. Unless the scattering is really poor, it is +unlikely that more than one word of any particular index key will have to be +used. + + +================= +INTERNAL WORKINGS +================= + +The associative array data structure has an internal tree. This tree is +constructed of two types of metadata blocks: nodes and shortcuts. + +A node is an array of slots. Each slot can contain one of four things: + + (*) A NULL pointer, indicating that the slot is empty. + + (*) A pointer to an object (a leaf). + + (*) A pointer to a node at the next level. + + (*) A pointer to a shortcut. + + +BASIC INTERNAL TREE LAYOUT +-------------------------- + +Ignoring shortcuts for the moment, the nodes form a multilevel tree. The index +key space is strictly subdivided by the nodes in the tree and nodes occur on +fixed levels. For example: + + Level: 0 1 2 3 + =============== =============== =============== =============== + NODE D + NODE B NODE C +------>+---+ + +------>+---+ +------>+---+ | | 0 | + NODE A | | 0 | | | 0 | | +---+ + +---+ | +---+ | +---+ | : : + | 0 | | : : | : : | +---+ + +---+ | +---+ | +---+ | | f | + | 1 |---+ | 3 |---+ | 7 |---+ +---+ + +---+ +---+ +---+ + : : : : | 8 |---+ + +---+ +---+ +---+ | NODE E + | e |---+ | f | : : +------>+---+ + +---+ | +---+ +---+ | 0 | + | f | | | f | +---+ + +---+ | +---+ : : + | NODE F +---+ + +------>+---+ | f | + | 0 | NODE G +---+ + +---+ +------>+---+ + : : | | 0 | + +---+ | +---+ + | 6 |---+ : : + +---+ +---+ + : : | f | + +---+ +---+ + | f | + +---+ + +In the above example, there are 7 nodes (A-G), each with 16 slots (0-f). +Assuming no other meta data nodes in the tree, the key space is divided thusly: + + KEY PREFIX NODE + ========== ==== + 137* D + 138* E + 13[0-69-f]* C + 1[0-24-f]* B + e6* G + e[0-57-f]* F + [02-df]* A + +So, for instance, keys with the following example index keys will be found in +the appropriate nodes: + + INDEX KEY PREFIX NODE + =============== ======= ==== + 13694892892489 13 C + 13795289025897 137 D + 13889dde88793 138 E + 138bbb89003093 138 E + 1394879524789 12 C + 1458952489 1 B + 9431809de993ba - A + b4542910809cd - A + e5284310def98 e F + e68428974237 e6 G + e7fffcbd443 e F + f3842239082 - A + +To save memory, if a node can hold all the leaves in its portion of keyspace, +then the node will have all those leaves in it and will not have any metadata +pointers - even if some of those leaves would like to be in the same slot. + +A node can contain a heterogeneous mix of leaves and metadata pointers. +Metadata pointers must be in the slots that match their subdivisions of key +space. The leaves can be in any slot not occupied by a metadata pointer. It +is guaranteed that none of the leaves in a node will match a slot occupied by a +metadata pointer. If the metadata pointer is there, any leaf whose key matches +the metadata key prefix must be in the subtree that the metadata pointer points +to. + +In the above example list of index keys, node A will contain: + + SLOT CONTENT INDEX KEY (PREFIX) + ==== =============== ================== + 1 PTR TO NODE B 1* + any LEAF 9431809de993ba + any LEAF b4542910809cd + e PTR TO NODE F e* + any LEAF f3842239082 + +and node B: + + 3 PTR TO NODE C 13* + any LEAF 1458952489 + + +SHORTCUTS +--------- + +Shortcuts are metadata records that jump over a piece of keyspace. A shortcut +is a replacement for a series of single-occupancy nodes ascending through the +levels. Shortcuts exist to save memory and to speed up traversal. + +It is possible for the root of the tree to be a shortcut - say, for example, +the tree contains at least 17 nodes all with key prefix '1111'. The insertion +algorithm will insert a shortcut to skip over the '1111' keyspace in a single +bound and get to the fourth level where these actually become different. + + +SPLITTING AND COLLAPSING NODES +------------------------------ + +Each node has a maximum capacity of 16 leaves and metadata pointers. If the +insertion algorithm finds that it is trying to insert a 17th object into a +node, that node will be split such that at least two leaves that have a common +key segment at that level end up in a separate node rooted on that slot for +that common key segment. + +If the leaves in a full node and the leaf that is being inserted are +sufficiently similar, then a shortcut will be inserted into the tree. + +When the number of objects in the subtree rooted at a node falls to 16 or +fewer, then the subtree will be collapsed down to a single node - and this will +ripple towards the root if possible. + + +NON-RECURSIVE ITERATION +----------------------- + +Each node and shortcut contains a back pointer to its parent and the number of +slot in that parent that points to it. None-recursive iteration uses these to +proceed rootwards through the tree, going to the parent node, slot N + 1 to +make sure progress is made without the need for a stack. + +The backpointers, however, make simultaneous alteration and iteration tricky. + + +SIMULTANEOUS ALTERATION AND ITERATION +------------------------------------- + +There are a number of cases to consider: + + (1) Simple insert/replace. This involves simply replacing a NULL or old + matching leaf pointer with the pointer to the new leaf after a barrier. + The metadata blocks don't change otherwise. An old leaf won't be freed + until after the RCU grace period. + + (2) Simple delete. This involves just clearing an old matching leaf. The + metadata blocks don't change otherwise. The old leaf won't be freed until + after the RCU grace period. + + (3) Insertion replacing part of a subtree that we haven't yet entered. This + may involve replacement of part of that subtree - but that won't affect + the iteration as we won't have reached the pointer to it yet and the + ancestry blocks are not replaced (the layout of those does not change). + + (4) Insertion replacing nodes that we're actively processing. This isn't a + problem as we've passed the anchoring pointer and won't switch onto the + new layout until we follow the back pointers - at which point we've + already examined the leaves in the replaced node (we iterate over all the + leaves in a node before following any of its metadata pointers). + + We might, however, re-see some leaves that have been split out into a new + branch that's in a slot further along than we were at. + + (5) Insertion replacing nodes that we're processing a dependent branch of. + This won't affect us until we follow the back pointers. Similar to (4). + + (6) Deletion collapsing a branch under us. This doesn't affect us because the + back pointers will get us back to the parent of the new node before we + could see the new node. The entire collapsed subtree is thrown away + unchanged - and will still be rooted on the same slot, so we shouldn't + process it a second time as we'll go back to slot + 1. + +Note: + + (*) Under some circumstances, we need to simultaneously change the parent + pointer and the parent slot pointer on a node (say, for example, we + inserted another node before it and moved it up a level). We cannot do + this without locking against a read - so we have to replace that node too. + + However, when we're changing a shortcut into a node this isn't a problem + as shortcuts only have one slot and so the parent slot number isn't used + when traversing backwards over one. This means that it's okay to change + the slot number first - provided suitable barriers are used to make sure + the parent slot number is read after the back pointer. + +Obsolete blocks and leaves are freed up after an RCU grace period has passed, +so as long as anyone doing walking or iteration holds the RCU read lock, the +old superstructure should not go away on them. diff --git a/Documentation/block/null_blk.txt b/Documentation/block/null_blk.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b2830b435895 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/block/null_blk.txt @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +Null block device driver +================================================================================ + +I. Overview + +The null block device (/dev/nullb*) is used for benchmarking the various +block-layer implementations. It emulates a block device of X gigabytes in size. +The following instances are possible: + + Single-queue block-layer + - Request-based. + - Single submission queue per device. + - Implements IO scheduling algorithms (CFQ, Deadline, noop). + Multi-queue block-layer + - Request-based. + - Configurable submission queues per device. + No block-layer (Known as bio-based) + - Bio-based. IO requests are submitted directly to the device driver. + - Directly accepts bio data structure and returns them. + +All of them have a completion queue for each core in the system. + +II. Module parameters applicable for all instances: + +queue_mode=[0-2]: Default: 2-Multi-queue + Selects which block-layer the module should instantiate with. + + 0: Bio-based. + 1: Single-queue. + 2: Multi-queue. + +home_node=[0--nr_nodes]: Default: NUMA_NO_NODE + Selects what CPU node the data structures are allocated from. + +gb=[Size in GB]: Default: 250GB + The size of the device reported to the system. + +bs=[Block size (in bytes)]: Default: 512 bytes + The block size reported to the system. + +nr_devices=[Number of devices]: Default: 2 + Number of block devices instantiated. They are instantiated as /dev/nullb0, + etc. + +irq_mode=[0-2]: Default: 1-Soft-irq + The completion mode used for completing IOs to the block-layer. + + 0: None. + 1: Soft-irq. Uses IPI to complete IOs across CPU nodes. Simulates the overhead + when IOs are issued from another CPU node than the home the device is + connected to. + 2: Timer: Waits a specific period (completion_nsec) for each IO before + completion. + +completion_nsec=[ns]: Default: 10.000ns + Combined with irq_mode=2 (timer). The time each completion event must wait. + +submit_queues=[0..nr_cpus]: + The number of submission queues attached to the device driver. If unset, it + defaults to 1 on single-queue and bio-based instances. For multi-queue, + it is ignored when use_per_node_hctx module parameter is 1. + +hw_queue_depth=[0..qdepth]: Default: 64 + The hardware queue depth of the device. + +III: Multi-queue specific parameters + +use_per_node_hctx=[0/1]: Default: 0 + 0: The number of submit queues are set to the value of the submit_queues + parameter. + 1: The multi-queue block layer is instantiated with a hardware dispatch + queue for each CPU node in the system. diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt index 638bf17ff869..821de56d1580 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt @@ -24,7 +24,6 @@ CONTENTS: 2.1 Basic Usage 2.2 Attaching processes 2.3 Mounting hierarchies by name - 2.4 Notification API 3. Kernel API 3.1 Overview 3.2 Synchronization @@ -472,25 +471,6 @@ you give a subsystem a name. The name of the subsystem appears as part of the hierarchy description in /proc/mounts and /proc/<pid>/cgroups. -2.4 Notification API --------------------- - -There is mechanism which allows to get notifications about changing -status of a cgroup. - -To register a new notification handler you need to: - - create a file descriptor for event notification using eventfd(2); - - open a control file to be monitored (e.g. memory.usage_in_bytes); - - write "<event_fd> <control_fd> <args>" to cgroup.event_control. - Interpretation of args is defined by control file implementation; - -eventfd will be woken up by control file implementation or when the -cgroup is removed. - -To unregister a notification handler just close eventfd. - -NOTE: Support of notifications should be implemented for the control -file. See documentation for the subsystem. 3. Kernel API ============= diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt index e2bc132608fd..2622115276aa 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt @@ -577,7 +577,7 @@ Each memcg's numa_stat file includes "total", "file", "anon" and "unevictable" per-node page counts including "hierarchical_<counter>" which sums up all hierarchical children's values in addition to the memcg's own value. -The ouput format of memory.numa_stat is: +The output format of memory.numa_stat is: total=<total pages> N0=<node 0 pages> N1=<node 1 pages> ... file=<total file pages> N0=<node 0 pages> N1=<node 1 pages> ... @@ -670,7 +670,7 @@ page tables. 8.1 Interface -This feature is disabled by default. It can be enabledi (and disabled again) by +This feature is disabled by default. It can be enabled (and disabled again) by writing to memory.move_charge_at_immigrate of the destination cgroup. If you want to enable it: diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/resource_counter.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/resource_counter.txt index c4d99ed0b418..52e1da16a309 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/resource_counter.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/resource_counter.txt @@ -97,8 +97,8 @@ to work with it. (struct res_counter *rc, struct res_counter *top, unsinged long val) - Almost same as res_cunter_uncharge() but propagation of uncharge - stops when rc == top. This is useful when kill a res_coutner in + Almost same as res_counter_uncharge() but propagation of uncharge + stops when rc == top. This is useful when kill a res_counter in child cgroup. 2.1 Other accounting routines diff --git a/Documentation/circular-buffers.txt b/Documentation/circular-buffers.txt index 8117e5bf6065..88951b179262 100644 --- a/Documentation/circular-buffers.txt +++ b/Documentation/circular-buffers.txt @@ -160,6 +160,7 @@ The producer will look something like this: spin_lock(&producer_lock); unsigned long head = buffer->head; + /* The spin_unlock() and next spin_lock() provide needed ordering. */ unsigned long tail = ACCESS_ONCE(buffer->tail); if (CIRC_SPACE(head, tail, buffer->size) >= 1) { @@ -168,9 +169,8 @@ The producer will look something like this: produce_item(item); - smp_wmb(); /* commit the item before incrementing the head */ - - buffer->head = (head + 1) & (buffer->size - 1); + smp_store_release(buffer->head, + (head + 1) & (buffer->size - 1)); /* wake_up() will make sure that the head is committed before * waking anyone up */ @@ -183,9 +183,14 @@ This will instruct the CPU that the contents of the new item must be written before the head index makes it available to the consumer and then instructs the CPU that the revised head index must be written before the consumer is woken. -Note that wake_up() doesn't have to be the exact mechanism used, but whatever -is used must guarantee a (write) memory barrier between the update of the head -index and the change of state of the consumer, if a change of state occurs. +Note that wake_up() does not guarantee any sort of barrier unless something +is actually awakened. We therefore cannot rely on it for ordering. However, +there is always one element of the array left empty. Therefore, the +producer must produce two elements before it could possibly corrupt the +element currently being read by the consumer. Therefore, the unlock-lock +pair between consecutive invocations of the consumer provides the necessary +ordering between the read of the index indicating that the consumer has +vacated a given element and the write by the producer to that same element. THE CONSUMER @@ -195,21 +200,20 @@ The consumer will look something like this: spin_lock(&consumer_lock); - unsigned long head = ACCESS_ONCE(buffer->head); + /* Read index before reading contents at that index. */ + unsigned long head = smp_load_acquire(buffer->head); unsigned long tail = buffer->tail; if (CIRC_CNT(head, tail, buffer->size) >= 1) { - /* read index before reading contents at that index */ - smp_read_barrier_depends(); /* extract one item from the buffer */ struct item *item = buffer[tail]; consume_item(item); - smp_mb(); /* finish reading descriptor before incrementing tail */ - - buffer->tail = (tail + 1) & (buffer->size - 1); + /* Finish reading descriptor before incrementing tail. */ + smp_store_release(buffer->tail, + (tail + 1) & (buffer->size - 1)); } spin_unlock(&consumer_lock); @@ -218,12 +222,17 @@ This will instruct the CPU to make sure the index is up to date before reading the new item, and then it shall make sure the CPU has finished reading the item before it writes the new tail pointer, which will erase the item. - -Note the use of ACCESS_ONCE() in both algorithms to read the opposition index. -This prevents the compiler from discarding and reloading its cached value - -which some compilers will do across smp_read_barrier_depends(). This isn't -strictly needed if you can be sure that the opposition index will _only_ be -used the once. +Note the use of ACCESS_ONCE() and smp_load_acquire() to read the +opposition index. This prevents the compiler from discarding and +reloading its cached value - which some compilers will do across +smp_read_barrier_depends(). This isn't strictly needed if you can +be sure that the opposition index will _only_ be used the once. +The smp_load_acquire() additionally forces the CPU to order against +subsequent memory references. Similarly, smp_store_release() is used +in both algorithms to write the thread's index. This documents the +fact that we are writing to something that can be read concurrently, +prevents the compiler from tearing the store, and enforces ordering +against previous accesses. =============== diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/cache-policies.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/cache-policies.txt index df52a849957f..66c2774c0c64 100644 --- a/Documentation/device-mapper/cache-policies.txt +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/cache-policies.txt @@ -40,8 +40,11 @@ on hit count on entry. The policy aims to take different cache miss costs into account and to adjust to varying load patterns automatically. Message and constructor argument pairs are: - 'sequential_threshold <#nr_sequential_ios>' and - 'random_threshold <#nr_random_ios>'. + 'sequential_threshold <#nr_sequential_ios>' + 'random_threshold <#nr_random_ios>' + 'read_promote_adjustment <value>' + 'write_promote_adjustment <value>' + 'discard_promote_adjustment <value>' The sequential threshold indicates the number of contiguous I/Os required before a stream is treated as sequential. The random threshold @@ -55,6 +58,15 @@ since spindles tend to have good bandwidth. The io_tracker counts contiguous I/Os to try to spot when the io is in one of these sequential modes. +Internally the mq policy maintains a promotion threshold variable. If +the hit count of a block not in the cache goes above this threshold it +gets promoted to the cache. The read, write and discard promote adjustment +tunables allow you to tweak the promotion threshold by adding a small +value based on the io type. They default to 4, 8 and 1 respectively. +If you're trying to quickly warm a new cache device you may wish to +reduce these to encourage promotion. Remember to switch them back to +their defaults after the cache fills though. + cleaner ------- diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt index 274752f8bdf9..e6b72d355151 100644 --- a/Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt @@ -217,36 +217,43 @@ the characteristics of a specific policy, always request it by name. Status ------ -<#used metadata blocks>/<#total metadata blocks> <#read hits> <#read misses> -<#write hits> <#write misses> <#demotions> <#promotions> <#blocks in cache> -<#dirty> <#features> <features>* <#core args> <core args>* <#policy args> -<policy args>* - -#used metadata blocks : Number of metadata blocks used -#total metadata blocks : Total number of metadata blocks -#read hits : Number of times a READ bio has been mapped +<metadata block size> <#used metadata blocks>/<#total metadata blocks> +<cache block size> <#used cache blocks>/<#total cache blocks> +<#read hits> <#read misses> <#write hits> <#write misses> +<#demotions> <#promotions> <#dirty> <#features> <features>* +<#core args> <core args>* <policy name> <#policy args> <policy args>* + +metadata block size : Fixed block size for each metadata block in + sectors +#used metadata blocks : Number of metadata blocks used +#total metadata blocks : Total number of metadata blocks +cache block size : Configurable block size for the cache device + in sectors +#used cache blocks : Number of blocks resident in the cache +#total cache blocks : Total number of cache blocks +#read hits : Number of times a READ bio has been mapped to the cache -#read misses : Number of times a READ bio has been mapped +#read misses : Number of times a READ bio has been mapped to the origin -#write hits : Number of times a WRITE bio has been mapped +#write hits : Number of times a WRITE bio has been mapped to the cache -#write misses : Number of times a WRITE bio has been +#write misses : Number of times a WRITE bio has been mapped to the origin -#demotions : Number of times a block has been removed +#demotions : Number of times a block has been removed from the cache -#promotions : Number of times a block has been moved to +#promotions : Number of times a block has been moved to the cache -#blocks in cache : Number of blocks resident in the cache -#dirty : Number of blocks in the cache that differ +#dirty : Number of blocks in the cache that differ from the origin -#feature args : Number of feature args to follow -feature args : 'writethrough' (optional) -#core args : Number of core arguments (must be even) -core args : Key/value pairs for tuning the core +#feature args : Number of feature args to follow +feature args : 'writethrough' (optional) +#core args : Number of core arguments (must be even) +core args : Key/value pairs for tuning the core e.g. migration_threshold -#policy args : Number of policy arguments to follow (must be even) -policy args : Key/value pairs - e.g. 'sequential_threshold 1024 +policy name : Name of the policy +#policy args : Number of policy arguments to follow (must be even) +policy args : Key/value pairs + e.g. sequential_threshold Messages -------- @@ -266,10 +273,12 @@ E.g. Invalidation is removing an entry from the cache without writing it back. Cache blocks can be invalidated via the invalidate_cblocks message, which takes an arbitrary number of cblock ranges. Each cblock -must be expressed as a decimal value, in the future a variant message -that takes cblock ranges expressed in hexidecimal may be needed to -better support efficient invalidation of larger caches. The cache must -be in passthrough mode when invalidate_cblocks is used. +range's end value is "one past the end", meaning 5-10 expresses a range +of values from 5 to 9. Each cblock must be expressed as a decimal +value, in the future a variant message that takes cblock ranges +expressed in hexidecimal may be needed to better support efficient +invalidation of larger caches. The cache must be in passthrough mode +when invalidate_cblocks is used. invalidate_cblocks [<cblock>|<cblock begin>-<cblock end>]* diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt index 50c44cf79b0e..8a7a3d46e0da 100644 --- a/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt @@ -235,6 +235,8 @@ i) Constructor read_only: Don't allow any changes to be made to the pool metadata. + error_if_no_space: Error IOs, instead of queueing, if no space. + Data block size must be between 64KB (128 sectors) and 1GB (2097152 sectors) inclusive. @@ -276,6 +278,11 @@ ii) Status contain the string 'Fail'. The userspace recovery tools should then be used. + error_if_no_space|queue_if_no_space + If the pool runs out of data or metadata space, the pool will + either queue or error the IO destined to the data device. The + default is to queue the IO until more space is added. + iii) Messages create_thin <dev id> diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arc/pmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arc/pmu.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..49d517340de3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arc/pmu.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +* ARC Performance Monitor Unit + +The ARC 700 can be configured with a pipeline performance monitor for counting +CPU and cache events like cache misses and hits. + +Note that: + * ARC 700 refers to a family of ARC processor cores; + - There is only one type of PMU available for the whole family; + - The PMU may support different sets of events; supported events are probed + at boot time, as required by the reference manual. + + * The ARC 700 PMU does not support interrupts; although HW events may be + counted, the HW events themselves cannot serve as a trigger for a sample. + +Required properties: + +- compatible : should contain + "snps,arc700-pmu" + +Example: + +pmu { + compatible = "snps,arc700-pmu"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-at91.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-at91.txt index 1196290082d1..78530e621a1e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-at91.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-at91.txt @@ -20,6 +20,10 @@ TC/TCLIB Timer required properties: - interrupts: Should contain all interrupts for the TC block Note that you can specify several interrupt cells if the TC block has one interrupt per channel. +- clock-names: tuple listing input clock names. + Required elements: "t0_clk" + Optional elements: "t1_clk", "t2_clk" +- clocks: phandles to input clocks. Examples: @@ -28,6 +32,8 @@ One interrupt per TC block: compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-tcb"; reg = <0xfff7c000 0x100>; interrupts = <18 4>; + clocks = <&tcb0_clk>; + clock-names = "t0_clk"; }; One interrupt per TC channel in a TC block: @@ -35,6 +41,8 @@ One interrupt per TC channel in a TC block: compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-tcb"; reg = <0xfffdc000 0x100>; interrupts = <26 4 27 4 28 4>; + clocks = <&tcb1_clk>; + clock-names = "t0_clk"; }; RSTC Reset Controller required properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda/mem-ctrlr.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda/mem-ctrlr.txt index f770ac0893d4..049675944b78 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda/mem-ctrlr.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda/mem-ctrlr.txt @@ -1,7 +1,9 @@ Calxeda DDR memory controller Properties: -- compatible : Should be "calxeda,hb-ddr-ctrl" +- compatible : Should be: + - "calxeda,hb-ddr-ctrl" for ECX-1000 + - "calxeda,ecx-2000-ddr-ctrl" for ECX-2000 - reg : Address and size for DDR controller registers. - interrupts : Interrupt for DDR controller. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/mpu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/mpu.txt index 1a5a42ce21bb..83f405bde138 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/mpu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/mpu.txt @@ -7,10 +7,18 @@ The MPU contain CPUs, GIC, L2 cache and a local PRCM. Required properties: - compatible : Should be "ti,omap3-mpu" for OMAP3 Should be "ti,omap4-mpu" for OMAP4 + Should be "ti,omap5-mpu" for OMAP5 - ti,hwmods: "mpu" Examples: +- For an OMAP5 SMP system: + +mpu { + compatible = "ti,omap5-mpu"; + ti,hwmods = "mpu" +}; + - For an OMAP4 SMP system: mpu { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt index 343781b9f246..3e1e498fea96 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ representation in the device tree should be done as under:- Required properties: - compatible : should be one of + "arm,armv8-pmuv3" "arm,cortex-a15-pmu" "arm,cortex-a9-pmu" "arm,cortex-a8-pmu" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/exynos-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/exynos-adc.txt index 47ada1dff216..5d49f2b37f68 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/exynos-adc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/exynos-adc.txt @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ adc@12D10000 { /* NTC thermistor is a hwmon device */ ncp15wb473@0 { compatible = "ntc,ncp15wb473"; - pullup-uV = <1800000>; + pullup-uv = <1800000>; pullup-ohm = <47000>; pulldown-ohm = <0>; io-channels = <&adc 4>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/marvell.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/marvell.txt index b5cdd20cde9c..1c8351604d38 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/marvell.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/marvell.txt @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ * Marvell Orion SATA Required Properties: -- compatibility : "marvell,orion-sata" +- compatibility : "marvell,orion-sata" or "marvell,armada-370-sata" - reg : Address range of controller - interrupts : Interrupt controller is using - nr-ports : Number of SATA ports in use. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/sata_rcar.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/sata_rcar.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1e6111333fa8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/sata_rcar.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +* Renesas R-Car SATA + +Required properties: +- compatible : should contain one of the following: + - "renesas,sata-r8a7779" for R-Car H1 + - "renesas,sata-r8a7790" for R-Car H2 + - "renesas,sata-r8a7791" for R-Car M2 +- reg : address and length of the SATA registers; +- interrupts : must consist of one interrupt specifier. + +Example: + +sata: sata@fc600000 { + compatible = "renesas,sata-r8a7779"; + reg = <0xfc600000 0x2000>; + interrupt-parent = <&gic>; + interrupts = <0 100 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos4-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos4-clock.txt index c6bf8a6c8f52..a2ac2d9ac71a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos4-clock.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos4-clock.txt @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ SoC's in the Exynos4 family. Required Properties: -- comptible: should be one of the following. +- compatible: should be one of the following. - "samsung,exynos4210-clock" - controller compatible with Exynos4210 SoC. - "samsung,exynos4412-clock" - controller compatible with Exynos4412 SoC. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5250-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5250-clock.txt index 24765c146e31..0f2f920e8734 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5250-clock.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5250-clock.txt @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ controllers within the Exynos5250 SoC. Required Properties: -- comptible: should be one of the following. +- compatible: should be one of the following. - "samsung,exynos5250-clock" - controller compatible with Exynos5250 SoC. - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped @@ -159,6 +159,8 @@ clock which they consume. mixer 343 hdmi 344 g2d 345 + mdma0 346 + smmu_mdma0 347 [Clock Muxes] diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5420-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5420-clock.txt index 32aa34ecad36..458f34789e5d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5420-clock.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5420-clock.txt @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ controllers within the Exynos5420 SoC. Required Properties: -- comptible: should be one of the following. +- compatible: should be one of the following. - "samsung,exynos5420-clock" - controller compatible with Exynos5420 SoC. - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5440-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5440-clock.txt index 4499e9966bc9..9955dc9c7d96 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5440-clock.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5440-clock.txt @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ controllers within the Exynos5440 SoC. Required Properties: -- comptible: should be "samsung,exynos5440-clock". +- compatible: should be "samsung,exynos5440-clock". - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped region. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/omap-des.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/omap-des.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e8c63bf2e16d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/omap-des.txt @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +OMAP SoC DES crypto Module + +Required properties: + +- compatible : Should contain "ti,omap4-des" +- ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated with the DES module +- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the module +- interrupts : the interrupt-specifier for the DES module +- clocks : A phandle to the functional clock node of the DES module + corresponding to each entry in clock-names +- clock-names : Name of the functional clock, should be "fck" + +Optional properties: +- dmas: DMA specifiers for tx and rx dma. See the DMA client binding, + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt + Each entry corresponds to an entry in dma-names +- dma-names: DMA request names should include "tx" and "rx" if present + +Example: + /* DRA7xx SoC */ + des: des@480a5000 { + compatible = "ti,omap4-des"; + ti,hwmods = "des"; + reg = <0x480a5000 0xa0>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 82 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + dmas = <&sdma 117>, <&sdma 116>; + dma-names = "tx", "rx"; + clocks = <&l3_iclk_div>; + clock-names = "fck"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/omap-sham.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/omap-sham.txt index f839acd6f0ee..ad9115569611 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/omap-sham.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/omap-sham.txt @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ Required properties: SHAM versions: - "ti,omap2-sham" for OMAP2 & OMAP3. - "ti,omap4-sham" for OMAP4 and AM33XX. - Note that these two versions are incompatible. + - "ti,omap5-sham" for OMAP5, DRA7 and AM43XX. - ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated with the SHAM module - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the module - interrupts : the interrupt-specifier for the SHAM module. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/atmel-dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/atmel-dma.txt index e1f343c7a34b..f69bcf5a6343 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/atmel-dma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/atmel-dma.txt @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ The three cells in order are: dependent: - bit 7-0: peripheral identifier for the hardware handshaking interface. The identifier can be different for tx and rx. - - bit 11-8: FIFO configuration. 0 for half FIFO, 1 for ALAP, 1 for ASAP. + - bit 11-8: FIFO configuration. 0 for half FIFO, 1 for ALAP, 2 for ASAP. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-palmas.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-palmas.txt index 7dab6a8f4a0e..45414bbcd945 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-palmas.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-palmas.txt @@ -2,7 +2,11 @@ EXTCON FOR PALMAS/TWL CHIPS PALMAS USB COMPARATOR Required Properties: - - compatible : Should be "ti,palmas-usb" or "ti,twl6035-usb" + - compatible: should contain one of: + * "ti,palmas-usb-vid". + * "ti,twl6035-usb-vid". + * "ti,palmas-usb" (DEPRECATED - use "ti,palmas-usb-vid"). + * "ti,twl6035-usb" (DEPRECATED - use "ti,twl6035-usb-vid"). Optional Properties: - ti,wakeup : To enable the wakeup comparator in probe diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/8xxx_gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/8xxx_gpio.txt index b0019eb5330e..798cfc9d3839 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/8xxx_gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/8xxx_gpio.txt @@ -5,16 +5,42 @@ This is for the non-QE/CPM/GUTs GPIO controllers as found on Every GPIO controller node must have #gpio-cells property defined, this information will be used to translate gpio-specifiers. +See bindings/gpio/gpio.txt for details of how to specify GPIO +information for devices. + +The GPIO module usually is connected to the SoC's internal interrupt +controller, see bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt (the +interrupt client nodes section) for details how to specify this GPIO +module's interrupt. + +The GPIO module may serve as another interrupt controller (cascaded to +the SoC's internal interrupt controller). See the interrupt controller +nodes section in bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for +details. Required properties: -- compatible : "fsl,<CHIP>-gpio" followed by "fsl,mpc8349-gpio" for - 83xx, "fsl,mpc8572-gpio" for 85xx and "fsl,mpc8610-gpio" for 86xx. -- #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the pin number and the - second cell is used to specify optional parameters (currently unused). - - interrupts : Interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ. - - interrupt-parent : Phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. -- gpio-controller : Marks the port as GPIO controller. +- compatible: "fsl,<chip>-gpio" followed by "fsl,mpc8349-gpio" + for 83xx, "fsl,mpc8572-gpio" for 85xx, or + "fsl,mpc8610-gpio" for 86xx. +- #gpio-cells: Should be two. The first cell is the pin number + and the second cell is used to specify optional + parameters (currently unused). +- interrupt-parent: Phandle for the interrupt controller that + services interrupts for this device. +- interrupts: Interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ. +- gpio-controller: Marks the port as GPIO controller. + +Optional properties: +- interrupt-controller: Empty boolean property which marks the GPIO + module as an IRQ controller. +- #interrupt-cells: Should be two. Defines the number of integer + cells required to specify an interrupt within + this interrupt controller. The first cell + defines the pin number, the second cell + defines additional flags (trigger type, + trigger polarity). Note that the available + set of trigger conditions supported by the + GPIO module depends on the actual SoC. Example of gpio-controller nodes for a MPC8347 SoC: @@ -22,39 +48,27 @@ Example of gpio-controller nodes for a MPC8347 SoC: #gpio-cells = <2>; compatible = "fsl,mpc8347-gpio", "fsl,mpc8349-gpio"; reg = <0xc00 0x100>; - interrupts = <74 0x8>; interrupt-parent = <&ipic>; + interrupts = <74 0x8>; gpio-controller; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; }; gpio2: gpio-controller@d00 { #gpio-cells = <2>; compatible = "fsl,mpc8347-gpio", "fsl,mpc8349-gpio"; reg = <0xd00 0x100>; - interrupts = <75 0x8>; interrupt-parent = <&ipic>; + interrupts = <75 0x8>; gpio-controller; }; -See booting-without-of.txt for details of how to specify GPIO -information for devices. - -To use GPIO pins as interrupt sources for peripherals, specify the -GPIO controller as the interrupt parent and define GPIO number + -trigger mode using the interrupts property, which is defined like -this: - -interrupts = <number trigger>, where: - - number: GPIO pin (0..31) - - trigger: trigger mode: - 2 = trigger on falling edge - 3 = trigger on both edges - -Example of device using this is: +Example of a peripheral using the GPIO module as an IRQ controller: funkyfpga@0 { compatible = "funky-fpga"; ... - interrupts = <4 3>; interrupt-parent = <&gpio1>; + interrupts = <4 3>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-lp3943.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-lp3943.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..80fcb7d70e13 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-lp3943.txt @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +TI/National Semiconductor LP3943 GPIO controller + +Required properties: + - compatible: "ti,lp3943-gpio" + - gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a GPIO controller. + - #gpio-cells: Should be 2. See gpio.txt in this directory for a + description of the cells format. + +Example: +Simple LED controls with LP3943 GPIO controller + +&i2c4 { + lp3943@60 { + compatible = "ti,lp3943"; + reg = <0x60>; + + gpioex: gpio { + compatible = "ti,lp3943-gpio"; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + }; + }; +}; + +leds { + compatible = "gpio-leds"; + indicator1 { + label = "indi1"; + gpios = <&gpioex 9 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + }; + + indicator2 { + label = "indi2"; + gpios = <&gpioex 10 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + default-state = "off"; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mcp23s08.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mcp23s08.txt index daa30174bcc1..3ddc7ccfe5f3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mcp23s08.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mcp23s08.txt @@ -38,12 +38,38 @@ Required device specific properties (only for SPI chips): removed. - spi-max-frequency = The maximum frequency this chip is able to handle -Example I2C: +Optional properties: +- #interrupt-cells : Should be two. + - first cell is the pin number + - second cell is used to specify flags. +- interrupt-controller: Marks the device node as a interrupt controller. +NOTE: The interrupt functionality is only supported for i2c versions of the +chips. The spi chips can also do the interrupts, but this is not supported by +the linux driver yet. + +Optional device specific properties: +- microchip,irq-mirror: Sets the mirror flag in the IOCON register. Devices + with two interrupt outputs (these are the devices ending with 17 and + those that have 16 IOs) have two IO banks: IO 0-7 form bank 1 and + IO 8-15 are bank 2. These chips have two different interrupt outputs: + One for bank 1 and another for bank 2. If irq-mirror is set, both + interrupts are generated regardless of the bank that an input change + occured on. If it is not set, the interrupt are only generated for the + bank they belong to. + On devices with only one interrupt output this property is useless. + +Example I2C (with interrupt): gpiom1: gpio@20 { compatible = "microchip,mcp23017"; gpio-controller; #gpio-cells = <2>; reg = <0x20>; + + interrupt-parent = <&gpio1>; + interrupts = <17 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells=<2>; + microchip,irq-mirror; }; Example SPI: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/moxa,moxart-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/moxa,moxart-gpio.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f8e8f185a3db --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/moxa,moxart-gpio.txt @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +MOXA ART GPIO Controller + +Required properties: + +- #gpio-cells : Should be 2, The first cell is the pin number, + the second cell is used to specify polarity: + 0 = active high + 1 = active low +- compatible : Must be "moxa,moxart-gpio" +- reg : Should contain registers location and length + +Example: + + gpio: gpio@98700000 { + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + compatible = "moxa,moxart-gpio"; + reg = <0x98700000 0xC>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt index 8655df9440d5..f61cef74a212 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt @@ -2,10 +2,11 @@ Required Properties: - - compatible: should be one of the following. + - compatible: should contain one of the following. - "renesas,gpio-r8a7778": for R8A7778 (R-Mobile M1) compatible GPIO controller. - "renesas,gpio-r8a7779": for R8A7779 (R-Car H1) compatible GPIO controller. - "renesas,gpio-r8a7790": for R8A7790 (R-Car H2) compatible GPIO controller. + - "renesas,gpio-r8a7791": for R8A7791 (R-Car M2) compatible GPIO controller. - "renesas,gpio-rcar": for generic R-Car GPIO controller. - reg: Base address and length of each memory resource used by the GPIO diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/lm90.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/lm90.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e8632486b9ef --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/lm90.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +* LM90 series thermometer. + +Required node properties: +- compatible: manufacturer and chip name, one of + "adi,adm1032" + "adi,adt7461" + "adi,adt7461a" + "gmt,g781" + "national,lm90" + "national,lm86" + "national,lm89" + "national,lm99" + "dallas,max6646" + "dallas,max6647" + "dallas,max6649" + "dallas,max6657" + "dallas,max6658" + "dallas,max6659" + "dallas,max6680" + "dallas,max6681" + "dallas,max6695" + "dallas,max6696" + "onnn,nct1008" + "winbond,w83l771" + "nxp,sa56004" + +- reg: I2C bus address of the device + +- vcc-supply: vcc regulator for the supply voltage. + +Optional properties: +- interrupts: Contains a single interrupt specifier which describes the + LM90 "-ALERT" pin output. + See interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for the format. + +Example LM90 node: + +temp-sensor { + compatible = "onnn,nct1008"; + reg = <0x4c>; + vcc-supply = <&palmas_ldo6_reg>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio>; + interrupts = <TEGRA_GPIO(O, 4) IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; +} diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-at91.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-at91.txt index b689a0d9441c..4fade84bea16 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-at91.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-at91.txt @@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ Required properties : - interrupts: interrupt number to the cpu. - #address-cells = <1>; - #size-cells = <0>; +- clocks: phandles to input clocks. Optional properties: - Child nodes conforming to i2c bus binding @@ -21,6 +22,7 @@ i2c0: i2c@fff84000 { interrupts = <12 4 6>; #address-cells = <1>; #size-cells = <0>; + clocks = <&twi0_clk>; 24c512@50 { compatible = "24c512"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-bcm-kona.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-bcm-kona.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1b87b741fa8e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-bcm-kona.txt @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +Broadcom Kona Family I2C +========================= + +This I2C controller is used in the following Broadcom SoCs: + + BCM11130 + BCM11140 + BCM11351 + BCM28145 + BCM28155 + +Required Properties +------------------- +- compatible: "brcm,bcm11351-i2c", "brcm,kona-i2c" +- reg: Physical base address and length of controller registers +- interrupts: The interrupt number used by the controller +- clocks: clock specifier for the kona i2c external clock +- clock-frequency: The I2C bus frequency in Hz +- #address-cells: Should be <1> +- #size-cells: Should be <0> + +Refer to clocks/clock-bindings.txt for generic clock consumer +properties. + +Example: + +i2c@3e016000 { + compatible = "brcm,bcm11351-i2c","brcm,kona-i2c"; + reg = <0x3e016000 0x80>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 103 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&bsc1_clk>; + clock-frequency = <400000>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-exynos5.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-exynos5.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..056732cfdcee --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-exynos5.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +* Samsung's High Speed I2C controller + +The Samsung's High Speed I2C controller is used to interface with I2C devices +at various speeds ranging from 100khz to 3.4Mhz. + +Required properties: + - compatible: value should be. + -> "samsung,exynos5-hsi2c", for i2c compatible with exynos5 hsi2c. + - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped + region. + - interrupts: interrupt number to the cpu. + - #address-cells: always 1 (for i2c addresses) + - #size-cells: always 0 + + - Pinctrl: + - pinctrl-0: Pin control group to be used for this controller. + - pinctrl-names: Should contain only one value - "default". + +Optional properties: + - clock-frequency: Desired operating frequency in Hz of the bus. + -> If not specified, the bus operates in fast-speed mode at + at 100khz. + -> If specified, the bus operates in high-speed mode only if the + clock-frequency is >= 1Mhz. + +Example: + +hsi2c@12ca0000 { + compatible = "samsung,exynos5-hsi2c"; + reg = <0x12ca0000 0x100>; + interrupts = <56>; + clock-frequency = <100000>; + + pinctrl-0 = <&i2c4_bus>; + pinctrl-names = "default"; + + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + s2mps11_pmic@66 { + compatible = "samsung,s2mps11-pmic"; + reg = <0x66>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mux-pca954x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mux-pca954x.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..34a3fb6f8488 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mux-pca954x.txt @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +* NXP PCA954x I2C bus switch + +Required Properties: + + - compatible: Must contain one of the following. + "nxp,pca9540", "nxp,pca9542", "nxp,pca9543", "nxp,pca9544", + "nxp,pca9545", "nxp,pca9546", "nxp,pca9547", "nxp,pca9548" + + - reg: The I2C address of the device. + + The following required properties are defined externally: + + - Standard I2C mux properties. See i2c-mux.txt in this directory. + - I2C child bus nodes. See i2c-mux.txt in this directory. + +Optional Properties: + + - reset-gpios: Reference to the GPIO connected to the reset input. + + +Example: + + i2c-switch@74 { + compatible = "nxp,pca9548"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + reg = <0x74>; + + i2c@2 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + reg = <2>; + + eeprom@54 { + compatible = "at,24c08"; + reg = <0x54>; + }; + }; + + i2c@4 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + reg = <4>; + + rtc@51 { + compatible = "nxp,pcf8563"; + reg = <0x51>; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-omap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-omap.txt index 56564aa4b444..7e49839d4124 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-omap.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-omap.txt @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ I2C for OMAP platforms Required properties : -- compatible : Must be "ti,omap3-i2c" or "ti,omap4-i2c" +- compatible : Must be "ti,omap2420-i2c", "ti,omap2430-i2c", "ti,omap3-i2c" + or "ti,omap4-i2c" - ti,hwmods : Must be "i2c<n>", n being the instance number (1-based) - #address-cells = <1>; - #size-cells = <0>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-rcar.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-rcar.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..897cfcd5ce92 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-rcar.txt @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +I2C for R-Car platforms + +Required properties: +- compatible: Must be one of + "renesas,i2c-rcar" + "renesas,i2c-r8a7778" + "renesas,i2c-r8a7779" + "renesas,i2c-r8a7790" +- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped + region. +- interrupts: interrupt specifier. + +Optional properties: +- clock-frequency: desired I2C bus clock frequency in Hz. The absence of this + propoerty indicates the default frequency 100 kHz. + +Examples : + +i2c0: i2c@e6500000 { + compatible = "renesas,i2c-rcar-h2"; + reg = <0 0xe6500000 0 0x428>; + interrupts = <0 174 0x4>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-riic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-riic.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0bcc4716c319 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-riic.txt @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +Device tree configuration for Renesas RIIC driver + +Required properties: +- compatible : "renesas,riic-<soctype>". "renesas,riic-rz" as fallback +- reg : address start and address range size of device +- interrupts : 8 interrupts (TEI, RI, TI, SPI, STI, NAKI, ALI, TMOI) +- clock-frequency : frequency of bus clock in Hz +- #address-cells : should be <1> +- #size-cells : should be <0> + +Pinctrl properties might be needed, too. See there. + +Example: + + i2c0: i2c@fcfee000 { + compatible = "renesas,riic-r7s72100", "renesas,riic-rz"; + reg = <0xfcfee000 0x44>; + interrupts = <0 157 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <0 158 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>, + <0 159 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>, + <0 160 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <0 161 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <0 162 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <0 163 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <0 164 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clock-frequency = <100000>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-s3c2410.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-s3c2410.txt index 296eb4536129..278de8e64bbf 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-s3c2410.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-s3c2410.txt @@ -10,6 +10,8 @@ Required properties: inside HDMIPHY block found on several samsung SoCs (d) "samsung, exynos5440-i2c", for s3c2440-like i2c used on EXYNOS5440 which does not need GPIO configuration. + (e) "samsung, exynos5-sata-phy-i2c", for s3c2440-like i2c used as + a host to SATA PHY controller on an internal bus. - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped region. - interrupts: interrupt number to the cpu. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-st.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-st.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..437e0db3823c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-st.txt @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +ST SSC binding, for I2C mode operation + +Required properties : +- compatible : Must be "st,comms-ssc-i2c" or "st,comms-ssc4-i2c" +- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device +- interrupts : the interrupt specifier +- clock-names: Must contain "ssc". +- clocks: Must contain an entry for each name in clock-names. See the common + clock bindings. +- A pinctrl state named "default" must be defined to set pins in mode of + operation for I2C transfer. + +Optional properties : +- clock-frequency : Desired I2C bus clock frequency in Hz. If not specified, + the default 100 kHz frequency will be used. As only Normal and Fast modes + are supported, possible values are 100000 and 400000. +- st,i2c-min-scl-pulse-width-us : The minimum valid SCL pulse width that is + allowed through the deglitch circuit. In units of us. +- st,i2c-min-sda-pulse-width-us : The minimum valid SDA pulse width that is + allowed through the deglitch circuit. In units of us. +- A pinctrl state named "idle" could be defined to set pins in idle state + when I2C instance is not performing a transfer. +- A pinctrl state named "sleep" could be defined to set pins in sleep state + when driver enters in suspend. + + + +Example : + +i2c0: i2c@fed40000 { + compatible = "st,comms-ssc4-i2c"; + reg = <0xfed40000 0x110>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 187 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&CLK_S_ICN_REG_0>; + clock-names = "ssc"; + clock-frequency = <400000>; + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_i2c0_default>; + st,i2c-min-scl-pulse-width-us = <0>; + st,i2c-min-sda-pulse-width-us = <5>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/trivial-devices.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/trivial-devices.txt index ad6a73852f08..c65f71cfaa5c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/trivial-devices.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/trivial-devices.txt @@ -15,6 +15,8 @@ adi,adt7461 +/-1C TDM Extended Temp Range I.C adt7461 +/-1C TDM Extended Temp Range I.C at,24c08 i2c serial eeprom (24cxx) atmel,24c02 i2c serial eeprom (24cxx) +atmel,at97sc3204t i2c trusted platform module (TPM) +capella,cm32181 CM32181: Ambient Light Sensor catalyst,24c32 i2c serial eeprom dallas,ds1307 64 x 8, Serial, I2C Real-Time Clock dallas,ds1338 I2C RTC with 56-Byte NV RAM @@ -35,6 +37,7 @@ fsl,mc13892 MC13892: Power Management Integrated Circuit (PMIC) for i.MX35/51 fsl,mma8450 MMA8450Q: Xtrinsic Low-power, 3-axis Xtrinsic Accelerometer fsl,mpr121 MPR121: Proximity Capacitive Touch Sensor Controller fsl,sgtl5000 SGTL5000: Ultra Low-Power Audio Codec +gmt,g751 G751: Digital Temperature Sensor and Thermal Watchdog with Two-Wire Interface infineon,slb9635tt Infineon SLB9635 (Soft-) I2C TPM (old protocol, max 100khz) infineon,slb9645tt Infineon SLB9645 I2C TPM (new protocol, max 400khz) maxim,ds1050 5 Bit Programmable, Pulse-Width Modulator @@ -44,6 +47,7 @@ mc,rv3029c2 Real Time Clock Module with I2C-Bus national,lm75 I2C TEMP SENSOR national,lm80 Serial Interface ACPI-Compatible Microprocessor System Hardware Monitor national,lm92 ±0.33°C Accurate, 12-Bit + Sign Temperature Sensor and Thermal Window Comparator with Two-Wire Interface +nuvoton,npct501 i2c trusted platform module (TPM) nxp,pca9556 Octal SMBus and I2C registered interface nxp,pca9557 8-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with reset nxp,pcf8563 Real-time clock/calendar @@ -61,3 +65,4 @@ taos,tsl2550 Ambient Light Sensor with SMBUS/Two Wire Serial Interface ti,tsc2003 I2C Touch-Screen Controller ti,tmp102 Low Power Digital Temperature Sensor with SMBUS/Two Wire Serial Interface ti,tmp275 Digital Temperature Sensor +winbond,wpct301 i2c trusted platform module (TPM) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/humidity/dht11.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/humidity/dht11.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ecc24c199fd6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/humidity/dht11.txt @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +* DHT11 humidity/temperature sensor (and compatibles like DHT22) + +Required properties: + - compatible: Should be "dht11" + - gpios: Should specify the GPIO connected to the sensor's data + line, see "gpios property" in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt. + +Example: + +humidity_sensor { + compatible = "dht11"; + gpios = <&gpio0 6 0>; +} diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/tsl2563.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/tsl2563.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f91e809e736e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/tsl2563.txt @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +* AMS TAOS TSL2563 ambient light sensor + +Required properties: + + - compatible : should be "amstaos,tsl2563" + - reg : the I2C address of the sensor + +Optional properties: + + - amstaos,cover-comp-gain : integer used as multiplier for gain + compensation (default = 1) + +Example: + +tsl2563@29 { + compatible = "amstaos,tsl2563"; + reg = <0x29>; + amstaos,cover-comp-gain = <16>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/magnetometer/hmc5843.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/magnetometer/hmc5843.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..90d5f34db04e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/magnetometer/hmc5843.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +* Honeywell HMC5843 magnetometer sensor + +Required properties: + + - compatible : should be "honeywell,hmc5843" + - reg : the I2C address of the magnetometer - typically 0x1e + +Optional properties: + + - gpios : should be device tree identifier of the magnetometer DRDY pin + +Example: + +hmc5843@1e { + compatible = "honeywell,hmc5843" + reg = <0x1e>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ti-tsc-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ti-tsc-adc.txt index 491c97b78384..878549ba814d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ti-tsc-adc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ti-tsc-adc.txt @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ Required properties: ti,wires: Wires refer to application modes i.e. 4/5/8 wire touchscreen support on the platform. ti,x-plate-resistance: X plate resistance - ti,coordiante-readouts: The sequencer supports a total of 16 + ti,coordinate-readouts: The sequencer supports a total of 16 programmable steps each step is used to read a single coordinate. A single readout is enough but multiple reads can diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/st-rc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/st-rc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..05c432d08bca --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/st-rc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +Device-Tree bindings for ST IRB IP + +Required properties: + - compatible: Should contain "st,comms-irb". + - reg: Base physical address of the controller and length of memory + mapped region. + - interrupts: interrupt-specifier for the sole interrupt generated by + the device. The interrupt specifier format depends on the interrupt + controller parent. + - rx-mode: can be "infrared" or "uhf". This property specifies the L1 + protocol used for receiving remote control signals. rx-mode should + be present iff the rx pins are wired up. + - tx-mode: should be "infrared". This property specifies the L1 + protocol used for transmitting remote control signals. tx-mode should + be present iff the tx pins are wired up. + +Optional properties: + - pinctrl-names, pinctrl-0: the pincontrol settings to configure muxing + properly for IRB pins. + - clocks : phandle with clock-specifier pair for IRB. + +Example node: + + rc: rc@fe518000 { + compatible = "st,comms-irb"; + reg = <0xfe518000 0x234>; + interrupts = <0 203 0>; + rx-mode = "infrared"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/as3722.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/as3722.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8edcb9bd873b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/as3722.txt @@ -0,0 +1,205 @@ +* ams AS3722 Power management IC. + +Required properties: +------------------- +- compatible: Must be "ams,as3722". +- reg: I2C device address. +- interrupt-controller: AS3722 has internal interrupt controller which takes the + interrupt request from internal sub-blocks like RTC, regulators, GPIOs as well + as external input. +- #interrupt-cells: Should be set to 2 for IRQ number and flags. + The first cell is the IRQ number. IRQ numbers for different interrupt source + of AS3722 are defined at dt-bindings/mfd/as3722.h + The second cell is the flags, encoded as the trigger masks from binding document + interrupts.txt, using dt-bindings/irq. + +Optional submodule and their properties: +======================================= + +Pinmux and GPIO: +=============== +Device has 8 GPIO pins which can be configured as GPIO as well as the special IO +functions. + +Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the +common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the +phrase "pin configuration node". + +Following are properties which is needed if GPIO and pinmux functionality +is required: + Required properties: + ------------------- + - gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a GPIO controller. + - #gpio-cells: Number of GPIO cells. Refer to binding document + gpio/gpio.txt + + Optional properties: + -------------------- + Following properties are require if pin control setting is required + at boot. + - pinctrl-names: A pinctrl state named "default" be defined, using the + bindings in pinctrl/pinctrl-binding.txt. + - pinctrl[0...n]: Properties to contain the phandle that refer to + different nodes of pin control settings. These nodes represents + the pin control setting of state 0 to state n. Each of these + nodes contains different subnodes to represents some desired + configuration for a list of pins. This configuration can + include the mux function to select on those pin(s), and + various pin configuration parameters, such as pull-up, + open drain. + + Each subnode have following properties: + Required properties: + - pins: List of pins. Valid values of pins properties are: + gpio0, gpio1, gpio2, gpio3, gpio4, gpio5, + gpio6, gpio7 + + Optional properties: + function, bias-disable, bias-pull-up, bias-pull-down, + bias-high-impedance, drive-open-drain. + + Valid values for function properties are: + gpio, interrupt-out, gpio-in-interrupt, + vsup-vbat-low-undebounce-out, + vsup-vbat-low-debounce-out, + voltage-in-standby, oc-pg-sd0, oc-pg-sd6, + powergood-out, pwm-in, pwm-out, clk32k-out, + watchdog-in, soft-reset-in + +Regulators: +=========== +Device has multiple DCDC and LDOs. The node "regulators" is require if regulator +functionality is needed. + +Following are properties of regulator subnode. + + Optional properties: + ------------------- + The input supply of regulators are the optional properties on the + regulator node. The input supply of these regulators are provided + through following properties: + vsup-sd2-supply: Input supply for SD2. + vsup-sd3-supply: Input supply for SD3. + vsup-sd4-supply: Input supply for SD4. + vsup-sd5-supply: Input supply for SD5. + vin-ldo0-supply: Input supply for LDO0. + vin-ldo1-6-supply: Input supply for LDO1 and LDO6. + vin-ldo2-5-7-supply: Input supply for LDO2, LDO5 and LDO7. + vin-ldo3-4-supply: Input supply for LDO3 and LDO4. + vin-ldo9-10-supply: Input supply for LDO9 and LDO10. + vin-ldo11-supply: Input supply for LDO11. + + Optional sub nodes for regulators: + --------------------------------- + The subnodes name is the name of regulator and it must be one of: + sd[0-6], ldo[0-7], ldo[9-11] + + Each sub-node should contain the constraints and initialization + information for that regulator. See regulator.txt for a description + of standard properties for these sub-nodes. + Additional optional custom properties are listed below. + ams,ext-control: External control of the rail. The option of + this properties will tell which external input is + controlling this rail. Valid values are 0, 1, 2 ad 3. + 0: There is no external control of this rail. + 1: Rail is controlled by ENABLE1 input pin. + 2: Rail is controlled by ENABLE2 input pin. + 3: Rail is controlled by ENABLE3 input pin. + Missing this property on DT will be assume as no + external control. The external control pin macros + are defined @dt-bindings/mfd/as3722.h + + ams,enable-tracking: Enable tracking with SD1, only supported + by LDO3. + +Power-off: +========= +AS3722 supports the system power off by turning off all its rail. This +is provided through pm_power_off. +The device node should have the following properties to enable this +functionality +ams,system-power-controller: Boolean, to enable the power off functionality + through this device. + +Example: +-------- +#include <dt-bindings/mfd/as3722.h> +... +ams3722 { + compatible = "ams,as3722"; + reg = <0x48>; + + ams,system-power-controller; + + interrupt-parent = <&intc>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&as3722_default>; + + as3722_default: pinmux { + gpio0 { + pins = "gpio0"; + function = "gpio"; + bias-pull-down; + }; + + gpio1_2_4_7 { + pins = "gpio1", "gpio2", "gpio4", "gpio7"; + function = "gpio"; + bias-pull-up; + }; + + gpio5 { + pins = "gpio5"; + function = "clk32k_out"; + }; + } + + regulators { + vsup-sd2-supply = <...>; + ... + + sd0 { + regulator-name = "vdd_cpu"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <700000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1400000>; + regulator-always-on; + ams,ext-control = <2>; + }; + + sd1 { + regulator-name = "vdd_core"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <700000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1400000>; + regulator-always-on; + ams,ext-control = <1>; + }; + + sd2 { + regulator-name = "vddio_ddr"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1350000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1350000>; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + sd4 { + regulator-name = "avdd-hdmi-pex"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1050000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1050000>; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + sd5 { + regulator-name = "vdd-1v8"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1800000>; + regulator-always-on; + }; + .... + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/cros-ec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/cros-ec.txt index 5f229c5f6da9..8009c3d87f33 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/cros-ec.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/cros-ec.txt @@ -17,6 +17,15 @@ Required properties (SPI): - compatible: "google,cros-ec-spi" - reg: SPI chip select +Optional properties (SPI): +- google,cros-ec-spi-msg-delay: Some implementations of the EC require some + additional processing time in order to accept new transactions. If the delay + between transactions is not long enough the EC may not be able to respond + properly to subsequent transactions and cause them to hang. This property + specifies the delay, in usecs, introduced between transactions to account + for the time required by the EC to get back into a state in which new data + can be accepted. + Required properties (LPC): - compatible: "google,cros-ec-lpc" - reg: List of (IO address, size) pairs defining the interface uses diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/lp3943.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/lp3943.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e8591d6b11b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/lp3943.txt @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +TI/National Semiconductor LP3943 MFD driver + +Required properties: + - compatible: "ti,lp3943" + - reg: I2C slave address. From 0x60 to 0x67. + +LP3943 consists of two sub-devices, lp3943-gpio and lp3943-pwm. + +For the LP3943 GPIO properties please refer to: +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-lp3943.txt + +For the LP3943 PWM properties please refer to: +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-lp3943.txt + +Example: + +lp3943@60 { + compatible = "ti,lp3943"; + reg = <0x60>; + + gpioex: gpio { + compatible = "ti,lp3943-gpio"; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + }; + + pwm3943: pwm { + compatible = "ti,lp3943-pwm"; + #pwm-cells = <2>; + ti,pwm0 = <8 9 10>; + ti,pwm1 = <15>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/s2mps11.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/s2mps11.txt index c9332c626021..15ee89c3cc7b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/s2mps11.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/s2mps11.txt @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ * Samsung S2MPS11 Voltage and Current Regulator -The Samsung S2MP211 is a multi-function device which includes voltage and +The Samsung S2MPS11 is a multi-function device which includes voltage and current regulators, RTC, charger controller and other sub-blocks. It is -interfaced to the host controller using a I2C interface. Each sub-block is -addressed by the host system using different I2C slave address. +interfaced to the host controller using an I2C interface. Each sub-block is +addressed by the host system using different I2C slave addresses. Required properties: - compatible: Should be "samsung,s2mps11-pmic". @@ -43,7 +43,8 @@ sub-node should be of the format as listed below. BUCK[2/3/4/6] supports disabling ramp delay on hardware, so explictly regulator-ramp-delay = <0> can be used for them to disable ramp delay. - In absence of regulator-ramp-delay property, default ramp delay will be used. + In the absence of the regulator-ramp-delay property, the default ramp + delay will be used. NOTE: Some BUCKs share the ramp rate setting i.e. same ramp value will be set for a particular group of BUCKs. So provide same regulator-ramp-delay<value>. @@ -58,10 +59,10 @@ supports. Note: The 'n' in LDOn and BUCKn represents the LDO or BUCK number as per the datasheet of s2mps11. - LDOn - - valid values for n are 1 to 28 - - Example: LDO0, LD01, LDO28 + - valid values for n are 1 to 38 + - Example: LDO1, LD02, LDO28 - BUCKn - - valid values for n are 1 to 9. + - valid values for n are 1 to 10. - Example: BUCK1, BUCK2, BUCK9 Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/atmel-ssc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/atmel-ssc.txt index a45ae08c8ed1..60960b2755f4 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/atmel-ssc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/atmel-ssc.txt @@ -6,6 +6,9 @@ Required properties: - atmel,at91sam9g45-ssc: support dma transfer - reg: Should contain SSC registers location and length - interrupts: Should contain SSC interrupt +- clock-names: tuple listing input clock names. + Required elements: "pclk" +- clocks: phandles to input clocks. Required properties for devices compatible with "atmel,at91sam9g45-ssc": @@ -20,6 +23,8 @@ ssc0: ssc@fffbc000 { compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-ssc"; reg = <0xfffbc000 0x4000>; interrupts = <14 4 5>; + clocks = <&ssc0_clk>; + clock-names = "pclk"; }; - DMA transfer: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/bmp085.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/bmp085.txt index 91dfda2e4e11..d7a6deb6b21e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/bmp085.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/bmp085.txt @@ -8,6 +8,8 @@ Optional properties: - temp-measurement-period: temperature measurement period (milliseconds) - default-oversampling: default oversampling value to be used at startup, value range is 0-3 with rising sensitivity. +- interrupt-parent: should be the phandle for the interrupt controller +- interrupts: interrupt mapping for IRQ Example: @@ -17,4 +19,6 @@ pressure@77 { chip-id = <10>; temp-measurement-period = <100>; default-oversampling = <2>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio0>; + interrupts = <25 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt index 1dd622546d06..9046ba06c47a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt @@ -12,6 +12,11 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - fsl,cd-controller : Indicate to use controller internal card detection - fsl,wp-controller : Indicate to use controller internal write protection +- fsl,delay-line : Specify the number of delay cells for override mode. + This is used to set the clock delay for DLL(Delay Line) on override mode + to select a proper data sampling window in case the clock quality is not good + due to signal path is too long on the board. Please refer to eSDHC/uSDHC + chapter, DLL (Delay Line) section in RM for details. Examples: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc.txt index 066a78b034ca..8f3f13315358 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc.txt @@ -52,6 +52,9 @@ Optional properties: is specified and the ciu clock is specified then we'll try to set the ciu clock to this at probe time. +* clock-freq-min-max: Minimum and Maximum clock frequency for card output + clock(cclk_out). If it's not specified, max is 200MHZ and min is 400KHz by default. + * num-slots: specifies the number of slots supported by the controller. The number of physical slots actually used could be equal or less than the value specified by num-slots. If this property is not specified, the value @@ -66,6 +69,10 @@ Optional properties: * supports-highspeed: Enables support for high speed cards (up to 50MHz) +* caps2-mmc-hs200-1_8v: Supports mmc HS200 SDR 1.8V mode + +* caps2-mmc-hs200-1_2v: Supports mmc HS200 SDR 1.2V mode + * broken-cd: as documented in mmc core bindings. * vmmc-supply: The phandle to the regulator to use for vmmc. If this is @@ -93,8 +100,10 @@ board specific portions as listed below. dwmmc0@12200000 { clock-frequency = <400000000>; + clock-freq-min-max = <400000 200000000>; num-slots = <1>; supports-highspeed; + caps2-mmc-hs200-1_8v; broken-cd; fifo-depth = <0x80>; card-detect-delay = <200>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/ti-omap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/ti-omap.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8de579969763 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/ti-omap.txt @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +* TI MMC host controller for OMAP1 and 2420 + +The MMC Host Controller on TI OMAP1 and 2420 family provides +an interface for MMC, SD, and SDIO types of memory cards. + +This file documents differences between the core properties described +by mmc.txt and the properties used by the omap mmc driver. + +Note that this driver will not work with omap2430 or later omaps, +please see the omap hsmmc driver for the current omaps. + +Required properties: +- compatible: Must be "ti,omap2420-mmc", for OMAP2420 controllers +- ti,hwmods: For 2420, must be "msdi<n>", where n is controller + instance starting 1 + +Examples: + + msdi1: mmc@4809c000 { + compatible = "ti,omap2420-mmc"; + ti,hwmods = "msdi1"; + reg = <0x4809c000 0x80>; + interrupts = <83>; + dmas = <&sdma 61 &sdma 62>; + dma-names = "tx", "rx"; + }; + +* TI MMC host controller for OMAP1 and 2420 + +The MMC Host Controller on TI OMAP1 and 2420 family provides +an interface for MMC, SD, and SDIO types of memory cards. + +This file documents differences between the core properties described +by mmc.txt and the properties used by the omap mmc driver. + +Note that this driver will not work with omap2430 or later omaps, +please see the omap hsmmc driver for the current omaps. + +Required properties: +- compatible: Must be "ti,omap2420-mmc", for OMAP2420 controllers +- ti,hwmods: For 2420, must be "msdi<n>", where n is controller + instance starting 1 + +Examples: + + msdi1: mmc@4809c000 { + compatible = "ti,omap2420-mmc"; + ti,hwmods = "msdi1"; + reg = <0x4809c000 0x80>; + interrupts = <83>; + dmas = <&sdma 61 &sdma 62>; + dma-names = "tx", "rx"; + }; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davinci_emac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davinci_emac.txt index 48b259e29e87..bad381faf036 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davinci_emac.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davinci_emac.txt @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ This file provides information, what the device node for the davinci_emac interface contains. Required properties: -- compatible: "ti,davinci-dm6467-emac"; +- compatible: "ti,davinci-dm6467-emac" or "ti,am3517-emac" - reg: Offset and length of the register set for the device - ti,davinci-ctrl-reg-offset: offset to control register - ti,davinci-ctrl-mod-reg-offset: offset to control module register diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-fec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-fec.txt index d53639221403..845ff848d895 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-fec.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-fec.txt @@ -15,6 +15,7 @@ Optional properties: only if property "phy-reset-gpios" is available. Missing the property will have the duration be 1 millisecond. Numbers greater than 1000 are invalid and 1 millisecond will be used instead. +- phy-supply: regulator that powers the Ethernet PHY. Example: @@ -25,4 +26,5 @@ ethernet@83fec000 { phy-mode = "mii"; phy-reset-gpios = <&gpio2 14 0>; /* GPIO2_14 */ local-mac-address = [00 04 9F 01 1B B9]; + phy-supply = <®_fec_supply>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc-lan91c111.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc-lan91c111.txt index 953049b4248a..5a41a8658daa 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc-lan91c111.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc-lan91c111.txt @@ -8,3 +8,7 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - phy-device : phandle to Ethernet phy - local-mac-address : Ethernet mac address to use +- reg-io-width : Mask of sizes (in bytes) of the IO accesses that + are supported on the device. Valid value for SMSC LAN91c111 are + 1, 2 or 4. If it's omitted or invalid, the size would be 2 meaning + 16-bit access only. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/designware-pcie.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/designware-pcie.txt index d5d26d443693..d6fae13ff062 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/designware-pcie.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/designware-pcie.txt @@ -19,6 +19,8 @@ Required properties: to define the mapping of the PCIe interface to interrupt numbers. - num-lanes: number of lanes to use + +Optional properties: - reset-gpio: gpio pin number of power good signal Optional properties for fsl,imx6q-pcie diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/bcm-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/bcm-phy.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3dc8b3d2ffbb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/bcm-phy.txt @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +BROADCOM KONA USB2 PHY + +Required properties: + - compatible: brcm,kona-usb2-phy + - reg: offset and length of the PHY registers + - #phy-cells: must be 0 +Refer to phy/phy-bindings.txt for the generic PHY binding properties + +Example: + + usbphy: usb-phy@3f130000 { + compatible = "brcm,kona-usb2-phy"; + reg = <0x3f130000 0x28>; + #phy-cells = <0>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/brcm,capri-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/brcm,capri-pinctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9e9e9ef9f852 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/brcm,capri-pinctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,461 @@ +Broadcom Capri Pin Controller + +This is a pin controller for the Broadcom BCM281xx SoC family, which includes +BCM11130, BCM11140, BCM11351, BCM28145, and BCM28155 SoCs. + +=== Pin Controller Node === + +Required Properties: + +- compatible: Must be "brcm,capri-pinctrl". +- reg: Base address of the PAD Controller register block and the size + of the block. + +For example, the following is the bare minimum node: + + pinctrl@35004800 { + compatible = "brcm,capri-pinctrl"; + reg = <0x35004800 0x430>; + }; + +As a pin controller device, in addition to the required properties, this node +should also contain the pin configuration nodes that client devices reference, +if any. + +=== Pin Configuration Node === + +Each pin configuration node is a sub-node of the pin controller node and is a +container of an arbitrary number of subnodes, called pin group nodes in this +document. + +Please refer to the pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the +common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the definition of a +"pin configuration node". + +=== Pin Group Node === + +A pin group node specifies the desired pin mux and/or pin configuration for an +arbitrary number of pins. The name of the pin group node is optional and not +used. + +A pin group node only affects the properties specified in the node, and has no +effect on any properties that are omitted. + +The pin group node accepts a subset of the generic pin config properties. For +details generic pin config properties, please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt +and <include/linux/pinctrl/pinconfig-generic.h>. + +Each pin controlled by this pin controller belong to one of three types: +Standard, I2C, and HDMI. Each type accepts a different set of pin config +properties. A list of pins and their types is provided below. + +Required Properties (applicable to all pins): + +- pins: Multiple strings. Specifies the name(s) of one or more pins to + be configured by this node. + +Optional Properties (for standard pins): + +- function: String. Specifies the pin mux selection. Values + must be one of: "alt1", "alt2", "alt3", "alt4" +- input-schmitt-enable: No arguments. Enable schmitt-trigger mode. +- input-schmitt-disable: No arguments. Disable schmitt-trigger mode. +- bias-pull-up: No arguments. Pull up on pin. +- bias-pull-down: No arguments. Pull down on pin. +- bias-disable: No arguments. Disable pin bias. +- slew-rate: Integer. Meaning depends on configured pin mux: + *_SCL or *_SDA: + 0: Standard(100kbps)& Fast(400kbps) mode + 1: Highspeed (3.4Mbps) mode + IC_DM or IC_DP: + 0: normal slew rate + 1: fast slew rate + Otherwise: + 0: fast slew rate + 1: normal slew rate +- input-enable: No arguements. Enable input (does not affect + output.) +- input-disable: No arguements. Disable input (does not affect + output.) +- drive-strength: Integer. Drive strength in mA. Valid values are + 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 mA. + +Optional Properties (for I2C pins): + +- function: String. Specifies the pin mux selection. Values + must be one of: "alt1", "alt2", "alt3", "alt4" +- bias-pull-up: Integer. Pull up strength in Ohm. There are 3 + pull-up resisitors (1.2k, 1.8k, 2.7k) available + in parallel for I2C pins, so the valid values + are: 568, 720, 831, 1080, 1200, 1800, 2700 Ohm. +- bias-disable: No arguments. Disable pin bias. +- slew-rate: Integer. Meaning depends on configured pin mux: + *_SCL or *_SDA: + 0: Standard(100kbps)& Fast(400kbps) mode + 1: Highspeed (3.4Mbps) mode + IC_DM or IC_DP: + 0: normal slew rate + 1: fast slew rate + Otherwise: + 0: fast slew rate + 1: normal slew rate +- input-enable: No arguements. Enable input (does not affect + output.) +- input-disable: No arguements. Disable input (does not affect + output.) + +Optional Properties (for HDMI pins): + +- function: String. Specifies the pin mux selection. Values + must be one of: "alt1", "alt2", "alt3", "alt4" +- slew-rate: Integer. Controls slew rate. + 0: Standard(100kbps)& Fast(400kbps) mode + 1: Highspeed (3.4Mbps) mode +- input-enable: No arguements. Enable input (does not affect + output.) +- input-disable: No arguements. Disable input (does not affect + output.) + +Example: +// pin controller node +pinctrl@35004800 { + compatible = "brcm,capri-pinctrl"; + reg = <0x35004800 0x430>; + + // pin configuration node + dev_a_default: dev_a_active { + //group node defining 1 standard pin + grp_1 { + pins = "std_pin1"; + function = "alt1"; + input-schmitt-enable; + bias-disable; + slew-rate = <1>; + drive-strength = <4>; + }; + + // group node defining 2 I2C pins + grp_2 { + pins = "i2c_pin1", "i2c_pin2"; + function = "alt2"; + bias-pull-up = <720>; + input-enable; + }; + + // group node defining 2 HDMI pins + grp_3 { + pins = "hdmi_pin1", "hdmi_pin2"; + function = "alt3"; + slew-rate = <1>; + }; + + // other pin group nodes + ... + }; + + // other pin configuration nodes + ... +}; + +In the example above, "dev_a_active" is a pin configuration node with a number +of sub-nodes. In the pin group node "grp_1", one pin, "std_pin1", is defined in +the "pins" property. Thus, the remaining properties in the "grp_1" node applies +only to this pin, including the following settings: + - setting pinmux to "alt1" + - enabling schmitt-trigger (hystersis) mode + - disabling pin bias + - setting the slew-rate to 1 + - setting the drive strength to 4 mA +Note that neither "input-enable" nor "input-disable" was specified - the pinctrl +subsystem will therefore leave this property unchanged from whatever state it +was in before applying these changes. + +The "pins" property in the pin group node "grp_2" specifies two pins - +"i2c_pin1" and "i2c_pin2"; the remaining properties in this pin group node, +therefore, applies to both of these pins. The properties include: + - setting pinmux to "alt2" + - setting pull-up resistance to 720 Ohm (ie. enabling 1.2k and 1.8k resistors + in parallel) + - enabling both pins' input +"slew-rate" is not specified in this pin group node, so the slew-rate for these +pins are left as-is. + +Finally, "grp_3" defines two HDMI pins. The following properties are applied to +both pins: + - setting pinmux to "alt3" + - setting slew-rate to 1; for HDMI pins, this corresponds to the 3.4 Mbps + Highspeed mode +The input is neither enabled or disabled, and is left untouched. + +=== Pin Names and Type === + +The following are valid pin names and their pin types: + + "adcsync", Standard + "bat_rm", Standard + "bsc1_scl", I2C + "bsc1_sda", I2C + "bsc2_scl", I2C + "bsc2_sda", I2C + "classgpwr", Standard + "clk_cx8", Standard + "clkout_0", Standard + "clkout_1", Standard + "clkout_2", Standard + "clkout_3", Standard + "clkreq_in_0", Standard + "clkreq_in_1", Standard + "cws_sys_req1", Standard + "cws_sys_req2", Standard + "cws_sys_req3", Standard + "digmic1_clk", Standard + "digmic1_dq", Standard + "digmic2_clk", Standard + "digmic2_dq", Standard + "gpen13", Standard + "gpen14", Standard + "gpen15", Standard + "gpio00", Standard + "gpio01", Standard + "gpio02", Standard + "gpio03", Standard + "gpio04", Standard + "gpio05", Standard + "gpio06", Standard + "gpio07", Standard + "gpio08", Standard + "gpio09", Standard + "gpio10", Standard + "gpio11", Standard + "gpio12", Standard + "gpio13", Standard + "gpio14", Standard + "gps_pablank", Standard + "gps_tmark", Standard + "hdmi_scl", HDMI + "hdmi_sda", HDMI + "ic_dm", Standard + "ic_dp", Standard + "kp_col_ip_0", Standard + "kp_col_ip_1", Standard + "kp_col_ip_2", Standard + "kp_col_ip_3", Standard + "kp_row_op_0", Standard + "kp_row_op_1", Standard + "kp_row_op_2", Standard + "kp_row_op_3", Standard + "lcd_b_0", Standard + "lcd_b_1", Standard + "lcd_b_2", Standard + "lcd_b_3", Standard + "lcd_b_4", Standard + "lcd_b_5", Standard + "lcd_b_6", Standard + "lcd_b_7", Standard + "lcd_g_0", Standard + "lcd_g_1", Standard + "lcd_g_2", Standard + "lcd_g_3", Standard + "lcd_g_4", Standard + "lcd_g_5", Standard + "lcd_g_6", Standard + "lcd_g_7", Standard + "lcd_hsync", Standard + "lcd_oe", Standard + "lcd_pclk", Standard + "lcd_r_0", Standard + "lcd_r_1", Standard + "lcd_r_2", Standard + "lcd_r_3", Standard + "lcd_r_4", Standard + "lcd_r_5", Standard + "lcd_r_6", Standard + "lcd_r_7", Standard + "lcd_vsync", Standard + "mdmgpio0", Standard + "mdmgpio1", Standard + "mdmgpio2", Standard + "mdmgpio3", Standard + "mdmgpio4", Standard + "mdmgpio5", Standard + "mdmgpio6", Standard + "mdmgpio7", Standard + "mdmgpio8", Standard + "mphi_data_0", Standard + "mphi_data_1", Standard + "mphi_data_2", Standard + "mphi_data_3", Standard + "mphi_data_4", Standard + "mphi_data_5", Standard + "mphi_data_6", Standard + "mphi_data_7", Standard + "mphi_data_8", Standard + "mphi_data_9", Standard + "mphi_data_10", Standard + "mphi_data_11", Standard + "mphi_data_12", Standard + "mphi_data_13", Standard + "mphi_data_14", Standard + "mphi_data_15", Standard + "mphi_ha0", Standard + "mphi_hat0", Standard + "mphi_hat1", Standard + "mphi_hce0_n", Standard + "mphi_hce1_n", Standard + "mphi_hrd_n", Standard + "mphi_hwr_n", Standard + "mphi_run0", Standard + "mphi_run1", Standard + "mtx_scan_clk", Standard + "mtx_scan_data", Standard + "nand_ad_0", Standard + "nand_ad_1", Standard + "nand_ad_2", Standard + "nand_ad_3", Standard + "nand_ad_4", Standard + "nand_ad_5", Standard + "nand_ad_6", Standard + "nand_ad_7", Standard + "nand_ale", Standard + "nand_cen_0", Standard + "nand_cen_1", Standard + "nand_cle", Standard + "nand_oen", Standard + "nand_rdy_0", Standard + "nand_rdy_1", Standard + "nand_wen", Standard + "nand_wp", Standard + "pc1", Standard + "pc2", Standard + "pmu_int", Standard + "pmu_scl", I2C + "pmu_sda", I2C + "rfst2g_mtsloten3g", Standard + "rgmii_0_rx_ctl", Standard + "rgmii_0_rxc", Standard + "rgmii_0_rxd_0", Standard + "rgmii_0_rxd_1", Standard + "rgmii_0_rxd_2", Standard + "rgmii_0_rxd_3", Standard + "rgmii_0_tx_ctl", Standard + "rgmii_0_txc", Standard + "rgmii_0_txd_0", Standard + "rgmii_0_txd_1", Standard + "rgmii_0_txd_2", Standard + "rgmii_0_txd_3", Standard + "rgmii_1_rx_ctl", Standard + "rgmii_1_rxc", Standard + "rgmii_1_rxd_0", Standard + "rgmii_1_rxd_1", Standard + "rgmii_1_rxd_2", Standard + "rgmii_1_rxd_3", Standard + "rgmii_1_tx_ctl", Standard + "rgmii_1_txc", Standard + "rgmii_1_txd_0", Standard + "rgmii_1_txd_1", Standard + "rgmii_1_txd_2", Standard + "rgmii_1_txd_3", Standard + "rgmii_gpio_0", Standard + "rgmii_gpio_1", Standard + "rgmii_gpio_2", Standard + "rgmii_gpio_3", Standard + "rtxdata2g_txdata3g1", Standard + "rtxen2g_txdata3g2", Standard + "rxdata3g0", Standard + "rxdata3g1", Standard + "rxdata3g2", Standard + "sdio1_clk", Standard + "sdio1_cmd", Standard + "sdio1_data_0", Standard + "sdio1_data_1", Standard + "sdio1_data_2", Standard + "sdio1_data_3", Standard + "sdio4_clk", Standard + "sdio4_cmd", Standard + "sdio4_data_0", Standard + "sdio4_data_1", Standard + "sdio4_data_2", Standard + "sdio4_data_3", Standard + "sim_clk", Standard + "sim_data", Standard + "sim_det", Standard + "sim_resetn", Standard + "sim2_clk", Standard + "sim2_data", Standard + "sim2_det", Standard + "sim2_resetn", Standard + "sri_c", Standard + "sri_d", Standard + "sri_e", Standard + "ssp_extclk", Standard + "ssp0_clk", Standard + "ssp0_fs", Standard + "ssp0_rxd", Standard + "ssp0_txd", Standard + "ssp2_clk", Standard + "ssp2_fs_0", Standard + "ssp2_fs_1", Standard + "ssp2_fs_2", Standard + "ssp2_fs_3", Standard + "ssp2_rxd_0", Standard + "ssp2_rxd_1", Standard + "ssp2_txd_0", Standard + "ssp2_txd_1", Standard + "ssp3_clk", Standard + "ssp3_fs", Standard + "ssp3_rxd", Standard + "ssp3_txd", Standard + "ssp4_clk", Standard + "ssp4_fs", Standard + "ssp4_rxd", Standard + "ssp4_txd", Standard + "ssp5_clk", Standard + "ssp5_fs", Standard + "ssp5_rxd", Standard + "ssp5_txd", Standard + "ssp6_clk", Standard + "ssp6_fs", Standard + "ssp6_rxd", Standard + "ssp6_txd", Standard + "stat_1", Standard + "stat_2", Standard + "sysclken", Standard + "traceclk", Standard + "tracedt00", Standard + "tracedt01", Standard + "tracedt02", Standard + "tracedt03", Standard + "tracedt04", Standard + "tracedt05", Standard + "tracedt06", Standard + "tracedt07", Standard + "tracedt08", Standard + "tracedt09", Standard + "tracedt10", Standard + "tracedt11", Standard + "tracedt12", Standard + "tracedt13", Standard + "tracedt14", Standard + "tracedt15", Standard + "txdata3g0", Standard + "txpwrind", Standard + "uartb1_ucts", Standard + "uartb1_urts", Standard + "uartb1_urxd", Standard + "uartb1_utxd", Standard + "uartb2_urxd", Standard + "uartb2_utxd", Standard + "uartb3_ucts", Standard + "uartb3_urts", Standard + "uartb3_urxd", Standard + "uartb3_utxd", Standard + "uartb4_ucts", Standard + "uartb4_urts", Standard + "uartb4_urxd", Standard + "uartb4_utxd", Standard + "vc_cam1_scl", I2C + "vc_cam1_sda", I2C + "vc_cam2_scl", I2C + "vc_cam2_sda", I2C + "vc_cam3_scl", I2C + "vc_cam3_sda", I2C diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx25-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx25-pinctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fd653bde18d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx25-pinctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +* Freescale IMX25 IOMUX Controller + +Please refer to fsl,imx-pinctrl.txt in this directory for common binding part +and usage. + +CONFIG bits definition: +PAD_CTL_HYS (1 << 8) +PAD_CTL_PKE (1 << 7) +PAD_CTL_PUE (1 << 6) +PAD_CTL_PUS_100K_DOWN (0 << 4) +PAD_CTL_PUS_47K_UP (1 << 4) +PAD_CTL_PUS_100K_UP (2 << 4) +PAD_CTL_PUS_22K_UP (3 << 4) +PAD_CTL_ODE_CMOS (0 << 3) +PAD_CTL_ODE_OPENDRAIN (1 << 3) +PAD_CTL_DSE_NOMINAL (0 << 1) +PAD_CTL_DSE_HIGH (1 << 1) +PAD_CTL_DSE_MAX (2 << 1) +PAD_CTL_SRE_FAST (1 << 0) +PAD_CTL_SRE_SLOW (0 << 0) + +Refer to imx25-pinfunc.h in device tree source folder for all available +imx25 PIN_FUNC_ID. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx27-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx27-pinctrl.txt index 353eca0efbf8..d1706ea82572 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx27-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx27-pinctrl.txt @@ -52,12 +52,25 @@ Required properties for pin configuration node: CONFIG can be 0 or 1, meaning Pullup disable/enable. +The iomux controller has gpio child nodes which are embedded in the iomux +control registers. They have to be defined as child nodes of the iomux device +node. If gpio subnodes are defined "#address-cells", "#size-cells" and "ranges" +properties for the iomux device node are required. Example: iomuxc: iomuxc@10015000 { compatible = "fsl,imx27-iomuxc"; reg = <0x10015000 0x600>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges; + + gpio1: gpio@10015000 { + ... + }; + + ... uart { pinctrl_uart1: uart-1 { @@ -83,6 +96,15 @@ The above example using macros: iomuxc: iomuxc@10015000 { compatible = "fsl,imx27-iomuxc"; reg = <0x10015000 0x600>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges; + + gpio1: gpio@10015000 { + ... + }; + + ... uart { pinctrl_uart1: uart-1 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra124-pinmux.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra124-pinmux.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6464bf769460 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra124-pinmux.txt @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ +NVIDIA Tegra124 pinmux controller + +The Tegra124 pinctrl binding is very similar to the Tegra20 and Tegra30 +pinctrl binding, as described in nvidia,tegra20-pinmux.txt and +nvidia,tegra30-pinmux.txt. In fact, this document assumes that binding as +a baseline, and only documents the differences between the two bindings. + +Required properties: +- compatible: "nvidia,tegra124-pinmux" +- reg: Should contain a list of base address and size pairs for: + -- first entry - the drive strength and pad control registers. + -- second entry - the pinmux registers + +Tegra124 adds the following optional properties for pin configuration subnodes. +The macros for options are defined in the + include/dt-binding/pinctrl/pinctrl-tegra.h. +- nvidia,enable-input: Integer. Enable the pin's input path. + enable :TEGRA_PIN_ENABLE0 and + disable or output only: TEGRA_PIN_DISABLE. +- nvidia,open-drain: Integer. + enable: TEGRA_PIN_ENABLE. + disable: TEGRA_PIN_DISABLE. +- nvidia,lock: Integer. Lock the pin configuration against further changes + until reset. + enable: TEGRA_PIN_ENABLE. + disable: TEGRA_PIN_DISABLE. +- nvidia,io-reset: Integer. Reset the IO path. + enable: TEGRA_PIN_ENABLE. + disable: TEGRA_PIN_DISABLE. +- nvidia,rcv-sel: Integer. Select VIL/VIH receivers. + normal: TEGRA_PIN_DISABLE + high: TEGRA_PIN_ENABLE + +Please refer the Tegra TRM for complete details regarding which groups +support which functionality. + +Valid values for pin and group names are: + + per-pin mux groups: + + These all support nvidia,function, nvidia,tristate, nvidia,pull, + nvidia,enable-input. Some support nvidia,lock nvidia,open-drain, + nvidia,io-reset and nvidia,rcv-sel. + + ulpi_data0_po1, ulpi_data1_po2, ulpi_data2_po3, ulpi_data3_po4, + ulpi_data4_po5, ulpi_data5_po6, ulpi_data6_po7, ulpi_data7_po0, + ulpi_clk_py0, ulpi_dir_py1, ulpi_nxt_py2, ulpi_stp_py3, dap3_fs_pp0, + dap3_din_pp1, dap3_dout_pp2, dap3_sclk_pp3, pv0, pv1, sdmmc1_clk_pz0, + sdmmc1_cmd_pz1, sdmmc1_dat3_py4, sdmmc1_dat2_py5, sdmmc1_dat1_py6, + sdmmc1_dat0_py7, clk2_out_pw5, clk2_req_pcc5, hdmi_int_pn7, ddc_scl_pv4, + ddc_sda_pv5, uart2_rxd_pc3, uart2_txd_pc2, uart2_rts_n_pj6, + uart2_cts_n_pj5, uart3_txd_pw6, uart3_rxd_pw7, uart3_cts_n_pa1, + uart3_rts_n_pc0, pu0, pu1, pu2, pu3, pu4, pu5, pu6, gen1_i2c_scl_pc4, + gen1_i2c_sda_pc5, dap4_fs_pp4, dap4_din_pp5, dap4_dout_pp6, + dap4_sclk_pp7, clk3_out_pee0, clk3_req_pee1, pc7, pi5, pi7, pk0, pk1, + pj0, pj2, pk3, pk4, pk2, pi3, pi6, pg0, pg1, pg2, pg3, pg4, pg5, pg6, + pg7, ph0, ph1, ph2, ph3, ph4, ph5, ph6, ph7, pj7, pb0, pb1, pk7, pi0, + pi1, pi2, pi4, gen2_i2c_scl_pt5, gen2_i2c_sda_pt6, sdmmc4_clk_pcc4, + sdmmc4_cmd_pt7, sdmmc4_dat0_paa0, sdmmc4_dat1_paa1, sdmmc4_dat2_paa2, + sdmmc4_dat3_paa3, sdmmc4_dat4_paa4, sdmmc4_dat5_paa5, sdmmc4_dat6_paa6, + sdmmc4_dat7_paa7, cam_mclk_pcc0, pcc1, pbb0, cam_i2c_scl_pbb1, + cam_i2c_sda_pbb2, pbb3, pbb4, pbb5, pbb6, pbb7, pcc2, jtag_rtck, + pwr_i2c_scl_pz6, pwr_i2c_sda_pz7, kb_row0_pr0, kb_row1_pr1, kb_row2_pr2, + kb_row3_pr3, kb_row4_pr4, kb_row5_pr5, kb_row6_pr6, kb_row7_pr7, + kb_row8_ps0, kb_row9_ps1, kb_row10_ps2, kb_row11_ps3, kb_row12_ps4, + kb_row13_ps5, kb_row14_ps6, kb_row15_ps7, kb_col0_pq0, kb_col1_pq1, + kb_col2_pq2, kb_col3_pq3, kb_col4_pq4, kb_col5_pq5, kb_col6_pq6, + kb_col7_pq7, clk_32k_out_pa0, core_pwr_req, cpu_pwr_req, pwr_int_n, + clk_32k_in, owr, dap1_fs_pn0, dap1_din_pn1, dap1_dout_pn2, + dap1_sclk_pn3, dap_mclk1_req_pee2, dap_mclk1_pw4, spdif_in_pk6, + spdif_out_pk5, dap2_fs_pa2, dap2_din_pa4, dap2_dout_pa5, dap2_sclk_pa3, + dvfs_pwm_px0, gpio_x1_aud_px1, gpio_x3_aud_px3, dvfs_clk_px2, + gpio_x4_aud_px4, gpio_x5_aud_px5, gpio_x6_aud_px6, gpio_x7_aud_px7, + sdmmc3_clk_pa6, sdmmc3_cmd_pa7, sdmmc3_dat0_pb7, sdmmc3_dat1_pb6, + sdmmc3_dat2_pb5, sdmmc3_dat3_pb4, pex_l0_rst_n_pdd1, + pex_l0_clkreq_n_pdd2, pex_wake_n_pdd3, pex_l1_rst_n_pdd5, + pex_l1_clkreq_n_pdd6, hdmi_cec_pee3, sdmmc1_wp_n_pv3, + sdmmc3_cd_n_pv2, gpio_w2_aud_pw2, gpio_w3_aud_pw3, usb_vbus_en0_pn4, + usb_vbus_en1_pn5, sdmmc3_clk_lb_out_pee4, sdmmc3_clk_lb_in_pee5, + gmi_clk_lb, reset_out_n, kb_row16_pt0, kb_row17_pt1, usb_vbus_en2_pff1, + pff2, dp_hpd_pff0, + + drive groups: + + These all support nvidia,pull-down-strength, nvidia,pull-up-strength, + nvidia,slew-rate-rising, nvidia,slew-rate-falling. Most but not all + support nvidia,high-speed-mode, nvidia,schmitt, nvidia,low-power-mode + and nvidia,drive-type. + + ao1, ao2, at1, at2, at3, at4, at5, cdev1, cdev2, dap1, dap2, dap3, dap4, + dbg, sdio3, spi, uaa, uab, uart2, uart3, sdio1, ddc, gma, gme, gmf, gmg, + gmh, owr, uda, gpv, dev3, cec, usb_vbus_en, ao3, ao0, hv0, sdio4, ao4. + +Valid values for nvidia,functions are: + + blink, cec, cldvfs, clk12, cpu, dap, dap1, dap2, dev3, displaya, + displaya_alt, displayb, dtv, extperiph1, extperiph2, extperiph3, + gmi, gmi_alt, hda, hsi, i2c1, i2c2, i2c3, i2c4, i2cpwr, i2s0, + i2s1, i2s2, i2s3, i2s4, irda, kbc, owr, pmi, pwm0, pwm1, pwm2, pwm3, + pwron, reset_out_n, rsvd1, rsvd2, rsvd3, rsvd4, sdmmc1, sdmmc2, sdmmc3, + sdmmc4, soc, spdif, spi1, spi2, spi3, spi4, spi5, spi6, trace, uarta, + uartb, uartc, uartd, ulpi, usb, vgp1, vgp2, vgp3, vgp4, vgp5, vgp6, + vi, vi_alt1, vi_alt3, vimclk2, vimclk2_alt, sata, ccla, pe0, pe, pe1, + dp, rtck, sys, clk tmds. + +Example: + + pinmux: pinmux { + compatible = "nvidia,tegra124-pinmux"; + reg = <0x70000868 0x164 /* Pad control registers */ + 0x70003000 0x434>; /* PinMux registers */ + }; + +Example pinmux entries: + + pinctrl { + sdmmc4_default: pinmux { + sdmmc4_clk_pcc4 { + nvidia,pins = "sdmmc4_clk_pcc4", + nvidia,function = "sdmmc4"; + nvidia,pull = <TEGRA_PIN_PULL_NONE>; + nvidia,tristate = <TEGRA_PIN_DISABLE>; + }; + + sdmmc4_dat0_paa0 { + nvidia,pins = "sdmmc4_dat0_paa0", + "sdmmc4_dat1_paa1", + "sdmmc4_dat2_paa2", + "sdmmc4_dat3_paa3", + "sdmmc4_dat4_paa4", + "sdmmc4_dat5_paa5", + "sdmmc4_dat6_paa6", + "sdmmc4_dat7_paa7"; + nvidia,function = "sdmmc4"; + nvidia,pull = <TEGRA_PIN_PULL_UP>; + nvidia,tristate = <TEGRA_PIN_DISABLE>; + }; + }; + }; + + sdhci@78000400 { + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&sdmmc4_default>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt index 1958ca9f9e5c..4414163e76d2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt @@ -151,6 +151,8 @@ drive-push-pull - drive actively high and low drive-open-drain - drive with open drain drive-open-source - drive with open source drive-strength - sink or source at most X mA +input-enable - enable input on pin (no effect on output) +input-disable - disable input on pin (no effect on output) input-schmitt-enable - enable schmitt-trigger mode input-schmitt-disable - disable schmitt-trigger mode input-debounce - debounce mode with debound time X @@ -158,6 +160,7 @@ low-power-enable - enable low power mode low-power-disable - disable low power mode output-low - set the pin to output mode with low level output-high - set the pin to output mode with high level +slew-rate - set the slew rate Some of the generic properties take arguments. For those that do, the arguments are described below. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-single.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-single.txt index 7069a0b84e3a..bc0dfdfdb148 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-single.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-single.txt @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ below for more information. In case when one register changes more than one pin's mux the pinctrl-single,bits need to be used which takes three parameters: - pinctrl-single,bits = <0xdc 0x18, 0xff>; + pinctrl-single,bits = <0xdc 0x18 0xff>; Where 0xdc is the offset from the pinctrl register base address for the device pinctrl register, 0x18 is the desired value, and 0xff is the sub mask to diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8974-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8974-pinctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4c352be5dd61 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8974-pinctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ +Qualcomm MSM8974 TLMM block + +Required properties: +- compatible: "qcom,msm8x74-pinctrl" +- reg: Should be the base address and length of the TLMM block. +- interrupts: Should be the parent IRQ of the TLMM block. +- interrupt-controller: Marks the device node as an interrupt controller. +- #interrupt-cells: Should be two. +- gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a GPIO controller. +- #gpio-cells : Should be two. + The first cell is the gpio pin number and the + second cell is used for optional parameters. + +Please refer to ../gpio/gpio.txt and ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for +a general description of GPIO and interrupt bindings. + +Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the +common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the +phrase "pin configuration node". + +Qualcomm's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an abitrary number of +subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a +pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration can include the +mux function to select on those pin(s)/group(s), and various pin configuration +parameters, such as pull-up, drive strength, etc. + +The name of each subnode is not important; all subnodes should be enumerated +and processed purely based on their content. + +Each subnode only affects those parameters that are explicitly listed. In +other words, a subnode that lists a mux function but no pin configuration +parameters implies no information about any pin configuration parameters. +Similarly, a pin subnode that describes a pullup parameter implies no +information about e.g. the mux function. + + +The following generic properties as defined in pinctrl-bindings.txt are valid +to specify in a pin configuration subnode: + pins, function, bias-disable, bias-pull-down, bias-pull,up, drive-strength. + +Non-empty subnodes must specify the 'pins' property. +Note that not all properties are valid for all pins. + + +Valid values for qcom,pins are: + gpio0-gpio145 + Supports mux, bias and drive-strength + + sdc1_clk, sdc1_cmd, sdc1_data, sdc2_clk, sdc2_cmd, sdc2_data + Supports bias and drive-strength + +Valid values for qcom,function are: + blsp_i2c2, blsp_i2c6, blsp_i2c11, blsp_spi1, blsp_uart2, blsp_uart8, slimbus + + (Note that this is not yet the complete list of functions) + + + +Example: + + msmgpio: pinctrl@fd510000 { + compatible = "qcom,msm8974-pinctrl"; + reg = <0xfd510000 0x4000>; + + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + interrupts = <0 208 0>; + + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&uart2_default>; + + uart2_default: uart2_default { + mux { + qcom,pins = "gpio4", "gpio5"; + qcom,function = "blsp_uart2"; + }; + + tx { + qcom,pins = "gpio4"; + drive-strength = <4>; + bias-disable; + }; + + rx { + qcom,pins = "gpio5"; + drive-strength = <2>; + bias-pull-up; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/renesas,pfc-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/renesas,pfc-pinctrl.txt index d5dac7b843a9..35d2e1f186f0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/renesas,pfc-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/renesas,pfc-pinctrl.txt @@ -26,6 +26,11 @@ Optional properties: - #gpio-range-cells: Mandatory when the PFC doesn't handle GPIO, forbidden otherwise. Should be 3. + - interrupts-extended: Specify the interrupts associated with external + IRQ pins. This property is mandatory when the PFC handles GPIOs and + forbidden otherwise. When specified, it must contain one interrupt per + external IRQ, sorted by external IRQ number. + The PFC node also acts as a container for pin configuration nodes. Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for the definition of the term "pin configuration node" and for the common pinctrl bindings used by client devices. @@ -103,6 +108,15 @@ Example 1: SH73A0 (SH-Mobile AG5) pin controller node <0xe605801c 0x1c>; gpio-controller; #gpio-cells = <2>; + interrupts-extended = + <&irqpin0 0 0>, <&irqpin0 1 0>, <&irqpin0 2 0>, <&irqpin0 3 0>, + <&irqpin0 4 0>, <&irqpin0 5 0>, <&irqpin0 6 0>, <&irqpin0 7 0>, + <&irqpin1 0 0>, <&irqpin1 1 0>, <&irqpin1 2 0>, <&irqpin1 3 0>, + <&irqpin1 4 0>, <&irqpin1 5 0>, <&irqpin1 6 0>, <&irqpin1 7 0>, + <&irqpin2 0 0>, <&irqpin2 1 0>, <&irqpin2 2 0>, <&irqpin2 3 0>, + <&irqpin2 4 0>, <&irqpin2 5 0>, <&irqpin2 6 0>, <&irqpin2 7 0>, + <&irqpin3 0 0>, <&irqpin3 1 0>, <&irqpin3 2 0>, <&irqpin3 3 0>, + <&irqpin3 4 0>, <&irqpin3 5 0>, <&irqpin3 6 0>, <&irqpin3 7 0>; }; Example 2: A GPIO LED node that references a GPIO diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/isp1704.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/isp1704.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fa3596907967 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/isp1704.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +Binding for NXP ISP1704 USB Charger Detection + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should contain one of the following: + * "nxp,isp1704" +- nxp,enable-gpio: Should contain a phandle + gpio-specifier + to the GPIO pin connected to the chip's enable pin. +- usb-phy: Should contain a phandle to the USB PHY + the ISP1704 is connected to. + +Example: + +isp1704 { + compatible = "nxp,isp1704"; + nxp,enable-gpio = <&gpio3 3 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + usb-phy = <&usb2_phy>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/twl-charger.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/twl-charger.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d5c706216df5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/twl-charger.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +TWL BCI (Battery Charger Interface) + +Required properties: +- compatible: + - "ti,twl4030-bci" +- interrupts: two interrupt lines from the TWL SIH (secondary + interrupt handler) - interrupts 9 and 2. + +Optional properties: +- ti,bb-uvolt: microvolts for charging the backup battery. +- ti,bb-uamp: microamps for charging the backup battery. + +Examples: + +bci { + compatible = "ti,twl4030-bci"; + interrupts = <9>, <2>; + ti,bb-uvolt = <3200000>; + ti,bb-uamp = <150>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/charger-manager.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/charger-manager.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2b33750e3db2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/charger-manager.txt @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +charger-manager bindings +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Required properties : + - compatible : "charger-manager" + - <>-supply : for regulator consumer + - cm-num-chargers : number of chargers + - cm-chargers : name of chargers + - cm-fuel-gauge : name of battery fuel gauge + - subnode <regulator> : + - cm-regulator-name : name of charger regulator + - subnode <cable> : + - cm-cable-name : name of charger cable + - cm-cable-extcon : name of extcon dev +(optional) - cm-cable-min : minimum current of cable +(optional) - cm-cable-max : maximum current of cable + +Optional properties : + - cm-name : charger manager's name (default : "battery") + - cm-poll-mode : polling mode (enum polling_modes) + - cm-poll-interval : polling interval + - cm-battery-stat : battery status (enum data_source) + - cm-fullbatt-* : data for full battery checking + - cm-thermal-zone : name of external thermometer's thermal zone + - cm-battery-* : threshold battery temperature for charging + -cold : critical cold temperature of battery for charging + -cold-in-minus : flag that cold temerature is in minus degree + -hot : critical hot temperature of battery for charging + -temp-diff : temperature difference to allow recharging + - cm-dis/charging-max = limits of charging duration + +Example : + charger-manager@0 { + compatible = "charger-manager"; + chg-reg-supply = <&charger_regulator>; + + cm-name = "battery"; + /* Always polling ON : 30s */ + cm-poll-mode = <1>; + cm-poll-interval = <30000>; + + cm-fullbatt-vchkdrop-ms = <30000>; + cm-fullbatt-vchkdrop-volt = <150000>; + cm-fullbatt-soc = <100>; + + cm-battery-stat = <3>; + + cm-num-chargers = <3>; + cm-chargers = "charger0", "charger1", "charger2"; + + cm-fuel-gauge = "fuelgauge0"; + + cm-thermal-zone = "thermal_zone.1" + /* in deci centigrade */ + cm-battery-cold = <50>; + cm-battery-cold-in-minus; + cm-battery-hot = <800>; + cm-battery-temp-diff = <100>; + + /* Allow charging for 5hr */ + cm-charging-max = <18000000>; + /* Allow discharging for 2hr */ + cm-discharging-max = <7200000>; + + regulator@0 { + cm-regulator-name = "chg-reg"; + cable@0 { + cm-cable-name = "USB"; + cm-cable-extcon = "extcon-dev.0"; + cm-cable-min = <475000>; + cm-cable-max = <500000>; + }; + cable@1 { + cm-cable-name = "TA"; + cm-cable-extcon = "extcon-dev.0"; + cm-cable-min = <650000>; + cm-cable-max = <675000>; + }; + }; + + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/ti,bq24735.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/ti,bq24735.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4f6a550184d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/ti,bq24735.txt @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +TI BQ24735 Charge Controller +~~~~~~~~~~ + +Required properties : + - compatible : "ti,bq24735" + +Optional properties : + - interrupts : Specify the interrupt to be used to trigger when the AC + adapter is either plugged in or removed. + - ti,ac-detect-gpios : This GPIO is optionally used to read the AC adapter + presence. This is a Host GPIO that is configured as an input and + connected to the bq24735. + - ti,charge-current : Used to control and set the charging current. This value + must be between 128mA and 8.128A with a 64mA step resolution. The POR value + is 0x0000h. This number is in mA (e.g. 8192), see spec for more information + about the ChargeCurrent (0x14h) register. + - ti,charge-voltage : Used to control and set the charging voltage. This value + must be between 1.024V and 19.2V with a 16mV step resolution. The POR value + is 0x0000h. This number is in mV (e.g. 19200), see spec for more information + about the ChargeVoltage (0x15h) register. + - ti,input-current : Used to control and set the charger input current. This + value must be between 128mA and 8.064A with a 128mA step resolution. The + POR value is 0x1000h. This number is in mA (e.g. 8064), see the spec for + more information about the InputCurrent (0x3fh) register. + +Example: + + bq24735@9 { + compatible = "ti,bq24735"; + reg = <0x9>; + ti,ac-detect-gpios = <&gpio 72 0x1>; + } diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dma.txt index 2a4b4bce6110..7fc1b010fa75 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dma.txt @@ -1,33 +1,30 @@ -* Freescale 83xx DMA Controller +* Freescale DMA Controllers -Freescale PowerPC 83xx have on chip general purpose DMA controllers. +** Freescale Elo DMA Controller + This is a little-endian 4-channel DMA controller, used in Freescale mpc83xx + series chips such as mpc8315, mpc8349, mpc8379 etc. Required properties: -- compatible : compatible list, contains 2 entries, first is - "fsl,CHIP-dma", where CHIP is the processor - (mpc8349, mpc8360, etc.) and the second is - "fsl,elo-dma" -- reg : <registers mapping for DMA general status reg> -- ranges : Should be defined as specified in 1) to describe the - DMA controller channels. +- compatible : must include "fsl,elo-dma" +- reg : DMA General Status Register, i.e. DGSR which contains + status for all the 4 DMA channels +- ranges : describes the mapping between the address space of the + DMA channels and the address space of the DMA controller - cell-index : controller index. 0 for controller @ 0x8100 -- interrupts : <interrupt mapping for DMA IRQ> +- interrupts : interrupt specifier for DMA IRQ - interrupt-parent : optional, if needed for interrupt mapping - - DMA channel nodes: - - compatible : compatible list, contains 2 entries, first is - "fsl,CHIP-dma-channel", where CHIP is the processor - (mpc8349, mpc8350, etc.) and the second is - "fsl,elo-dma-channel". However, see note below. - - reg : <registers mapping for channel> - - cell-index : dma channel index starts at 0. + - compatible : must include "fsl,elo-dma-channel" + However, see note below. + - reg : DMA channel specific registers + - cell-index : DMA channel index starts at 0. Optional properties: - - interrupts : <interrupt mapping for DMA channel IRQ> - (on 83xx this is expected to be identical to - the interrupts property of the parent node) + - interrupts : interrupt specifier for DMA channel IRQ + (on 83xx this is expected to be identical to + the interrupts property of the parent node) - interrupt-parent : optional, if needed for interrupt mapping Example: @@ -70,30 +67,27 @@ Example: }; }; -* Freescale 85xx/86xx DMA Controller - -Freescale PowerPC 85xx/86xx have on chip general purpose DMA controllers. +** Freescale EloPlus DMA Controller + This is a 4-channel DMA controller with extended addresses and chaining, + mainly used in Freescale mpc85xx/86xx, Pxxx and BSC series chips, such as + mpc8540, mpc8641 p4080, bsc9131 etc. Required properties: -- compatible : compatible list, contains 2 entries, first is - "fsl,CHIP-dma", where CHIP is the processor - (mpc8540, mpc8540, etc.) and the second is - "fsl,eloplus-dma" -- reg : <registers mapping for DMA general status reg> +- compatible : must include "fsl,eloplus-dma" +- reg : DMA General Status Register, i.e. DGSR which contains + status for all the 4 DMA channels - cell-index : controller index. 0 for controller @ 0x21000, 1 for controller @ 0xc000 -- ranges : Should be defined as specified in 1) to describe the - DMA controller channels. +- ranges : describes the mapping between the address space of the + DMA channels and the address space of the DMA controller - DMA channel nodes: - - compatible : compatible list, contains 2 entries, first is - "fsl,CHIP-dma-channel", where CHIP is the processor - (mpc8540, mpc8560, etc.) and the second is - "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel". However, see note below. - - cell-index : dma channel index starts at 0. - - reg : <registers mapping for channel> - - interrupts : <interrupt mapping for DMA channel IRQ> + - compatible : must include "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel" + However, see note below. + - cell-index : DMA channel index starts at 0. + - reg : DMA channel specific registers + - interrupts : interrupt specifier for DMA channel IRQ - interrupt-parent : optional, if needed for interrupt mapping Example: @@ -134,6 +128,76 @@ Example: }; }; +** Freescale Elo3 DMA Controller + DMA controller which has same function as EloPlus except that Elo3 has 8 + channels while EloPlus has only 4, it is used in Freescale Txxx and Bxxx + series chips, such as t1040, t4240, b4860. + +Required properties: + +- compatible : must include "fsl,elo3-dma" +- reg : contains two entries for DMA General Status Registers, + i.e. DGSR0 which includes status for channel 1~4, and + DGSR1 for channel 5~8 +- ranges : describes the mapping between the address space of the + DMA channels and the address space of the DMA controller + +- DMA channel nodes: + - compatible : must include "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel" + - reg : DMA channel specific registers + - interrupts : interrupt specifier for DMA channel IRQ + - interrupt-parent : optional, if needed for interrupt mapping + +Example: +dma@100300 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + compatible = "fsl,elo3-dma"; + reg = <0x100300 0x4>, + <0x100600 0x4>; + ranges = <0x0 0x100100 0x500>; + dma-channel@0 { + compatible = "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel"; + reg = <0x0 0x80>; + interrupts = <28 2 0 0>; + }; + dma-channel@80 { + compatible = "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel"; + reg = <0x80 0x80>; + interrupts = <29 2 0 0>; + }; + dma-channel@100 { + compatible = "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel"; + reg = <0x100 0x80>; + interrupts = <30 2 0 0>; + }; + dma-channel@180 { + compatible = "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel"; + reg = <0x180 0x80>; + interrupts = <31 2 0 0>; + }; + dma-channel@300 { + compatible = "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel"; + reg = <0x300 0x80>; + interrupts = <76 2 0 0>; + }; + dma-channel@380 { + compatible = "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel"; + reg = <0x380 0x80>; + interrupts = <77 2 0 0>; + }; + dma-channel@400 { + compatible = "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel"; + reg = <0x400 0x80>; + interrupts = <78 2 0 0>; + }; + dma-channel@480 { + compatible = "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel"; + reg = <0x480 0x80>; + interrupts = <79 2 0 0>; + }; +}; + Note on DMA channel compatible properties: The compatible property must say "fsl,elo-dma-channel" or "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel" to be used by the Elo DMA driver (fsldma). Any DMA channel used by fsldma cannot be used by another diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-lp3943.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-lp3943.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7bd9d3b12ce1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-lp3943.txt @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +TI/National Semiconductor LP3943 PWM controller + +Required properties: + - compatible: "ti,lp3943-pwm" + - #pwm-cells: Should be 2. See pwm.txt in this directory for a + description of the cells format. + Note that this hardware limits the period length to the + range 6250~1600000. + - ti,pwm0 or ti,pwm1: Output pin number(s) for PWM channel 0 or 1. + 0 = output 0 + 1 = output 1 + . + . + 15 = output 15 + +Example: +PWM 0 is for RGB LED brightness control +PWM 1 is for brightness control of LP8557 backlight device + +&i2c3 { + lp3943@60 { + compatible = "ti,lp3943"; + reg = <0x60>; + + /* + * PWM 0 : output 8, 9 and 10 + * PWM 1 : output 15 + */ + pwm3943: pwm { + compatible = "ti,lp3943-pwm"; + #pwm-cells = <2>; + ti,pwm0 = <8 9 10>; + ti,pwm1 = <15>; + }; + }; + +}; + +/* LEDs control with PWM 0 of LP3943 */ +pwmleds { + compatible = "pwm-leds"; + rgb { + label = "indi::rgb"; + pwms = <&pwm3943 0 10000>; + max-brightness = <255>; + }; +}; + +&i2c4 { + /* Backlight control with PWM 1 of LP3943 */ + backlight@2c { + compatible = "ti,lp8557"; + reg = <0x2c>; + + pwms = <&pwm3943 1 10000>; + pwm-names = "lp8557"; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-samsung.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-samsung.txt index d61fccd40bad..5538de9c2007 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-samsung.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-samsung.txt @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Required properties: samsung,s5pc100-pwm - for 32-bit timers present on S5PC100, S5PV210, Exynos4210 rev0 SoCs samsung,exynos4210-pwm - for 32-bit timers present on Exynos4210, - Exynos4x12 and Exynos5250 SoCs + Exynos4x12, Exynos5250 and Exynos5420 SoCs - reg: base address and size of register area - interrupts: list of timer interrupts (one interrupt per timer, starting at timer 0) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/qcom,prng.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/qcom,prng.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8e5853c2879b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/qcom,prng.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +Qualcomm MSM pseudo random number generator. + +Required properties: + +- compatible : should be "qcom,prng" +- reg : specifies base physical address and size of the registers map +- clocks : phandle to clock-controller plus clock-specifier pair +- clock-names : "core" clocks all registers, FIFO and circuits in PRNG IP block + +Example: + + rng@f9bff000 { + compatible = "qcom,prng"; + reg = <0xf9bff000 0x200>; + clocks = <&clock GCC_PRNG_AHB_CLK>; + clock-names = "core"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/atmel-usart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/atmel-usart.txt index 2191dcb9f1da..9c5d19ac935c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/atmel-usart.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/atmel-usart.txt @@ -6,6 +6,9 @@ Required properties: additional mode or an USART new feature. - reg: Should contain registers location and length - interrupts: Should contain interrupt +- clock-names: tuple listing input clock names. + Required elements: "usart" +- clocks: phandles to input clocks. Optional properties: - atmel,use-dma-rx: use of PDC or DMA for receiving data @@ -26,6 +29,8 @@ Example: compatible = "atmel,at91sam9260-usart"; reg = <0xfff8c000 0x4000>; interrupts = <7>; + clocks = <&usart0_clk>; + clock-names = "usart"; atmel,use-dma-rx; atmel,use-dma-tx; }; @@ -35,6 +40,8 @@ Example: compatible = "atmel,at91sam9260-usart"; reg = <0xf001c000 0x100>; interrupts = <12 4 5>; + clocks = <&usart0_clk>; + clock-names = "usart"; atmel,use-dma-rx; atmel,use-dma-tx; dmas = <&dma0 2 0x3>, diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/cirrus,clps711x-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/cirrus,clps711x-uart.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..12f3cf834deb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/cirrus,clps711x-uart.txt @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +* Cirrus Logic CLPS711X Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "cirrus,clps711x-uart". +- reg: Address and length of the register set for the device. +- interrupts: Should contain UART TX and RX interrupt. +- clocks: Should contain UART core clock number. +- syscon: Phandle to SYSCON node, which contain UART control bits. + +Optional properties: +- uart-use-ms: Indicate the UART has modem signal (DCD, DSR, CTS). + +Note: Each UART port should have an alias correctly numbered +in "aliases" node. + +Example: + aliases { + serial0 = &uart1; + }; + + uart1: uart@80000480 { + compatible = "cirrus,clps711x-uart"; + reg = <0x80000480 0x80>; + interrupts = <12 13>; + clocks = <&clks 11>; + syscon = <&syscon1>; + uart-use-ms; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/adi,axi-i2s.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/adi,axi-i2s.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5875ca459ed1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/adi,axi-i2s.txt @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +ADI AXI-I2S controller + +Required properties: + - compatible : Must be "adi,axi-i2s-1.00.a" + - reg : Must contain I2S core's registers location and length + - clocks : Pairs of phandle and specifier referencing the controller's clocks. + The controller expects two clocks, the clock used for the AXI interface and + the clock used as the sampling rate reference clock sample. + - clock-names : "axi" for the clock to the AXI interface, "ref" for the sample + rate reference clock. + - dmas: Pairs of phandle and specifier for the DMA channels that are used by + the core. The core expects two dma channels, one for transmit and one for + receive. + - dma-names : "tx" for the transmit channel, "rx" for the receive channel. + +For more details on the 'dma', 'dma-names', 'clock' and 'clock-names' properties +please check: + * resource-names.txt + * clock/clock-bindings.txt + * dma/dma.txt + +Example: + + i2s: i2s@0x77600000 { + compatible = "adi,axi-i2s-1.00.a"; + reg = <0x77600000 0x1000>; + clocks = <&clk 15>, <&audio_clock>; + clock-names = "axi", "ref"; + dmas = <&ps7_dma 0>, <&ps7_dma 1>; + dma-names = "tx", "rx"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/adi,axi-spdif-tx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/adi,axi-spdif-tx.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..46f344965313 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/adi,axi-spdif-tx.txt @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +ADI AXI-SPDIF controller + +Required properties: + - compatible : Must be "adi,axi-spdif-1.00.a" + - reg : Must contain SPDIF core's registers location and length + - clocks : Pairs of phandle and specifier referencing the controller's clocks. + The controller expects two clocks, the clock used for the AXI interface and + the clock used as the sampling rate reference clock sample. + - clock-names: "axi" for the clock to the AXI interface, "ref" for the sample + rate reference clock. + - dmas: Pairs of phandle and specifier for the DMA channel that is used by + the core. The core expects one dma channel for transmit. + - dma-names : Must be "tx" + +For more details on the 'dma', 'dma-names', 'clock' and 'clock-names' properties +please check: + * resource-names.txt + * clock/clock-bindings.txt + * dma/dma.txt + +Example: + + spdif: spdif@0x77400000 { + compatible = "adi,axi-spdif-tx-1.00.a"; + reg = <0x77600000 0x1000>; + clocks = <&clk 15>, <&audio_clock>; + clock-names = "axi", "ref"; + dmas = <&ps7_dma 0>; + dma-names = "tx"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/bcm2835-i2s.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/bcm2835-i2s.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..65783de0aedf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/bcm2835-i2s.txt @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +* Broadcom BCM2835 SoC I2S/PCM module + +Required properties: +- compatible: "brcm,bcm2835-i2s" +- reg: A list of base address and size entries: + * The first entry should cover the PCM registers + * The second entry should cover the PCM clock registers +- dmas: List of DMA controller phandle and DMA request line ordered pairs. +- dma-names: Identifier string for each DMA request line in the dmas property. + These strings correspond 1:1 with the ordered pairs in dmas. + + One of the DMA channels will be responsible for transmission (should be + named "tx") and one for reception (should be named "rx"). + +Example: + +bcm2835_i2s: i2s@7e203000 { + compatible = "brcm,bcm2835-i2s"; + reg = <0x7e203000 0x20>, + <0x7e101098 0x02>; + + dmas = <&dma 2>, + <&dma 3>; + dma-names = "tx", "rx"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs42l52.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs42l52.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..bc03c9312a19 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs42l52.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +CS42L52 audio CODEC + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "cirrus,cs42l52" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C + +Optional properties: + + - cirrus,reset-gpio : GPIO controller's phandle and the number + of the GPIO used to reset the codec. + + - cirrus,chgfreq-divisor : Values used to set the Charge Pump Frequency. + Allowable values of 0x00 through 0x0F. These are raw values written to the + register, not the actual frequency. The frequency is determined by the following. + Frequency = (64xFs)/(N+2) + N = chgfreq_val + Fs = Sample Rate (variable) + + - cirrus,mica-differential-cfg : boolean, If present, then the MICA input is configured + as a differential input. If not present then the MICA input is configured as + Single-ended input. Single-ended mode allows for MIC1 or MIC2 muxing for input. + + - cirrus,micb-differential-cfg : boolean, If present, then the MICB input is configured + as a differential input. If not present then the MICB input is configured as + Single-ended input. Single-ended mode allows for MIC1 or MIC2 muxing for input. + + - cirrus,micbias-lvl: Set the output voltage level on the MICBIAS Pin + 0 = 0.5 x VA + 1 = 0.6 x VA + 2 = 0.7 x VA + 3 = 0.8 x VA + 4 = 0.83 x VA + 5 = 0.91 x VA + +Example: + +codec: codec@4a { + compatible = "cirrus,cs42l52"; + reg = <0x4a>; + reset-gpio = <&gpio 10 0>; + cirrus,chgfreq-divisor = <0x05>; + cirrus.mica-differential-cfg; + cirrus,micbias-lvl = <5>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt index ed785b3f67be..569b26c4a81e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt @@ -4,7 +4,8 @@ Required properties: - compatible : "ti,dm646x-mcasp-audio" : for DM646x platforms "ti,da830-mcasp-audio" : for both DA830 & DA850 platforms - "ti,am33xx-mcasp-audio" : for AM33xx platforms (AM33xx, TI81xx) + "ti,am33xx-mcasp-audio" : for AM33xx platforms (AM33xx, AM43xx, TI81xx) + "ti,dra7-mcasp-audio" : for DRA7xx platforms - reg : Should contain reg specifiers for the entries in the reg-names property. - reg-names : Should contain: @@ -36,7 +37,8 @@ Optional properties: - pinctrl-0: Should specify pin control group used for this controller. - pinctrl-names: Should contain only one value - "default", for more details please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt - +- fck_parent : Should contain a valid clock name which will be used as parent + for the McASP fck Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,esai.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,esai.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d7b99fa637b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,esai.txt @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +Freescale Enhanced Serial Audio Interface (ESAI) Controller + +The Enhanced Serial Audio Interface (ESAI) provides a full-duplex serial port +for serial communication with a variety of serial devices, including industry +standard codecs, Sony/Phillips Digital Interface (S/PDIF) transceivers, and +other DSPs. It has up to six transmitters and four receivers. + +Required properties: + + - compatible : Compatible list, must contain "fsl,imx35-esai". + + - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device. + + - interrupts : Contains the spdif interrupt. + + - dmas : Generic dma devicetree binding as described in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt. + + - dma-names : Two dmas have to be defined, "tx" and "rx". + + - clocks: Contains an entry for each entry in clock-names. + + - clock-names : Includes the following entries: + "core" The core clock used to access registers + "extal" The esai baud clock for esai controller used to derive + HCK, SCK and FS. + "fsys" The system clock derived from ahb clock used to derive + HCK, SCK and FS. + + - fsl,fifo-depth: The number of elements in the transmit and receive FIFOs. + This number is the maximum allowed value for TFCR[TFWM] or RFCR[RFWM]. + + - fsl,esai-synchronous: This is a boolean property. If present, indicating + that ESAI would work in the synchronous mode, which means all the settings + for Receiving would be duplicated from Transmition related registers. + +Example: + +esai: esai@02024000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx35-esai"; + reg = <0x02024000 0x4000>; + interrupts = <0 51 0x04>; + clocks = <&clks 208>, <&clks 118>, <&clks 208>; + clock-names = "core", "extal", "fsys"; + dmas = <&sdma 23 21 0>, <&sdma 24 21 0>; + dma-names = "rx", "tx"; + fsl,fifo-depth = <128>; + fsl,esai-synchronous; + status = "disabled"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,ssi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,ssi.txt index 4303b6ab6208..b93e9a91e30e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,ssi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,ssi.txt @@ -4,7 +4,12 @@ The SSI is a serial device that communicates with audio codecs. It can be programmed in AC97, I2S, left-justified, or right-justified modes. Required properties: -- compatible: Compatible list, contains "fsl,ssi". +- compatible: Compatible list, should contain one of the following + compatibles: + fsl,mpc8610-ssi + fsl,imx51-ssi + fsl,imx35-ssi + fsl,imx21-ssi - cell-index: The SSI, <0> = SSI1, <1> = SSI2, and so on. - reg: Offset and length of the register set for the device. - interrupts: <a b> where a is the interrupt number and b is a diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl-sai.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl-sai.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..98611a6761c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl-sai.txt @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +Freescale Synchronous Audio Interface (SAI). + +The SAI is based on I2S module that used communicating with audio codecs, +which provides a synchronous audio interface that supports fullduplex +serial interfaces with frame synchronization such as I2S, AC97, TDM, and +codec/DSP interfaces. + + +Required properties: +- compatible: Compatible list, contains "fsl,vf610-sai". +- reg: Offset and length of the register set for the device. +- clocks: Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names. +- clock-names : Must include the "sai" entry. +- dmas : Generic dma devicetree binding as described in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt. +- dma-names : Two dmas have to be defined, "tx" and "rx". +- pinctrl-names: Must contain a "default" entry. +- pinctrl-NNN: One property must exist for each entry in pinctrl-names. + See ../pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt for details of the property values. +- big-endian-regs: If this property is absent, the little endian mode will + be in use as default, or the big endian mode will be in use for all the + device registers. +- big-endian-data: If this property is absent, the little endian mode will + be in use as default, or the big endian mode will be in use for all the + fifo data. + +Example: +sai2: sai@40031000 { + compatible = "fsl,vf610-sai"; + reg = <0x40031000 0x1000>; + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_sai2_1>; + clocks = <&clks VF610_CLK_SAI2>; + clock-names = "sai"; + dma-names = "tx", "rx"; + dmas = <&edma0 0 VF610_EDMA_MUXID0_SAI2_TX>, + <&edma0 0 VF610_EDMA_MUXID0_SAI2_RX>; + big-endian-regs; + big-endian-data; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/hdmi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/hdmi.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..31af7bca3099 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/hdmi.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +Device-Tree bindings for dummy HDMI codec + +Required properties: + - compatible: should be "linux,hdmi-audio". + +CODEC output pins: + * TX + +CODEC input pins: + * RX + +Example node: + + hdmi_audio: hdmi_audio@0 { + compatible = "linux,hdmi-audio"; + status = "okay"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/max98090.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/max98090.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e4c8b36dcf89 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/max98090.txt @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +MAX98090 audio CODEC + +This device supports I2C only. + +Required properties: + +- compatible : "maxim,max98090". + +- reg : The I2C address of the device. + +- interrupts : The CODEC's interrupt output. + +Pins on the device (for linking into audio routes): + + * MIC1 + * MIC2 + * DMICL + * DMICR + * IN1 + * IN2 + * IN3 + * IN4 + * IN5 + * IN6 + * IN12 + * IN34 + * IN56 + * HPL + * HPR + * SPKL + * SPKR + * RCVL + * RCVR + * MICBIAS + +Example: + +audio-codec@10 { + compatible = "maxim,max98090"; + reg = <0x10>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio>; + interrupts = <TEGRA_GPIO(H, 4) GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra-audio-max98090.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra-audio-max98090.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9c7c55c71370 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/nvidia,tegra-audio-max98090.txt @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +NVIDIA Tegra audio complex, with MAX98090 CODEC + +Required properties: +- compatible : "nvidia,tegra-audio-max98090" +- clocks : Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names. + See ../clocks/clock-bindings.txt for details. +- clock-names : Must include the following entries: + - pll_a + - pll_a_out0 + - mclk (The Tegra cdev1/extern1 clock, which feeds the CODEC's mclk) +- nvidia,model : The user-visible name of this sound complex. +- nvidia,audio-routing : A list of the connections between audio components. + Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the connection's sink, + the second being the connection's source. Valid names for sources and + sinks are the MAX98090's pins (as documented in its binding), and the jacks + on the board: + + * Headphones + * Speakers + * Mic Jack + +- nvidia,i2s-controller : The phandle of the Tegra I2S controller that's + connected to the CODEC. +- nvidia,audio-codec : The phandle of the MAX98090 audio codec. + +Optional properties: +- nvidia,hp-det-gpios : The GPIO that detect headphones are plugged in + +Example: + +sound { + compatible = "nvidia,tegra-audio-max98090-venice2", + "nvidia,tegra-audio-max98090"; + nvidia,model = "NVIDIA Tegra Venice2"; + + nvidia,audio-routing = + "Headphones", "HPR", + "Headphones", "HPL", + "Speakers", "SPKR", + "Speakers", "SPKL", + "Mic Jack", "MICBIAS", + "IN34", "Mic Jack"; + + nvidia,i2s-controller = <&tegra_i2s1>; + nvidia,audio-codec = <&acodec>; + + clocks = <&tegra_car TEGRA124_CLK_PLL_A>, + <&tegra_car TEGRA124_CLK_PLL_A_OUT0>, + <&tegra_car TEGRA124_CLK_EXTERN1>; + clock-names = "pll_a", "pll_a_out0", "mclk"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-card.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-card.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e9e20ec67d62 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-card.txt @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ +Simple-Card: + +Simple-Card specifies audio DAI connection of SoC <-> codec. + +Required properties: + +- compatible : "simple-audio-card" + +Optional properties: + +- simple-audio-card,format : CPU/CODEC common audio format. + "i2s", "right_j", "left_j" , "dsp_a" + "dsp_b", "ac97", "pdm", "msb", "lsb" +- simple-audio-card,routing : A list of the connections between audio components. + Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the + connection's sink, the second being the connection's + source. + +Required subnodes: + +- simple-audio-card,cpu : CPU sub-node +- simple-audio-card,codec : CODEC sub-node + +Required CPU/CODEC subnodes properties: + +- sound-dai : phandle and port of CPU/CODEC + +Optional CPU/CODEC subnodes properties: + +- format : CPU/CODEC specific audio format if needed. + see simple-audio-card,format +- frame-master : bool property. add this if subnode is frame master +- bitclock-master : bool property. add this if subnode is bitclock master +- bitclock-inversion : bool property. add this if subnode has clock inversion +- frame-inversion : bool property. add this if subnode has frame inversion +- clocks / system-clock-frequency : specify subnode's clock if needed. + it can be specified via "clocks" if system has + clock node (= common clock), or "system-clock-frequency" + (if system doens't support common clock) + +Example: + +sound { + compatible = "simple-audio-card"; + simple-audio-card,format = "left_j"; + simple-audio-routing = + "MIC_IN", "Mic Jack", + "Headphone Jack", "HP_OUT", + "Ext Spk", "LINE_OUT"; + + simple-audio-card,cpu { + sound-dai = <&sh_fsi2 0>; + }; + + simple-audio-card,codec { + sound-dai = <&ak4648>; + bitclock-master; + frame-master; + clocks = <&osc>; + }; +}; + +&i2c0 { + ak4648: ak4648@12 { + #sound-dai-cells = <0>; + compatible = "asahi-kasei,ak4648"; + reg = <0x12>; + }; +}; + +sh_fsi2: sh_fsi2@ec230000 { + #sound-dai-cells = <1>; + compatible = "renesas,sh_fsi2"; + reg = <0xec230000 0x400>; + interrupt-parent = <&gic>; + interrupts = <0 146 0x4>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tlv320aic3x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tlv320aic3x.txt index 5e6040c2c2e9..9d8ea14db490 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tlv320aic3x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tlv320aic3x.txt @@ -6,6 +6,7 @@ Required properties: - compatible - "string" - One of: "ti,tlv320aic3x" - Generic TLV320AIC3x device + "ti,tlv320aic32x4" - TLV320AIC32x4 "ti,tlv320aic33" - TLV320AIC33 "ti,tlv320aic3007" - TLV320AIC3007 "ti,tlv320aic3106" - TLV320AIC3106 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nvidia,tegra20-spi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nvidia,tegra20-spi.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 6b9e51896693..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nvidia,tegra20-spi.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,5 +0,0 @@ -NVIDIA Tegra 2 SPI device - -Required properties: -- compatible : should be "nvidia,tegra20-spi". -- gpios : should specify GPIOs used for chipselect. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/omap-spi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/omap-spi.txt index 4c85c4c69584..2ba5f9c023ac 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/omap-spi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/omap-spi.txt @@ -2,8 +2,8 @@ OMAP2+ McSPI device Required properties: - compatible : - - "ti,omap2-spi" for OMAP2 & OMAP3. - - "ti,omap4-spi" for OMAP4+. + - "ti,omap2-mcspi" for OMAP2 & OMAP3. + - "ti,omap4-mcspi" for OMAP4+. - ti,spi-num-cs : Number of chipselect supported by the instance. - ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated to the McSPI - ti,pindir-d0-out-d1-in: Select the D0 pin as output and D1 as diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/dwc2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/dwc2.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 1a1b7cfa4845..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/dwc2.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,15 +0,0 @@ -Platform DesignWare HS OTG USB 2.0 controller ------------------------------------------------------ - -Required properties: -- compatible : "snps,dwc2" -- reg : Should contain 1 register range (address and length) -- interrupts : Should contain 1 interrupt - -Example: - - usb@101c0000 { - compatible = "ralink,rt3050-usb, snps,dwc2"; - reg = <0x101c0000 40000>; - interrupts = <18>; - }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/xillybus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/xillybus.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9e316dc2e40f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/xillybus.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +* Xillybus driver for generic FPGA interface + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "xillybus,xillybus-1.00.a" +- reg: Address and length of the register set for the device +- interrupts: Contains one interrupt node, typically consisting of three cells. +- interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller that + services interrupts for this device. + +Optional properties: +- dma-coherent: Present if DMA operations are coherent + +Example: + + xillybus@ff200400 { + compatible = "xillybus,xillybus-1.00.a"; + reg = < 0xff200400 0x00000080 >; + interrupts = < 0 40 1 >; + interrupt-parent = <&intc>; + } ; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/allwinner,sun5i-a13-hstimer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/allwinner,sun5i-a13-hstimer.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7c26154b8bbb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/allwinner,sun5i-a13-hstimer.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +Allwinner SoCs High Speed Timer Controller + +Required properties: + +- compatible : should be "allwinner,sun5i-a13-hstimer" or + "allwinner,sun7i-a20-hstimer" +- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers. +- interrupts : The interrupts of these timers (2 for the sun5i IP, 4 for the sun7i + one) +- clocks: phandle to the source clock (usually the AHB clock) + +Example: + +timer@01c60000 { + compatible = "allwinner,sun7i-a20-hstimer"; + reg = <0x01c60000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <0 51 1>, + <0 52 1>, + <0 53 1>, + <0 54 1>; + clocks = <&ahb1_gates 19>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci13xxx-imx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci-hdrc-imx.txt index b4b5b7906c88..b4b5b7906c88 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci13xxx-imx.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci-hdrc-imx.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc2.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b8b6871f116f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc2.txt @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +Platform DesignWare HS OTG USB 2.0 controller +----------------------------------------------------- + +Required properties: +- compatible : One of: + - brcm,bcm2835-usb: The DWC2 USB controller instance in the BCM2835 SoC. + - snps,dwc2: A generic DWC2 USB controller with default parameters. +- reg : Should contain 1 register range (address and length) +- interrupts : Should contain 1 interrupt +- clocks: clock provider specifier +- clock-names: shall be "otg" +Refer to clk/clock-bindings.txt for generic clock consumer properties + +Optional properties: +- phys: phy provider specifier +- phy-names: shall be "device" +Refer to phy/phy-bindings.txt for generic phy consumer properties + +Example: + + usb@101c0000 { + compatible = "ralink,rt3050-usb, snps,dwc2"; + reg = <0x101c0000 40000>; + interrupts = <18>; + clocks = <&usb_otg_ahb_clk>; + clock-names = "otg"; + phys = <&usbphy>; + phy-names = "usb2-phy"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/gr-udc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/gr-udc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0c5118f7a916 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/gr-udc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +USB Peripheral Controller driver for Aeroflex Gaisler GRUSBDC. + +The GRUSBDC USB Device Controller core is available in the GRLIB VHDL +IP core library. + +Note: In the ordinary environment for the core, a Leon SPARC system, +these properties are built from information in the AMBA plug&play. + +Required properties: + +- name : Should be "GAISLER_USBDC" or "01_021" + +- reg : Address and length of the register set for the device + +- interrupts : Interrupt numbers for this device + +Optional properties: + +- epobufsizes : An array of buffer sizes for OUT endpoints. If the property is + not present, or for endpoints outside of the array, 1024 is assumed by + the driver. + +- epibufsizes : An array of buffer sizes for IN endpoints. If the property is + not present, or for endpoints outside of the array, 1024 is assumed by + the driver. + +For further information look in the documentation for the GLIB IP core library: +http://www.gaisler.com/products/grlib/grip.pdf diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/omap-usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/omap-usb.txt index 090e5e22bd2b..c495135115cb 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/omap-usb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/omap-usb.txt @@ -87,6 +87,8 @@ Required properties: e.g. USB3 PHY and SATA PHY on OMAP5. "ti,control-phy-dra7usb2" - if it has power down register like USB2 PHY on DRA7 platform. + "ti,control-phy-am437usb2" - if it has power down register like USB2 PHY on + AM437 platform. - reg : Address and length of the register set for the device. It contains the address of "otghs_control" for control-phy-otghs or "power" register for other types. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt index ce95ed1c6d3e..f29cd78b6698 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt @@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ aeroflexgaisler Aeroflex Gaisler AB ak Asahi Kasei Corp. altr Altera Corp. amcc Applied Micro Circuits Corporation (APM, formally AMCC) +amstaos AMS-Taos Inc. apm Applied Micro Circuits Corporation (APM) arm ARM Ltd. atmel Atmel Corporation @@ -32,12 +33,14 @@ est ESTeem Wireless Modems fsl Freescale Semiconductor GEFanuc GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms Embedded Systems, Inc. gef GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms Embedded Systems, Inc. +gmt Global Mixed-mode Technology, Inc. hisilicon Hisilicon Limited. hp Hewlett Packard ibm International Business Machines (IBM) idt Integrated Device Technologies, Inc. img Imagination Technologies Ltd. intercontrol Inter Control Group +lg LG Corporation linux Linux-specific binding lsi LSI Corp. (LSI Logic) marvell Marvell Technology Group Ltd. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/pwm-backlight.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/pwm-backlight.txt index 1e4fc727f3b1..764db86d441a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/pwm-backlight.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/pwm-backlight.txt @@ -10,12 +10,16 @@ Required properties: last value in the array represents a 100% duty cycle (brightest). - default-brightness-level: the default brightness level (index into the array defined by the "brightness-levels" property) + - power-supply: regulator for supply voltage Optional properties: - pwm-names: a list of names for the PWM devices specified in the "pwms" property (see PWM binding[0]) + - enable-gpios: contains a single GPIO specifier for the GPIO which enables + and disables the backlight (see GPIO binding[1]) [0]: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm.txt +[1]: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt Example: @@ -25,4 +29,7 @@ Example: brightness-levels = <0 4 8 16 32 64 128 255>; default-brightness-level = <6>; + + power-supply = <&vdd_bl_reg>; + enable-gpios = <&gpio 58 0>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/dw_wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/dw_wdt.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..08e16f684f2d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/dw_wdt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +Synopsys Designware Watchdog Timer + +Required Properties: + +- compatible : Should contain "snps,dw-wdt" +- reg : Base address and size of the watchdog timer registers. +- clocks : phandle + clock-specifier for the clock that drives the + watchdog timer. + +Optional Properties: + +- interrupts : The interrupt used for the watchdog timeout warning. + +Example: + + watchdog0: wd@ffd02000 { + compatible = "snps,dw-wdt"; + reg = <0xffd02000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <0 171 4>; + clocks = <&per_base_clk>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/men-a021-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/men-a021-wdt.txt index 370dee3226d9..370dee3226d9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/men-a021-wdt.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/men-a021-wdt.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/moxa,moxart-watchdog.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/moxa,moxart-watchdog.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1169857d1d12 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/moxa,moxart-watchdog.txt @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +MOXA ART Watchdog timer + +Required properties: + +- compatible : Must be "moxa,moxart-watchdog" +- reg : Should contain registers location and length +- clocks : Should contain phandle for the clock that drives the counter + +Example: + + watchdog: watchdog@98500000 { + compatible = "moxa,moxart-watchdog"; + reg = <0x98500000 0x10>; + clocks = <&coreclk>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/rt2880-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/rt2880-wdt.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d7bab3db9d1f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/rt2880-wdt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +Ralink Watchdog Timers + +Required properties: +- compatible: must be "ralink,rt2880-wdt" +- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of the register range + +Optional properties: +- interrupt-parent: phandle to the INTC device node +- interrupts: Specify the INTC interrupt number + +Example: + + watchdog@120 { + compatible = "ralink,rt2880-wdt"; + reg = <0x120 0x10>; + + interrupt-parent = <&intc>; + interrupts = <1>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/sirfsoc_wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/sirfsoc_wdt.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9cbc76c89b2b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/sirfsoc_wdt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +SiRFSoC Timer and Watchdog Timer(WDT) Controller + +Required properties: +- compatible: "sirf,prima2-tick" +- reg: Address range of tick timer/WDT register set +- interrupts: interrupt number to the cpu + +Example: + +timer@b0020000 { + compatible = "sirf,prima2-tick"; + reg = <0xb0020000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <0>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/dmatest.txt b/Documentation/dmatest.txt index a2b5663eae26..dd77a81bdb80 100644 --- a/Documentation/dmatest.txt +++ b/Documentation/dmatest.txt @@ -15,39 +15,48 @@ be built as module or inside kernel. Let's consider those cases. Part 2 - When dmatest is built as a module... -After mounting debugfs and loading the module, the /sys/kernel/debug/dmatest -folder with nodes will be created. There are two important files located. First -is the 'run' node that controls run and stop phases of the test, and the second -one, 'results', is used to get the test case results. - -Note that in this case test will not run on load automatically. - Example of usage: + % modprobe dmatest channel=dma0chan0 timeout=2000 iterations=1 run=1 + +...or: + % modprobe dmatest % echo dma0chan0 > /sys/module/dmatest/parameters/channel % echo 2000 > /sys/module/dmatest/parameters/timeout % echo 1 > /sys/module/dmatest/parameters/iterations - % echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/dmatest/run + % echo 1 > /sys/module/dmatest/parameters/run + +...or on the kernel command line: + + dmatest.channel=dma0chan0 dmatest.timeout=2000 dmatest.iterations=1 dmatest.run=1 Hint: available channel list could be extracted by running the following command: % ls -1 /sys/class/dma/ -After a while you will start to get messages about current status or error like -in the original code. +Once started a message like "dmatest: Started 1 threads using dma0chan0" is +emitted. After that only test failure messages are reported until the test +stops. Note that running a new test will not stop any in progress test. -The following command should return actual state of the test. - % cat /sys/kernel/debug/dmatest/run - -To wait for test done the user may perform a busy loop that checks the state. - - % while [ $(cat /sys/kernel/debug/dmatest/run) = "Y" ] - > do - > echo -n "." - > sleep 1 - > done - > echo +The following command returns the state of the test. + % cat /sys/module/dmatest/parameters/run + +To wait for test completion userpace can poll 'run' until it is false, or use +the wait parameter. Specifying 'wait=1' when loading the module causes module +initialization to pause until a test run has completed, while reading +/sys/module/dmatest/parameters/wait waits for any running test to complete +before returning. For example, the following scripts wait for 42 tests +to complete before exiting. Note that if 'iterations' is set to 'infinite' then +waiting is disabled. + +Example: + % modprobe dmatest run=1 iterations=42 wait=1 + % modprobe -r dmatest +...or: + % modprobe dmatest run=1 iterations=42 + % cat /sys/module/dmatest/parameters/wait + % modprobe -r dmatest Part 3 - When built-in in the kernel... @@ -62,21 +71,22 @@ case. You always could check them at run-time by running Part 4 - Gathering the test results -The module provides a storage for the test results in the memory. The gathered -data could be used after test is done. +Test results are printed to the kernel log buffer with the format: -The special file 'results' in the debugfs represents gathered data of the in -progress test. The messages collected are printed to the kernel log as well. +"dmatest: result <channel>: <test id>: '<error msg>' with src_off=<val> dst_off=<val> len=<val> (<err code>)" Example of output: - % cat /sys/kernel/debug/dmatest/results - dma0chan0-copy0: #1: No errors with src_off=0x7bf dst_off=0x8ad len=0x3fea (0) + % dmesg | tail -n 1 + dmatest: result dma0chan0-copy0: #1: No errors with src_off=0x7bf dst_off=0x8ad len=0x3fea (0) The message format is unified across the different types of errors. A number in the parens represents additional information, e.g. error code, error counter, -or status. +or status. A test thread also emits a summary line at completion listing the +number of tests executed, number that failed, and a result code. -Comparison between buffers is stored to the dedicated structure. +Example: + % dmesg | tail -n 1 + dmatest: dma0chan0-copy0: summary 1 test, 0 failures 1000 iops 100000 KB/s (0) -Note that the verify result is now accessible only via file 'results' in the -debugfs. +The details of a data miscompare error are also emitted, but do not follow the +above format. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ba7b2df64904 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.txt @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + +Device Driver Design Patterns +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +This document describes a few common design patterns found in device drivers. +It is likely that subsystem maintainers will ask driver developers to +conform to these design patterns. + +1. State Container +2. container_of() + + +1. State Container +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +While the kernel contains a few device drivers that assume that they will +only be probed() once on a certain system (singletons), it is custom to assume +that the device the driver binds to will appear in several instances. This +means that the probe() function and all callbacks need to be reentrant. + +The most common way to achieve this is to use the state container design +pattern. It usually has this form: + +struct foo { + spinlock_t lock; /* Example member */ + (...) +}; + +static int foo_probe(...) +{ + struct foo *foo; + + foo = devm_kzalloc(dev, sizeof(*foo), GFP_KERNEL); + if (!foo) + return -ENOMEM; + spin_lock_init(&foo->lock); + (...) +} + +This will create an instance of struct foo in memory every time probe() is +called. This is our state container for this instance of the device driver. +Of course it is then necessary to always pass this instance of the +state around to all functions that need access to the state and its members. + +For example, if the driver is registering an interrupt handler, you would +pass around a pointer to struct foo like this: + +static irqreturn_t foo_handler(int irq, void *arg) +{ + struct foo *foo = arg; + (...) +} + +static int foo_probe(...) +{ + struct foo *foo; + + (...) + ret = request_irq(irq, foo_handler, 0, "foo", foo); +} + +This way you always get a pointer back to the correct instance of foo in +your interrupt handler. + + +2. container_of() +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Continuing on the above example we add an offloaded work: + +struct foo { + spinlock_t lock; + struct workqueue_struct *wq; + struct work_struct offload; + (...) +}; + +static void foo_work(struct work_struct *work) +{ + struct foo *foo = container_of(work, struct foo, offload); + + (...) +} + +static irqreturn_t foo_handler(int irq, void *arg) +{ + struct foo *foo = arg; + + queue_work(foo->wq, &foo->offload); + (...) +} + +static int foo_probe(...) +{ + struct foo *foo; + + foo->wq = create_singlethread_workqueue("foo-wq"); + INIT_WORK(&foo->offload, foo_work); + (...) +} + +The design pattern is the same for an hrtimer or something similar that will +return a single argument which is a pointer to a struct member in the +callback. + +container_of() is a macro defined in <linux/kernel.h> + +What container_of() does is to obtain a pointer to the containing struct from +a pointer to a member by a simple subtraction using the offsetof() macro from +standard C, which allows something similar to object oriented behaviours. +Notice that the contained member must not be a pointer, but an actual member +for this to work. + +We can see here that we avoid having global pointers to our struct foo * +instance this way, while still keeping the number of parameters passed to the +work function to a single pointer. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt index 5bdc8cb5fc28..4f7897e99cba 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt +++ b/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt @@ -242,6 +242,8 @@ IIO devm_iio_device_free() devm_iio_trigger_alloc() devm_iio_trigger_free() + devm_iio_device_register() + devm_iio_device_unregister() IO region devm_request_region() diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt index 41f41632ee55..07795ec51cde 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt +++ b/Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ struct platform_driver { struct device_driver driver; }; -Note that probe() should general verify that the specified device hardware +Note that probe() should in general verify that the specified device hardware actually exists; sometimes platform setup code can't be sure. The probing can use device resources, including clocks, and device platform_data. diff --git a/Documentation/efi-stub.txt b/Documentation/efi-stub.txt index 44e6bb6ead10..c628788d5b47 100644 --- a/Documentation/efi-stub.txt +++ b/Documentation/efi-stub.txt @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ The EFI boot stub is enabled with the CONFIG_EFI_STUB kernel option. **** How to install bzImage.efi The bzImage located in arch/x86/boot/bzImage must be copied to the EFI -System Partiion (ESP) and renamed with the extension ".efi". Without +System Partition (ESP) and renamed with the extension ".efi". Without the extension the EFI firmware loader will refuse to execute it. It's not possible to execute bzImage.efi from the usual Linux file systems because EFI firmware doesn't have support for them. diff --git a/Documentation/email-clients.txt b/Documentation/email-clients.txt index 860c29a472ad..e9f5daccbd02 100644 --- a/Documentation/email-clients.txt +++ b/Documentation/email-clients.txt @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Then from the "Message" menu item, select insert file and choose your patch. As an added bonus you can customise the message creation toolbar menu and put the "insert file" icon there. -Make the the composer window wide enough so that no lines wrap. As of +Make the composer window wide enough so that no lines wrap. As of KMail 1.13.5 (KDE 4.5.4), KMail will apply word wrapping when sending the email if the lines wrap in the composer window. Having word wrapping disabled in the Options menu isn't enough. Thus, if your patch has very diff --git a/Documentation/extcon/porting-android-switch-class b/Documentation/extcon/porting-android-switch-class index 5377f6317961..49c81caef84d 100644 --- a/Documentation/extcon/porting-android-switch-class +++ b/Documentation/extcon/porting-android-switch-class @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ so that they are still compatible with legacy userspace processes. Extcon's extended features for switch device drivers with complex features usually required magic numbers in state value of switch_dev. With extcon, such magic numbers that - support multiple cables ( + support multiple cables are no more required or supported. 1. Define cable names at edev->supported_cable. 2. (Recommended) remove print_state callback. @@ -114,11 +114,8 @@ exclusive, the two cables cannot be in ATTACHED state simulteneously. ****** ABI Location - If "CONFIG_ANDROID" is enabled and "CONFIG_ANDROID_SWITCH" is -disabled, /sys/class/switch/* are created as symbolic links to -/sys/class/extcon/*. Because CONFIG_ANDROID_SWITCH creates -/sys/class/switch directory, we disable symboling linking if -CONFIG_ANDROID_SWITCH is enabled. + If "CONFIG_ANDROID" is enabled, /sys/class/switch/* are created +as symbolic links to /sys/class/extcon/*. The two files of switch class, name and state, are provided with extcon, too. When the multistate support (STEP 2 of CHAPTER 1.) is diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking index fe7afe225381..5b0c083d7c0e 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking @@ -544,7 +544,7 @@ like the ->fault() handler, but simply return with VM_FAULT_NOPAGE, which will cause the VM to retry the fault. ->access() is called when get_user_pages() fails in -acces_process_vm(), typically used to debug a process through +access_process_vm(), typically used to debug a process through /proc/pid/mem or ptrace. This function is needed only for VM_IO | VM_PFNMAP VMAs. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/btrfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/btrfs.txt index 9dae59407437..5dd282dda55c 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/btrfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/btrfs.txt @@ -70,6 +70,12 @@ Unless otherwise specified, all options default to off. See comments at the top of fs/btrfs/check-integrity.c for more info. + commit=<seconds> + Set the interval of periodic commit, 30 seconds by default. Higher + values defer data being synced to permanent storage with obvious + consequences when the system crashes. The upper bound is not forced, + but a warning is printed if it's more than 300 seconds (5 minutes). + compress compress=<type> compress-force @@ -154,7 +160,11 @@ Unless otherwise specified, all options default to off. Currently this scans a list of several previous tree roots and tries to use the first readable. - skip_balance + rescan_uuid_tree + Force check and rebuild procedure of the UUID tree. This should not + normally be needed. + + skip_balance Skip automatic resume of interrupted balance operation after mount. May be resumed with "btrfs balance resume." @@ -234,24 +244,14 @@ available from the git repository at the following location: These include the following tools: -mkfs.btrfs: create a filesystem - -btrfsctl: control program to create snapshots and subvolumes: +* mkfs.btrfs: create a filesystem - mount /dev/sda2 /mnt - btrfsctl -s new_subvol_name /mnt - btrfsctl -s snapshot_of_default /mnt/default - btrfsctl -s snapshot_of_new_subvol /mnt/new_subvol_name - btrfsctl -s snapshot_of_a_snapshot /mnt/snapshot_of_new_subvol - ls /mnt - default snapshot_of_a_snapshot snapshot_of_new_subvol - new_subvol_name snapshot_of_default +* btrfs: a single tool to manage the filesystems, refer to the manpage for more details - Snapshots and subvolumes cannot be deleted right now, but you can - rm -rf all the files and directories inside them. +* 'btrfsck' or 'btrfs check': do a consistency check of the filesystem -btrfsck: do a limited check of the FS extent trees. +Other tools for specific tasks: -btrfs-debug-tree: print all of the FS metadata in text form. Example: +* btrfs-convert: in-place conversion from ext2/3/4 filesystems - btrfs-debug-tree /dev/sda2 >& big_output_file +* btrfs-image: dump filesystem metadata for debugging diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index 22d89aa37218..31f76178c987 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -547,7 +547,7 @@ Table 1-5: Kernel info in /proc sys See chapter 2 sysvipc Info of SysVIPC Resources (msg, sem, shm) (2.4) tty Info of tty drivers - uptime System uptime + uptime Wall clock since boot, combined idle time of all cpus version Kernel version video bttv info of video resources (2.4) vmallocinfo Show vmalloced areas @@ -767,6 +767,7 @@ The "Locked" indicates whether the mapping is locked in memory or not. MemTotal: 16344972 kB MemFree: 13634064 kB +MemAvailable: 14836172 kB Buffers: 3656 kB Cached: 1195708 kB SwapCached: 0 kB @@ -799,6 +800,14 @@ AnonHugePages: 49152 kB MemTotal: Total usable ram (i.e. physical ram minus a few reserved bits and the kernel binary code) MemFree: The sum of LowFree+HighFree +MemAvailable: An estimate of how much memory is available for starting new + applications, without swapping. Calculated from MemFree, + SReclaimable, the size of the file LRU lists, and the low + watermarks in each zone. + The estimate takes into account that the system needs some + page cache to function well, and that not all reclaimable + slab will be reclaimable, due to items being in use. The + impact of those factors will vary from system to system. Buffers: Relatively temporary storage for raw disk blocks shouldn't get tremendously large (20MB or so) Cached: in-memory cache for files read from the disk (the diff --git a/Documentation/gpio/00-INDEX b/Documentation/gpio/00-INDEX new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1de43ae46ae6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/gpio/00-INDEX @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +00-INDEX + - This file +gpio.txt + - Introduction to GPIOs and their kernel interfaces +consumer.txt + - How to obtain and use GPIOs in a driver +driver.txt + - How to write a GPIO driver +board.txt + - How to assign GPIOs to a consumer device and a function +sysfs.txt + - Information about the GPIO sysfs interface +gpio-legacy.txt + - Historical documentation of the deprecated GPIO integer interface diff --git a/Documentation/gpio/board.txt b/Documentation/gpio/board.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ba169faad5c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/gpio/board.txt @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ +GPIO Mappings +============= + +This document explains how GPIOs can be assigned to given devices and functions. +Note that it only applies to the new descriptor-based interface. For a +description of the deprecated integer-based GPIO interface please refer to +gpio-legacy.txt (actually, there is no real mapping possible with the old +interface; you just fetch an integer from somewhere and request the +corresponding GPIO. + +Platforms that make use of GPIOs must select ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB (if GPIO usage +is mandatory) or ARCH_WANT_OPTIONAL_GPIOLIB (if GPIO support can be omitted) in +their Kconfig. Then, how GPIOs are mapped depends on what the platform uses to +describe its hardware layout. Currently, mappings can be defined through device +tree, ACPI, and platform data. + +Device Tree +----------- +GPIOs can easily be mapped to devices and functions in the device tree. The +exact way to do it depends on the GPIO controller providing the GPIOs, see the +device tree bindings for your controller. + +GPIOs mappings are defined in the consumer device's node, in a property named +<function>-gpios, where <function> is the function the driver will request +through gpiod_get(). For example: + + foo_device { + compatible = "acme,foo"; + ... + led-gpios = <&gpio 15 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>, /* red */ + <&gpio 16 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>, /* green */ + <&gpio 17 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; /* blue */ + + power-gpio = <&gpio 1 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + }; + +This property will make GPIOs 15, 16 and 17 available to the driver under the +"led" function, and GPIO 1 as the "power" GPIO: + + struct gpio_desc *red, *green, *blue, *power; + + red = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 0); + green = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 1); + blue = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 2); + + power = gpiod_get(dev, "power"); + +The led GPIOs will be active-high, while the power GPIO will be active-low (i.e. +gpiod_is_active_low(power) will be true). + +ACPI +---- +ACPI does not support function names for GPIOs. Therefore, only the "idx" +argument of gpiod_get_index() is useful to discriminate between GPIOs assigned +to a device. The "con_id" argument can still be set for debugging purposes (it +will appear under error messages as well as debug and sysfs nodes). + +Platform Data +------------- +Finally, GPIOs can be bound to devices and functions using platform data. Board +files that desire to do so need to include the following header: + + #include <linux/gpio/driver.h> + +GPIOs are mapped by the means of tables of lookups, containing instances of the +gpiod_lookup structure. Two macros are defined to help declaring such mappings: + + GPIO_LOOKUP(chip_label, chip_hwnum, dev_id, con_id, flags) + GPIO_LOOKUP_IDX(chip_label, chip_hwnum, dev_id, con_id, idx, flags) + +where + + - chip_label is the label of the gpiod_chip instance providing the GPIO + - chip_hwnum is the hardware number of the GPIO within the chip + - dev_id is the identifier of the device that will make use of this GPIO. It + can be NULL, in which case it will be matched for calls to gpiod_get() + with a NULL device. + - con_id is the name of the GPIO function from the device point of view. It + can be NULL, in which case it will match any function. + - idx is the index of the GPIO within the function. + - flags is defined to specify the following properties: + * GPIOF_ACTIVE_LOW - to configure the GPIO as active-low + * GPIOF_OPEN_DRAIN - GPIO pin is open drain type. + * GPIOF_OPEN_SOURCE - GPIO pin is open source type. + +In the future, these flags might be extended to support more properties. + +Note that GPIO_LOOKUP() is just a shortcut to GPIO_LOOKUP_IDX() where idx = 0. + +A lookup table can then be defined as follows, with an empty entry defining its +end: + +struct gpiod_lookup_table gpios_table = { + .dev_id = "foo.0", + .table = { + GPIO_LOOKUP_IDX("gpio.0", 15, "led", 0, GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH), + GPIO_LOOKUP_IDX("gpio.0", 16, "led", 1, GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH), + GPIO_LOOKUP_IDX("gpio.0", 17, "led", 2, GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH), + GPIO_LOOKUP("gpio.0", 1, "power", GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW), + { }, + }, +}; + +And the table can be added by the board code as follows: + + gpiod_add_lookup_table(&gpios_table); + +The driver controlling "foo.0" will then be able to obtain its GPIOs as follows: + + struct gpio_desc *red, *green, *blue, *power; + + red = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 0); + green = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 1); + blue = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 2); + + power = gpiod_get(dev, "power"); + gpiod_direction_output(power, 1); + +Since the "power" GPIO is mapped as active-low, its actual signal will be 0 +after this code. Contrary to the legacy integer GPIO interface, the active-low +property is handled during mapping and is thus transparent to GPIO consumers. diff --git a/Documentation/gpio/consumer.txt b/Documentation/gpio/consumer.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e42f77d8d4ca --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/gpio/consumer.txt @@ -0,0 +1,201 @@ +GPIO Descriptor Consumer Interface +================================== + +This document describes the consumer interface of the GPIO framework. Note that +it describes the new descriptor-based interface. For a description of the +deprecated integer-based GPIO interface please refer to gpio-legacy.txt. + + +Guidelines for GPIOs consumers +============================== + +Drivers that can't work without standard GPIO calls should have Kconfig entries +that depend on GPIOLIB. The functions that allow a driver to obtain and use +GPIOs are available by including the following file: + + #include <linux/gpio/consumer.h> + +All the functions that work with the descriptor-based GPIO interface are +prefixed with gpiod_. The gpio_ prefix is used for the legacy interface. No +other function in the kernel should use these prefixes. + + +Obtaining and Disposing GPIOs +============================= + +With the descriptor-based interface, GPIOs are identified with an opaque, +non-forgeable handler that must be obtained through a call to one of the +gpiod_get() functions. Like many other kernel subsystems, gpiod_get() takes the +device that will use the GPIO and the function the requested GPIO is supposed to +fulfill: + + struct gpio_desc *gpiod_get(struct device *dev, const char *con_id) + +If a function is implemented by using several GPIOs together (e.g. a simple LED +device that displays digits), an additional index argument can be specified: + + struct gpio_desc *gpiod_get_index(struct device *dev, + const char *con_id, unsigned int idx) + +Both functions return either a valid GPIO descriptor, or an error code checkable +with IS_ERR() (they will never return a NULL pointer). -ENOENT will be returned +if and only if no GPIO has been assigned to the device/function/index triplet, +other error codes are used for cases where a GPIO has been assigned but an error +occured while trying to acquire it. This is useful to discriminate between mere +errors and an absence of GPIO for optional GPIO parameters. + +Device-managed variants of these functions are also defined: + + struct gpio_desc *devm_gpiod_get(struct device *dev, const char *con_id) + + struct gpio_desc *devm_gpiod_get_index(struct device *dev, + const char *con_id, + unsigned int idx) + +A GPIO descriptor can be disposed of using the gpiod_put() function: + + void gpiod_put(struct gpio_desc *desc) + +It is strictly forbidden to use a descriptor after calling this function. The +device-managed variant is, unsurprisingly: + + void devm_gpiod_put(struct device *dev, struct gpio_desc *desc) + + +Using GPIOs +=========== + +Setting Direction +----------------- +The first thing a driver must do with a GPIO is setting its direction. This is +done by invoking one of the gpiod_direction_*() functions: + + int gpiod_direction_input(struct gpio_desc *desc) + int gpiod_direction_output(struct gpio_desc *desc, int value) + +The return value is zero for success, else a negative errno. It should be +checked, since the get/set calls don't return errors and since misconfiguration +is possible. You should normally issue these calls from a task context. However, +for spinlock-safe GPIOs it is OK to use them before tasking is enabled, as part +of early board setup. + +For output GPIOs, the value provided becomes the initial output value. This +helps avoid signal glitching during system startup. + +A driver can also query the current direction of a GPIO: + + int gpiod_get_direction(const struct gpio_desc *desc) + +This function will return either GPIOF_DIR_IN or GPIOF_DIR_OUT. + +Be aware that there is no default direction for GPIOs. Therefore, **using a GPIO +without setting its direction first is illegal and will result in undefined +behavior!** + + +Spinlock-Safe GPIO Access +------------------------- +Most GPIO controllers can be accessed with memory read/write instructions. Those +don't need to sleep, and can safely be done from inside hard (non-threaded) IRQ +handlers and similar contexts. + +Use the following calls to access GPIOs from an atomic context: + + int gpiod_get_value(const struct gpio_desc *desc); + void gpiod_set_value(struct gpio_desc *desc, int value); + +The values are boolean, zero for low, nonzero for high. When reading the value +of an output pin, the value returned should be what's seen on the pin. That +won't always match the specified output value, because of issues including +open-drain signaling and output latencies. + +The get/set calls do not return errors because "invalid GPIO" should have been +reported earlier from gpiod_direction_*(). However, note that not all platforms +can read the value of output pins; those that can't should always return zero. +Also, using these calls for GPIOs that can't safely be accessed without sleeping +(see below) is an error. + + +GPIO Access That May Sleep +-------------------------- +Some GPIO controllers must be accessed using message based buses like I2C or +SPI. Commands to read or write those GPIO values require waiting to get to the +head of a queue to transmit a command and get its response. This requires +sleeping, which can't be done from inside IRQ handlers. + +Platforms that support this type of GPIO distinguish them from other GPIOs by +returning nonzero from this call: + + int gpiod_cansleep(const struct gpio_desc *desc) + +To access such GPIOs, a different set of accessors is defined: + + int gpiod_get_value_cansleep(const struct gpio_desc *desc) + void gpiod_set_value_cansleep(struct gpio_desc *desc, int value) + +Accessing such GPIOs requires a context which may sleep, for example a threaded +IRQ handler, and those accessors must be used instead of spinlock-safe +accessors without the cansleep() name suffix. + +Other than the fact that these accessors might sleep, and will work on GPIOs +that can't be accessed from hardIRQ handlers, these calls act the same as the +spinlock-safe calls. + + +Active-low State and Raw GPIO Values +------------------------------------ +Device drivers like to manage the logical state of a GPIO, i.e. the value their +device will actually receive, no matter what lies between it and the GPIO line. +In some cases, it might make sense to control the actual GPIO line value. The +following set of calls ignore the active-low property of a GPIO and work on the +raw line value: + + int gpiod_get_raw_value(const struct gpio_desc *desc) + void gpiod_set_raw_value(struct gpio_desc *desc, int value) + int gpiod_get_raw_value_cansleep(const struct gpio_desc *desc) + void gpiod_set_raw_value_cansleep(struct gpio_desc *desc, int value) + +The active-low state of a GPIO can also be queried using the following call: + + int gpiod_is_active_low(const struct gpio_desc *desc) + +Note that these functions should only be used with great moderation ; a driver +should not have to care about the physical line level. + +GPIOs mapped to IRQs +-------------------- +GPIO lines can quite often be used as IRQs. You can get the IRQ number +corresponding to a given GPIO using the following call: + + int gpiod_to_irq(const struct gpio_desc *desc) + +It will return an IRQ number, or an negative errno code if the mapping can't be +done (most likely because that particular GPIO cannot be used as IRQ). It is an +unchecked error to use a GPIO that wasn't set up as an input using +gpiod_direction_input(), or to use an IRQ number that didn't originally come +from gpiod_to_irq(). gpiod_to_irq() is not allowed to sleep. + +Non-error values returned from gpiod_to_irq() can be passed to request_irq() or +free_irq(). They will often be stored into IRQ resources for platform devices, +by the board-specific initialization code. Note that IRQ trigger options are +part of the IRQ interface, e.g. IRQF_TRIGGER_FALLING, as are system wakeup +capabilities. + + +Interacting With the Legacy GPIO Subsystem +========================================== +Many kernel subsystems still handle GPIOs using the legacy integer-based +interface. Although it is strongly encouraged to upgrade them to the safer +descriptor-based API, the following two functions allow you to convert a GPIO +descriptor into the GPIO integer namespace and vice-versa: + + int desc_to_gpio(const struct gpio_desc *desc) + struct gpio_desc *gpio_to_desc(unsigned gpio) + +The GPIO number returned by desc_to_gpio() can be safely used as long as the +GPIO descriptor has not been freed. All the same, a GPIO number passed to +gpio_to_desc() must have been properly acquired, and usage of the returned GPIO +descriptor is only possible after the GPIO number has been released. + +Freeing a GPIO obtained by one API with the other API is forbidden and an +unchecked error. diff --git a/Documentation/gpio/driver.txt b/Documentation/gpio/driver.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9da0bfa74781 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/gpio/driver.txt @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +GPIO Descriptor Driver Interface +================================ + +This document serves as a guide for GPIO chip drivers writers. Note that it +describes the new descriptor-based interface. For a description of the +deprecated integer-based GPIO interface please refer to gpio-legacy.txt. + +Each GPIO controller driver needs to include the following header, which defines +the structures used to define a GPIO driver: + + #include <linux/gpio/driver.h> + + +Internal Representation of GPIOs +================================ + +Inside a GPIO driver, individual GPIOs are identified by their hardware number, +which is a unique number between 0 and n, n being the number of GPIOs managed by +the chip. This number is purely internal: the hardware number of a particular +GPIO descriptor is never made visible outside of the driver. + +On top of this internal number, each GPIO also need to have a global number in +the integer GPIO namespace so that it can be used with the legacy GPIO +interface. Each chip must thus have a "base" number (which can be automatically +assigned), and for each GPIO the global number will be (base + hardware number). +Although the integer representation is considered deprecated, it still has many +users and thus needs to be maintained. + +So for example one platform could use numbers 32-159 for GPIOs, with a +controller defining 128 GPIOs at a "base" of 32 ; while another platform uses +numbers 0..63 with one set of GPIO controllers, 64-79 with another type of GPIO +controller, and on one particular board 80-95 with an FPGA. The numbers need not +be contiguous; either of those platforms could also use numbers 2000-2063 to +identify GPIOs in a bank of I2C GPIO expanders. + + +Controller Drivers: gpio_chip +============================= + +In the gpiolib framework each GPIO controller is packaged as a "struct +gpio_chip" (see linux/gpio/driver.h for its complete definition) with members +common to each controller of that type: + + - methods to establish GPIO direction + - methods used to access GPIO values + - method to return the IRQ number associated to a given GPIO + - flag saying whether calls to its methods may sleep + - optional debugfs dump method (showing extra state like pullup config) + - optional base number (will be automatically assigned if omitted) + - label for diagnostics and GPIOs mapping using platform data + +The code implementing a gpio_chip should support multiple instances of the +controller, possibly using the driver model. That code will configure each +gpio_chip and issue gpiochip_add(). Removing a GPIO controller should be rare; +use gpiochip_remove() when it is unavoidable. + +Most often a gpio_chip is part of an instance-specific structure with state not +exposed by the GPIO interfaces, such as addressing, power management, and more. +Chips such as codecs will have complex non-GPIO state. + +Any debugfs dump method should normally ignore signals which haven't been +requested as GPIOs. They can use gpiochip_is_requested(), which returns either +NULL or the label associated with that GPIO when it was requested. + +Locking IRQ usage +----------------- +Input GPIOs can be used as IRQ signals. When this happens, a driver is requested +to mark the GPIO as being used as an IRQ: + + int gpiod_lock_as_irq(struct gpio_desc *desc) + +This will prevent the use of non-irq related GPIO APIs until the GPIO IRQ lock +is released: + + void gpiod_unlock_as_irq(struct gpio_desc *desc) diff --git a/Documentation/gpio.txt b/Documentation/gpio/gpio-legacy.txt index 6f83fa965b4b..6f83fa965b4b 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/gpio/gpio-legacy.txt diff --git a/Documentation/gpio/gpio.txt b/Documentation/gpio/gpio.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..cd9b356e88cd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/gpio/gpio.txt @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ +GPIO Interfaces +=============== + +The documents in this directory give detailed instructions on how to access +GPIOs in drivers, and how to write a driver for a device that provides GPIOs +itself. + +Due to the history of GPIO interfaces in the kernel, there are two different +ways to obtain and use GPIOs: + + - The descriptor-based interface is the preferred way to manipulate GPIOs, +and is described by all the files in this directory excepted gpio-legacy.txt. + - The legacy integer-based interface which is considered deprecated (but still +usable for compatibility reasons) is documented in gpio-legacy.txt. + +The remainder of this document applies to the new descriptor-based interface. +gpio-legacy.txt contains the same information applied to the legacy +integer-based interface. + + +What is a GPIO? +=============== + +A "General Purpose Input/Output" (GPIO) is a flexible software-controlled +digital signal. They are provided from many kinds of chip, and are familiar +to Linux developers working with embedded and custom hardware. Each GPIO +represents a bit connected to a particular pin, or "ball" on Ball Grid Array +(BGA) packages. Board schematics show which external hardware connects to +which GPIOs. Drivers can be written generically, so that board setup code +passes such pin configuration data to drivers. + +System-on-Chip (SOC) processors heavily rely on GPIOs. In some cases, every +non-dedicated pin can be configured as a GPIO; and most chips have at least +several dozen of them. Programmable logic devices (like FPGAs) can easily +provide GPIOs; multifunction chips like power managers, and audio codecs +often have a few such pins to help with pin scarcity on SOCs; and there are +also "GPIO Expander" chips that connect using the I2C or SPI serial buses. +Most PC southbridges have a few dozen GPIO-capable pins (with only the BIOS +firmware knowing how they're used). + +The exact capabilities of GPIOs vary between systems. Common options: + + - Output values are writable (high=1, low=0). Some chips also have + options about how that value is driven, so that for example only one + value might be driven, supporting "wire-OR" and similar schemes for the + other value (notably, "open drain" signaling). + + - Input values are likewise readable (1, 0). Some chips support readback + of pins configured as "output", which is very useful in such "wire-OR" + cases (to support bidirectional signaling). GPIO controllers may have + input de-glitch/debounce logic, sometimes with software controls. + + - Inputs can often be used as IRQ signals, often edge triggered but + sometimes level triggered. Such IRQs may be configurable as system + wakeup events, to wake the system from a low power state. + + - Usually a GPIO will be configurable as either input or output, as needed + by different product boards; single direction ones exist too. + + - Most GPIOs can be accessed while holding spinlocks, but those accessed + through a serial bus normally can't. Some systems support both types. + +On a given board each GPIO is used for one specific purpose like monitoring +MMC/SD card insertion/removal, detecting card write-protect status, driving +a LED, configuring a transceiver, bit-banging a serial bus, poking a hardware +watchdog, sensing a switch, and so on. + + +Common GPIO Properties +====================== + +These properties are met through all the other documents of the GPIO interface +and it is useful to understand them, especially if you need to define GPIO +mappings. + +Active-High and Active-Low +-------------------------- +It is natural to assume that a GPIO is "active" when its output signal is 1 +("high"), and inactive when it is 0 ("low"). However in practice the signal of a +GPIO may be inverted before is reaches its destination, or a device could decide +to have different conventions about what "active" means. Such decisions should +be transparent to device drivers, therefore it is possible to define a GPIO as +being either active-high ("1" means "active", the default) or active-low ("0" +means "active") so that drivers only need to worry about the logical signal and +not about what happens at the line level. + +Open Drain and Open Source +-------------------------- +Sometimes shared signals need to use "open drain" (where only the low signal +level is actually driven), or "open source" (where only the high signal level is +driven) signaling. That term applies to CMOS transistors; "open collector" is +used for TTL. A pullup or pulldown resistor causes the high or low signal level. +This is sometimes called a "wire-AND"; or more practically, from the negative +logic (low=true) perspective this is a "wire-OR". + +One common example of an open drain signal is a shared active-low IRQ line. +Also, bidirectional data bus signals sometimes use open drain signals. + +Some GPIO controllers directly support open drain and open source outputs; many +don't. When you need open drain signaling but your hardware doesn't directly +support it, there's a common idiom you can use to emulate it with any GPIO pin +that can be used as either an input or an output: + + LOW: gpiod_direction_output(gpio, 0) ... this drives the signal and overrides + the pullup. + + HIGH: gpiod_direction_input(gpio) ... this turns off the output, so the pullup + (or some other device) controls the signal. + +The same logic can be applied to emulate open source signaling, by driving the +high signal and configuring the GPIO as input for low. This open drain/open +source emulation can be handled transparently by the GPIO framework. + +If you are "driving" the signal high but gpiod_get_value(gpio) reports a low +value (after the appropriate rise time passes), you know some other component is +driving the shared signal low. That's not necessarily an error. As one common +example, that's how I2C clocks are stretched: a slave that needs a slower clock +delays the rising edge of SCK, and the I2C master adjusts its signaling rate +accordingly. diff --git a/Documentation/gpio/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/gpio/sysfs.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c2c3a97f8ff7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/gpio/sysfs.txt @@ -0,0 +1,155 @@ +GPIO Sysfs Interface for Userspace +================================== + +Platforms which use the "gpiolib" implementors framework may choose to +configure a sysfs user interface to GPIOs. This is different from the +debugfs interface, since it provides control over GPIO direction and +value instead of just showing a gpio state summary. Plus, it could be +present on production systems without debugging support. + +Given appropriate hardware documentation for the system, userspace could +know for example that GPIO #23 controls the write protect line used to +protect boot loader segments in flash memory. System upgrade procedures +may need to temporarily remove that protection, first importing a GPIO, +then changing its output state, then updating the code before re-enabling +the write protection. In normal use, GPIO #23 would never be touched, +and the kernel would have no need to know about it. + +Again depending on appropriate hardware documentation, on some systems +userspace GPIO can be used to determine system configuration data that +standard kernels won't know about. And for some tasks, simple userspace +GPIO drivers could be all that the system really needs. + +Note that standard kernel drivers exist for common "LEDs and Buttons" +GPIO tasks: "leds-gpio" and "gpio_keys", respectively. Use those +instead of talking directly to the GPIOs; they integrate with kernel +frameworks better than your userspace code could. + + +Paths in Sysfs +-------------- +There are three kinds of entry in /sys/class/gpio: + + - Control interfaces used to get userspace control over GPIOs; + + - GPIOs themselves; and + + - GPIO controllers ("gpio_chip" instances). + +That's in addition to standard files including the "device" symlink. + +The control interfaces are write-only: + + /sys/class/gpio/ + + "export" ... Userspace may ask the kernel to export control of + a GPIO to userspace by writing its number to this file. + + Example: "echo 19 > export" will create a "gpio19" node + for GPIO #19, if that's not requested by kernel code. + + "unexport" ... Reverses the effect of exporting to userspace. + + Example: "echo 19 > unexport" will remove a "gpio19" + node exported using the "export" file. + +GPIO signals have paths like /sys/class/gpio/gpio42/ (for GPIO #42) +and have the following read/write attributes: + + /sys/class/gpio/gpioN/ + + "direction" ... reads as either "in" or "out". This value may + normally be written. Writing as "out" defaults to + initializing the value as low. To ensure glitch free + operation, values "low" and "high" may be written to + configure the GPIO as an output with that initial value. + + Note that this attribute *will not exist* if the kernel + doesn't support changing the direction of a GPIO, or + it was exported by kernel code that didn't explicitly + allow userspace to reconfigure this GPIO's direction. + + "value" ... reads as either 0 (low) or 1 (high). If the GPIO + is configured as an output, this value may be written; + any nonzero value is treated as high. + + If the pin can be configured as interrupt-generating interrupt + and if it has been configured to generate interrupts (see the + description of "edge"), you can poll(2) on that file and + poll(2) will return whenever the interrupt was triggered. If + you use poll(2), set the events POLLPRI and POLLERR. If you + use select(2), set the file descriptor in exceptfds. After + poll(2) returns, either lseek(2) to the beginning of the sysfs + file and read the new value or close the file and re-open it + to read the value. + + "edge" ... reads as either "none", "rising", "falling", or + "both". Write these strings to select the signal edge(s) + that will make poll(2) on the "value" file return. + + This file exists only if the pin can be configured as an + interrupt generating input pin. + + "active_low" ... reads as either 0 (false) or 1 (true). Write + any nonzero value to invert the value attribute both + for reading and writing. Existing and subsequent + poll(2) support configuration via the edge attribute + for "rising" and "falling" edges will follow this + setting. + +GPIO controllers have paths like /sys/class/gpio/gpiochip42/ (for the +controller implementing GPIOs starting at #42) and have the following +read-only attributes: + + /sys/class/gpio/gpiochipN/ + + "base" ... same as N, the first GPIO managed by this chip + + "label" ... provided for diagnostics (not always unique) + + "ngpio" ... how many GPIOs this manges (N to N + ngpio - 1) + +Board documentation should in most cases cover what GPIOs are used for +what purposes. However, those numbers are not always stable; GPIOs on +a daughtercard might be different depending on the base board being used, +or other cards in the stack. In such cases, you may need to use the +gpiochip nodes (possibly in conjunction with schematics) to determine +the correct GPIO number to use for a given signal. + + +Exporting from Kernel code +-------------------------- +Kernel code can explicitly manage exports of GPIOs which have already been +requested using gpio_request(): + + /* export the GPIO to userspace */ + int gpiod_export(struct gpio_desc *desc, bool direction_may_change); + + /* reverse gpio_export() */ + void gpiod_unexport(struct gpio_desc *desc); + + /* create a sysfs link to an exported GPIO node */ + int gpiod_export_link(struct device *dev, const char *name, + struct gpio_desc *desc); + + /* change the polarity of a GPIO node in sysfs */ + int gpiod_sysfs_set_active_low(struct gpio_desc *desc, int value); + +After a kernel driver requests a GPIO, it may only be made available in +the sysfs interface by gpiod_export(). The driver can control whether the +signal direction may change. This helps drivers prevent userspace code +from accidentally clobbering important system state. + +This explicit exporting can help with debugging (by making some kinds +of experiments easier), or can provide an always-there interface that's +suitable for documenting as part of a board support package. + +After the GPIO has been exported, gpiod_export_link() allows creating +symlinks from elsewhere in sysfs to the GPIO sysfs node. Drivers can +use this to provide the interface under their own device in sysfs with +a descriptive name. + +Drivers can use gpiod_sysfs_set_active_low() to hide GPIO line polarity +differences between boards from user space. Polarity change can be done both +before and after gpiod_export(), and previously enabled poll(2) support for +either rising or falling edge will be reconfigured to follow this setting. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 index b466974e142f..ab81013cc390 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 @@ -122,6 +122,12 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'g781' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c, 0x4d Datasheet: Not publicly available from GMT + * Texas Instruments TMP451 + Prefix: 'tmp451' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c + Datasheet: Publicly available at TI website + http://www.ti.com/litv/pdf/sbos686 + Author: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 index d29dea0f3232..7b0dcdb57173 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 +++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 @@ -25,6 +25,7 @@ Supported adapters: * Intel Avoton (SOC) * Intel Wellsburg (PCH) * Intel Coleto Creek (PCH) + * Intel Wildcat Point-LP (PCH) Datasheets: Publicly available at the Intel website On Intel Patsburg and later chipsets, both the normal host SMBus controller diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/fault-codes b/Documentation/i2c/fault-codes index 045765c0b9b5..47c25abb7d52 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/fault-codes +++ b/Documentation/i2c/fault-codes @@ -64,9 +64,6 @@ EINVAL detected before any I/O operation was started. Use a more specific fault code when you can. - One example would be a driver trying an SMBus Block Write - with block size outside the range of 1-32 bytes. - EIO This rather vague error means something went wrong when performing an I/O operation. Use a more specific fault diff --git a/Documentation/input/gamepad.txt b/Documentation/input/gamepad.txt index 8002c894c6b0..31bb6a4029ef 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/gamepad.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/gamepad.txt @@ -122,12 +122,14 @@ D-Pad: BTN_DPAD_* Analog buttons are reported as: ABS_HAT0X and ABS_HAT0Y + (for ABS values negative is left/up, positive is right/down) Analog-Sticks: The left analog-stick is reported as ABS_X, ABS_Y. The right analog stick is reported as ABS_RX, ABS_RY. Zero, one or two sticks may be present. If analog-sticks provide digital buttons, they are mapped accordingly as BTN_THUMBL (first/left) and BTN_THUMBR (second/right). + (for ABS values negative is left/up, positive is right/down) Triggers: Trigger buttons can be available as digital or analog buttons or both. User- @@ -138,6 +140,7 @@ Triggers: ABS_HAT2X (right/ZR) and BTN_TL2 or ABS_HAT2Y (left/ZL). If only one trigger-button combination is present (upper+lower), they are reported as "right" triggers (BTN_TR/ABS_HAT1X). + (ABS trigger values start at 0, pressure is reported as positive values) Menu-Pad: Menu buttons are always digital and are mapped according to their location diff --git a/Documentation/io-mapping.txt b/Documentation/io-mapping.txt index 473e43b2d588..5ca78426f54c 100644 --- a/Documentation/io-mapping.txt +++ b/Documentation/io-mapping.txt @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ maps are more efficient: void io_mapping_unmap_atomic(void *vaddr) - 'vaddr' must be the the value returned by the last + 'vaddr' must be the value returned by the last io_mapping_map_atomic_wc call. This unmaps the specified page and allows the task to sleep once again. diff --git a/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO b/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO index 8148a47fc70e..0091a8215ac1 100644 --- a/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO +++ b/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ linux-api@ver.kernel.org に送ることを勧めます。 この他にパッチを作る方法についてのよくできた記述は- "The Perfect Patch" - http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt + http://www.ozlabs.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt "Linux kernel patch submission format" http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html @@ -622,7 +622,7 @@ Linux カーネルコミュニティは、一度に大量のコードの塊を これについて全てがどのようにあるべきかについての詳細は、以下のドキュメ ントの ChangeLog セクションを見てください- "The Perfect Patch" - http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt + http://www.ozlabs.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt これらのどれもが、時にはとても困難です。これらの慣例を完璧に実施するに は数年かかるかもしれません。これは継続的な改善のプロセスであり、そのた diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt index 8ef6dbb6a462..bbc99c0c1094 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt @@ -20,16 +20,9 @@ symbols have been introduced. To see a list of new config symbols when using "make oldconfig", use cp user/some/old.config .config - yes "" | make oldconfig >conf.new + make listnewconfig -and the config program will list as (NEW) any new symbols that have -unknown values. Of course, the .config file is also updated with -new (default) values, so you can use: - - grep "(NEW)" conf.new - -to see the new config symbols or you can use diffconfig to see the -differences between the previous and new .config files: +and the config program will list any new symbols, one per line. scripts/diffconfig .config.old .config | less diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 9ca3e74a10e1..f085a61a1edd 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -515,7 +515,14 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. cgroup_disable= [KNL] Disable a particular controller Format: {name of the controller(s) to disable} - {Currently supported controllers - "memory"} + The effects of cgroup_disable=foo are: + - foo isn't auto-mounted if you mount all cgroups in + a single hierarchy + - foo isn't visible as an individually mountable + subsystem + {Currently only "memory" controller deal with this and + cut the overhead, others just disable the usage. So + only cgroup_disable=memory is actually worthy} checkreqprot [SELINUX] Set initial checkreqprot flag value. Format: { "0" | "1" } @@ -774,6 +781,15 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. disable= [IPV6] See Documentation/networking/ipv6.txt. + disable_cpu_apicid= [X86,APIC,SMP] + Format: <int> + The number of initial APIC ID for the + corresponding CPU to be disabled at boot, + mostly used for the kdump 2nd kernel to + disable BSP to wake up multiple CPUs without + causing system reset or hang due to sending + INIT from AP to BSP. + disable_ddw [PPC/PSERIES] Disable Dynamic DMA Window support. Use this if to workaround buggy firmware. @@ -881,6 +897,14 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. The xen output can only be used by Xen PV guests. + edac_report= [HW,EDAC] Control how to report EDAC event + Format: {"on" | "off" | "force"} + on: enable EDAC to report H/W event. May be overridden + by other higher priority error reporting module. + off: disable H/W event reporting through EDAC. + force: enforce the use of EDAC to report H/W event. + default: on. + ekgdboc= [X86,KGDB] Allow early kernel console debugging ekgdboc=kbd @@ -890,6 +914,12 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. edd= [EDD] Format: {"off" | "on" | "skip[mbr]"} + efi= [EFI] + Format: { "old_map" } + old_map [X86-64]: switch to the old ioremap-based EFI + runtime services mapping. 32-bit still uses this one by + default. + efi_no_storage_paranoia [EFI; X86] Using this parameter you can use more than 50% of your efi variable storage. Use this parameter only if @@ -1190,15 +1220,24 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. owned by uid=0. ima_hash= [IMA] - Format: { "sha1" | "md5" } + Format: { md5 | sha1 | rmd160 | sha256 | sha384 + | sha512 | ... } default: "sha1" + The list of supported hash algorithms is defined + in crypto/hash_info.h. + ima_tcb [IMA] Load a policy which meets the needs of the Trusted Computing Base. This means IMA will measure all programs exec'd, files mmap'd for exec, and all files opened for read by uid=0. + ima_template= [IMA] + Select one of defined IMA measurements template formats. + Formats: { "ima" | "ima-ng" } + Default: "ima-ng" + init= [KNL] Format: <full_path> Run specified binary instead of /sbin/init as init @@ -1520,6 +1559,8 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. * atapi_dmadir: Enable ATAPI DMADIR bridge support + * disable: Disable this device. + If there are multiple matching configurations changing the same attribute, the last one is used. @@ -1983,6 +2024,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. noapic [SMP,APIC] Tells the kernel to not make use of any IOAPICs that may be present in the system. + nokaslr [X86] + Disable kernel base offset ASLR (Address Space + Layout Randomization) if built into the kernel. + noautogroup Disable scheduler automatic task group creation. nobats [PPC] Do not use BATs for mapping kernel lowmem @@ -2616,7 +2661,6 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. for RCU-preempt, and "s" for RCU-sched, and "N" is the CPU number. This reduces OS jitter on the offloaded CPUs, which can be useful for HPC and - real-time workloads. It can also improve energy efficiency for asymmetric multiprocessors. @@ -2632,8 +2676,8 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. periodically wake up to do the polling. rcutree.blimit= [KNL] - Set maximum number of finished RCU callbacks to process - in one batch. + Set maximum number of finished RCU callbacks to + process in one batch. rcutree.rcu_fanout_leaf= [KNL] Increase the number of CPUs assigned to each @@ -2652,8 +2696,8 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. value is one, and maximum value is HZ. rcutree.qhimark= [KNL] - Set threshold of queued - RCU callbacks over which batch limiting is disabled. + Set threshold of queued RCU callbacks beyond which + batch limiting is disabled. rcutree.qlowmark= [KNL] Set threshold of queued RCU callbacks below which diff --git a/Documentation/kmsg/s390/zcrypt b/Documentation/kmsg/s390/zcrypt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7fb2087409d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/kmsg/s390/zcrypt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +/*? + * Text: "Cryptographic device %x failed and was set offline\n" + * Severity: Error + * Parameter: + * @1: device index + * Description: + * A cryptographic device failed to process a cryptographic request. + * The cryptographic device driver could not correct the error and + * set the device offline. The application that issued the + * request received an indication that the request has failed. + * User action: + * Use the lszcrypt command to confirm that the cryptographic + * hardware is still configured to your LPAR or z/VM guest virtual + * machine. If the device is available to your Linux instance the + * command output contains a line that begins with 'card<device index>', + * where <device index> is the two-digit decimal number in the message text. + * After ensuring that the device is available, use the chzcrypt command to + * set it online again. + * If the error persists, contact your support organization. + */ diff --git a/Documentation/ko_KR/HOWTO b/Documentation/ko_KR/HOWTO index 680e64635958..dc2ff8f611e0 100644 --- a/Documentation/ko_KR/HOWTO +++ b/Documentation/ko_KR/HOWTO @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ mtk.manpages@gmail.com의 메인테이너에게 보낼 것을 권장한다. 올바른 패치들을 만드는 법에 관한 훌륭한 다른 문서들이 있다. "The Perfect Patch" - http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt + http://www.ozlabs.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt "Linux kernel patch submission format" http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ Documentation/DocBook/ 디렉토리 내에서 만들어지며 PDF, Postscript, H 것은 Linux Cross-Reference project이며 그것은 자기 참조 방식이며 소스코드를 인덱스된 웹 페이지들의 형태로 보여준다. 최신의 멋진 커널 코드 저장소는 다음을 통하여 참조할 수 있다. - http://users.sosdg.org/~qiyong/lxr/ + http://lxr.linux.no/+trees 개발 프로세스 @@ -222,20 +222,20 @@ Documentation/DocBook/ 디렉토리 내에서 만들어지며 PDF, Postscript, H 리눅스 커널 개발 프로세스는 현재 몇몇 다른 메인 커널 "브랜치들"과 서브시스템에 특화된 커널 브랜치들로 구성된다. 몇몇 다른 메인 브랜치들은 다음과 같다. - - main 2.6.x 커널 트리 - - 2.6.x.y - 안정된 커널 트리 - - 2.6.x -git 커널 패치들 - - 2.6.x -mm 커널 패치들 + - main 3.x 커널 트리 + - 3.x.y - 안정된 커널 트리 + - 3.x -git 커널 패치들 - 서브시스템을 위한 커널 트리들과 패치들 + - 3.x - 통합 테스트를 위한 next 커널 트리 -2.6.x 커널 트리 +3.x 커널 트리 --------------- -2.6.x 커널들은 Linux Torvalds가 관리하며 kernel.org의 pub/linux/kernel/v2.6/ +3.x 커널들은 Linux Torvalds가 관리하며 kernel.org의 pub/linux/kernel/v3.x/ 디렉토리에서 참조될 수 있다.개발 프로세스는 다음과 같다. - 새로운 커널이 배포되자마자 2주의 시간이 주어진다. 이 기간동은 메인테이너들은 큰 diff들을 Linus에게 제출할 수 있다. 대개 이 패치들은 - 몇 주 동안 -mm 커널내에 이미 있었던 것들이다. 큰 변경들을 제출하는 데 + 몇 주 동안 -next 커널내에 이미 있었던 것들이다. 큰 변경들을 제출하는 데 선호되는 방법은 git(커널의 소스 관리 툴, 더 많은 정보들은 http://git.or.cz/ 에서 참조할 수 있다)를 사용하는 것이지만 순수한 패치파일의 형식으로 보내는 것도 무관하다. @@ -262,20 +262,20 @@ Andrew Morton의 글이 있다. 버그의 상황에 따라 배포되는 것이지 미리정해 놓은 시간에 따라 배포되는 것은 아니기 때문이다." -2.6.x.y - 안정 커널 트리 +3.x.y - 안정 커널 트리 ------------------------ -4 자리 숫자로 이루어진 버젼의 커널들은 -stable 커널들이다. 그것들은 2.6.x +3 자리 숫자로 이루어진 버젼의 커널들은 -stable 커널들이다. 그것들은 3.x 커널에서 발견된 큰 회귀들이나 보안 문제들 중 비교적 작고 중요한 수정들을 포함한다. 이것은 가장 최근의 안정적인 커널을 원하는 사용자에게 추천되는 브랜치이며, 개발/실험적 버젼을 테스트하는 것을 돕고자 하는 사용자들과는 별로 관련이 없다. -어떤 2.6.x.y 커널도 사용할 수 없다면 그때는 가장 높은 숫자의 2.6.x +어떤 3.x.y 커널도 사용할 수 없다면 그때는 가장 높은 숫자의 3.x 커널이 현재의 안정 커널이다. -2.6.x.y는 "stable" 팀<stable@kernel.org>에 의해 관리되며 거의 매번 격주로 +3.x.y는 "stable" 팀<stable@vger.kernel.org>에 의해 관리되며 거의 매번 격주로 배포된다. 커널 트리 문서들 내에 Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt 파일은 어떤 @@ -283,84 +283,46 @@ Andrew Morton의 글이 있다. 진행되는지를 설명한다. -2.6.x -git 패치들 +3.x -git 패치들 ------------------ git 저장소(그러므로 -git이라는 이름이 붙음)에는 날마다 관리되는 Linus의 커널 트리의 snapshot 들이 있다. 이 패치들은 일반적으로 날마다 배포되며 Linus의 트리의 현재 상태를 나타낸다. 이 패치들은 정상적인지 조금도 살펴보지 않고 자동적으로 생성된 것이므로 -rc 커널들 보다도 더 실험적이다. -2.6.x -mm 커널 패치들 ---------------------- -Andrew Morton에 의해 배포된 실험적인 커널 패치들이다. Andrew는 모든 다른 -서브시스템 커널 트리와 패치들을 가져와서 리눅스 커널 메일링 리스트로 -온 많은 패치들과 한데 묶는다. 이 트리는 새로운 기능들과 패치들을 위한 -장소를 제공하는 역할을 한다. 하나의 패치가 -mm에 한동안 있으면서 그 가치가 -증명되게 되면 Andrew나 서브시스템 메인테이너는 그것을 메인라인에 포함시키기 -위하여 Linus에게 보낸다. - -커널 트리에 포함하고 싶은 모든 새로운 패치들은 Linus에게 보내지기 전에 --mm 트리에서 테스트를 하는 것을 적극 추천한다. - -이 커널들은 안정되게 사용할 시스템에서에 실행하는 것은 적합하지 않으며 -다른 브랜치들의 어떤 것들보다 위험하다. - -여러분이 커널 개발 프로세스를 돕길 원한다면 이 커널 배포들을 사용하고 -테스트한 후 어떤 문제를 발견하거나 또는 모든 것이 잘 동작한다면 리눅스 -커널 메일링 리스트로 피드백을 해달라. - -이 커널들은 일반적으로 모든 다른 실험적인 패치들과 배포될 당시의 -사용가능한 메인라인 -git 커널들의 몇몇 변경을 포함한다. - --mm 커널들은 정해진 일정대로 배포되지 않는다. 하지만 대개 몇몇 -mm 커널들은 -각 -rc 커널(1부터 3이 흔함) 사이에서 배포된다. - 서브시스템 커널 트리들과 패치들 ------------------------------- -많은 다른 커널 서브시스템 개발자들은 커널의 다른 부분들에서 무슨 일이 -일어나고 있는지를 볼수 있도록 그들의 개발 트리를 공개한다. 이 트리들은 -위에서 설명하였던 것 처럼 -mm 커널 배포들로 합쳐진다. - -다음은 활용가능한 커널 트리들을 나열한다. - git trees: - - Kbuild development tree, Sam Ravnborg < sam@ravnborg.org> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/sam/kbuild.git - - - ACPI development tree, Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com > - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/lenb/linux-acpi-2.6.git - - - Block development tree, Jens Axboe <jens.axboe@oracle.com> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/axboe/linux-2.6-block.git - - - DRM development tree, Dave Airlie <airlied@linux.ie> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/airlied/drm-2.6.git - - - ia64 development tree, Tony Luck < tony.luck@intel.com> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/aegl/linux-2.6.git - - - infiniband, Roland Dreier <rolandd@cisco.com > - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/roland/infiniband.git - - - libata, Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jgarzik/libata-dev.git - - - network drivers, Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jgarzik/netdev-2.6.git - - - pcmcia, Dominik Brodowski < linux@dominikbrodowski.net> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/brodo/pcmcia-2.6.git - - - SCSI, James Bottomley < James.Bottomley@SteelEye.com> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jejb/scsi-misc-2.6.git - - quilt trees: - - USB, PCI, Driver Core, and I2C, Greg Kroah-Hartman < gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> - kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/gregkh/gregkh-2.6/ - - x86-64, partly i386, Andi Kleen < ak@suse.de> - ftp.firstfloor.org:/pub/ak/x86_64/quilt/ - - 다른 커널 트리들은 http://kernel.org/git와 MAINTAINERS 파일에서 참조할 수 - 있다. +다양한 커널 서브시스템의 메인테이너들 --- 그리고 많은 커널 서브시스템 개발자들 +--- 은 그들의 현재 개발 상태를 소스 저장소로 노출한다. 이를 통해 다른 사람들도 +커널의 다른 영역에 어떤 변화가 이루어지고 있는지 알 수 있다. 급속히 개발이 +진행되는 영역이 있고 그렇지 않은 영역이 있으므로, 개발자는 다른 개발자가 제출한 +수정 사항과 자신의 수정사항의 충돌이나 동일한 일을 동시에 두사람이 따로 +진행하는 사태를 방지하기 위해 급속히 개발이 진행되고 있는 영역에 작업의 +베이스를 맞춰줄 것이 요구된다. + +대부분의 이러한 저장소는 git 트리지만, git이 아닌 SCM으로 관리되거나, quilt +시리즈로 제공되는 패치들도 존재한다. 이러한 서브시스템 저장소들은 MAINTAINERS +파일에 나열되어 있다. 대부분은 http://git.kernel.org 에서 볼 수 있다. + +제안된 패치는 서브시스템 트리에 커밋되기 전에 메일링 리스트를 통해 +리뷰된다(아래의 관련 섹션을 참고하기 바란다). 일부 커널 서브시스템의 경우, 이 +리뷰 프로세스는 patchwork라는 도구를 통해 추적된다. patchwork은 등록된 패치와 +패치에 대한 코멘트, 패치의 버전을 볼 수 있는 웹 인터페이스를 제공하고, +메인테이너는 패치를 리뷰 중, 리뷰 통과, 또는 반려됨으로 표시할 수 있다. +대부분의 이러한 patchwork 사이트는 http://patchwork.kernel.org/ 또는 +http://patchwork.ozlabs.org/ 에 나열되어 있다. + +3.x - 통합 테스트를 위한 next 커널 트리 +----------------------------------------- +서브시스템 트리들의 변경사항들은 mainline 3.x 트리로 들어오기 전에 통합 +테스트를 거쳐야 한다. 이런 목적으로, 모든 서브시스템 트리의 변경사항을 거의 +매일 받아가는 특수한 테스트 저장소가 존재한다: + http://git.kernel.org/?p=linux/kernel/git/sfr/linux-next.git + http://linux.f-seidel.de/linux-next/pmwiki/ + +이런 식으로, -next 커널을 통해 다음 머지 기간에 메인라인 커널에 어떤 변경이 +가해질 것인지 간략히 알 수 있다. 모험심 강한 테스터라면 -next 커널에서 테스트를 +수행하는 것도 좋을 것이다. 버그 보고 --------- @@ -597,7 +559,7 @@ Pat이라는 이름을 가진 여자가 있을 수도 있는 것이다. 리눅 이것이 무엇인지 더 자세한 것을 알고 싶다면 다음 문서의 ChageLog 항을 봐라. "The Perfect Patch" - http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt + http://www.ozlabs.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt diff --git a/Documentation/kobject.txt b/Documentation/kobject.txt index c5182bb2c16c..f87241dfed87 100644 --- a/Documentation/kobject.txt +++ b/Documentation/kobject.txt @@ -342,7 +342,10 @@ kset use: When you are finished with the kset, call: void kset_unregister(struct kset *kset); -to destroy it. +to destroy it. This removes the kset from sysfs and decrements its reference +count. When the reference count goes to zero, the kset will be released. +Because other references to the kset may still exist, the release may happen +after kset_unregister() returns. An example of using a kset can be seen in the samples/kobject/kset-example.c file in the kernel tree. diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/hpfall.c b/Documentation/laptops/hpfall.c index a4a8fc5d05d4..b85dbbac0499 100644 --- a/Documentation/laptops/hpfall.c +++ b/Documentation/laptops/hpfall.c @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ int set_unload_heads_path(char *device) return -EINVAL; strncpy(devname, device + 5, sizeof(devname)); - snprintf(unload_heads_path, sizeof(unload_heads_path), + snprintf(unload_heads_path, sizeof(unload_heads_path) - 1, "/sys/block/%s/device/unload_heads", devname); return 0; } diff --git a/Documentation/md.txt b/Documentation/md.txt index fbb2fcbf16b6..f925666e4342 100644 --- a/Documentation/md.txt +++ b/Documentation/md.txt @@ -533,7 +533,7 @@ also have found. The count in 'mismatch_cnt' is the number of sectors that were re-written, or (for 'check') would have been re-written. As most raid levels work in units of pages rather - than sectors, this my be larger than the number of actual errors + than sectors, this may be larger than the number of actual errors by a factor of the number of sectors in a page. bitmap_set_bits diff --git a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt index c8c42e64e953..102dc19c4119 100644 --- a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt +++ b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt @@ -194,18 +194,22 @@ There are some minimal guarantees that may be expected of a CPU: (*) On any given CPU, dependent memory accesses will be issued in order, with respect to itself. This means that for: - Q = P; D = *Q; + ACCESS_ONCE(Q) = P; smp_read_barrier_depends(); D = ACCESS_ONCE(*Q); the CPU will issue the following memory operations: Q = LOAD P, D = LOAD *Q - and always in that order. + and always in that order. On most systems, smp_read_barrier_depends() + does nothing, but it is required for DEC Alpha. The ACCESS_ONCE() + is required to prevent compiler mischief. Please note that you + should normally use something like rcu_dereference() instead of + open-coding smp_read_barrier_depends(). (*) Overlapping loads and stores within a particular CPU will appear to be ordered within that CPU. This means that for: - a = *X; *X = b; + a = ACCESS_ONCE(*X); ACCESS_ONCE(*X) = b; the CPU will only issue the following sequence of memory operations: @@ -213,7 +217,7 @@ There are some minimal guarantees that may be expected of a CPU: And for: - *X = c; d = *X; + ACCESS_ONCE(*X) = c; d = ACCESS_ONCE(*X); the CPU will only issue: @@ -224,6 +228,12 @@ There are some minimal guarantees that may be expected of a CPU: And there are a number of things that _must_ or _must_not_ be assumed: + (*) It _must_not_ be assumed that the compiler will do what you want with + memory references that are not protected by ACCESS_ONCE(). Without + ACCESS_ONCE(), the compiler is within its rights to do all sorts + of "creative" transformations, which are covered in the Compiler + Barrier section. + (*) It _must_not_ be assumed that independent loads and stores will be issued in the order given. This means that for: @@ -371,33 +381,44 @@ Memory barriers come in four basic varieties: And a couple of implicit varieties: - (5) LOCK operations. + (5) ACQUIRE operations. This acts as a one-way permeable barrier. It guarantees that all memory - operations after the LOCK operation will appear to happen after the LOCK - operation with respect to the other components of the system. + operations after the ACQUIRE operation will appear to happen after the + ACQUIRE operation with respect to the other components of the system. + ACQUIRE operations include LOCK operations and smp_load_acquire() + operations. - Memory operations that occur before a LOCK operation may appear to happen - after it completes. + Memory operations that occur before an ACQUIRE operation may appear to + happen after it completes. - A LOCK operation should almost always be paired with an UNLOCK operation. + An ACQUIRE operation should almost always be paired with a RELEASE + operation. - (6) UNLOCK operations. + (6) RELEASE operations. This also acts as a one-way permeable barrier. It guarantees that all - memory operations before the UNLOCK operation will appear to happen before - the UNLOCK operation with respect to the other components of the system. + memory operations before the RELEASE operation will appear to happen + before the RELEASE operation with respect to the other components of the + system. RELEASE operations include UNLOCK operations and + smp_store_release() operations. - Memory operations that occur after an UNLOCK operation may appear to + Memory operations that occur after a RELEASE operation may appear to happen before it completes. - LOCK and UNLOCK operations are guaranteed to appear with respect to each - other strictly in the order specified. + The use of ACQUIRE and RELEASE operations generally precludes the need + for other sorts of memory barrier (but note the exceptions mentioned in + the subsection "MMIO write barrier"). In addition, a RELEASE+ACQUIRE + pair is -not- guaranteed to act as a full memory barrier. However, after + an ACQUIRE on a given variable, all memory accesses preceding any prior + RELEASE on that same variable are guaranteed to be visible. In other + words, within a given variable's critical section, all accesses of all + previous critical sections for that variable are guaranteed to have + completed. - The use of LOCK and UNLOCK operations generally precludes the need for - other sorts of memory barrier (but note the exceptions mentioned in the - subsection "MMIO write barrier"). + This means that ACQUIRE acts as a minimal "acquire" operation and + RELEASE acts as a minimal "release" operation. Memory barriers are only required where there's a possibility of interaction @@ -450,14 +471,14 @@ The usage requirements of data dependency barriers are a little subtle, and it's not always obvious that they're needed. To illustrate, consider the following sequence of events: - CPU 1 CPU 2 - =============== =============== + CPU 1 CPU 2 + =============== =============== { A == 1, B == 2, C = 3, P == &A, Q == &C } B = 4; <write barrier> - P = &B - Q = P; - D = *Q; + ACCESS_ONCE(P) = &B + Q = ACCESS_ONCE(P); + D = *Q; There's a clear data dependency here, and it would seem that by the end of the sequence, Q must be either &A or &B, and that: @@ -477,15 +498,15 @@ Alpha). To deal with this, a data dependency barrier or better must be inserted between the address load and the data load: - CPU 1 CPU 2 - =============== =============== + CPU 1 CPU 2 + =============== =============== { A == 1, B == 2, C = 3, P == &A, Q == &C } B = 4; <write barrier> - P = &B - Q = P; - <data dependency barrier> - D = *Q; + ACCESS_ONCE(P) = &B + Q = ACCESS_ONCE(P); + <data dependency barrier> + D = *Q; This enforces the occurrence of one of the two implications, and prevents the third possibility from arising. @@ -500,25 +521,26 @@ odd-numbered bank is idle, one can see the new value of the pointer P (&B), but the old value of the variable B (2). -Another example of where data dependency barriers might by required is where a +Another example of where data dependency barriers might be required is where a number is read from memory and then used to calculate the index for an array access: - CPU 1 CPU 2 - =============== =============== + CPU 1 CPU 2 + =============== =============== { M[0] == 1, M[1] == 2, M[3] = 3, P == 0, Q == 3 } M[1] = 4; <write barrier> - P = 1 - Q = P; - <data dependency barrier> - D = M[Q]; + ACCESS_ONCE(P) = 1 + Q = ACCESS_ONCE(P); + <data dependency barrier> + D = M[Q]; -The data dependency barrier is very important to the RCU system, for example. -See rcu_dereference() in include/linux/rcupdate.h. This permits the current -target of an RCU'd pointer to be replaced with a new modified target, without -the replacement target appearing to be incompletely initialised. +The data dependency barrier is very important to the RCU system, +for example. See rcu_assign_pointer() and rcu_dereference() in +include/linux/rcupdate.h. This permits the current target of an RCU'd +pointer to be replaced with a new modified target, without the replacement +target appearing to be incompletely initialised. See also the subsection on "Cache Coherency" for a more thorough example. @@ -530,24 +552,190 @@ A control dependency requires a full read memory barrier, not simply a data dependency barrier to make it work correctly. Consider the following bit of code: - q = &a; - if (p) { - <data dependency barrier> - q = &b; + q = ACCESS_ONCE(a); + if (q) { + <data dependency barrier> /* BUG: No data dependency!!! */ + p = ACCESS_ONCE(b); } - x = *q; This will not have the desired effect because there is no actual data -dependency, but rather a control dependency that the CPU may short-circuit by -attempting to predict the outcome in advance. In such a case what's actually -required is: +dependency, but rather a control dependency that the CPU may short-circuit +by attempting to predict the outcome in advance, so that other CPUs see +the load from b as having happened before the load from a. In such a +case what's actually required is: - q = &a; - if (p) { + q = ACCESS_ONCE(a); + if (q) { <read barrier> - q = &b; + p = ACCESS_ONCE(b); + } + +However, stores are not speculated. This means that ordering -is- provided +in the following example: + + q = ACCESS_ONCE(a); + if (ACCESS_ONCE(q)) { + ACCESS_ONCE(b) = p; + } + +Please note that ACCESS_ONCE() is not optional! Without the ACCESS_ONCE(), +the compiler is within its rights to transform this example: + + q = a; + if (q) { + b = p; /* BUG: Compiler can reorder!!! */ + do_something(); + } else { + b = p; /* BUG: Compiler can reorder!!! */ + do_something_else(); + } + +into this, which of course defeats the ordering: + + b = p; + q = a; + if (q) + do_something(); + else + do_something_else(); + +Worse yet, if the compiler is able to prove (say) that the value of +variable 'a' is always non-zero, it would be well within its rights +to optimize the original example by eliminating the "if" statement +as follows: + + q = a; + b = p; /* BUG: Compiler can reorder!!! */ + do_something(); + +The solution is again ACCESS_ONCE(), which preserves the ordering between +the load from variable 'a' and the store to variable 'b': + + q = ACCESS_ONCE(a); + if (q) { + ACCESS_ONCE(b) = p; + do_something(); + } else { + ACCESS_ONCE(b) = p; + do_something_else(); + } + +You could also use barrier() to prevent the compiler from moving +the stores to variable 'b', but barrier() would not prevent the +compiler from proving to itself that a==1 always, so ACCESS_ONCE() +is also needed. + +It is important to note that control dependencies absolutely require a +a conditional. For example, the following "optimized" version of +the above example breaks ordering: + + q = ACCESS_ONCE(a); + ACCESS_ONCE(b) = p; /* BUG: No ordering vs. load from a!!! */ + if (q) { + /* ACCESS_ONCE(b) = p; -- moved up, BUG!!! */ + do_something(); + } else { + /* ACCESS_ONCE(b) = p; -- moved up, BUG!!! */ + do_something_else(); } - x = *q; + +It is of course legal for the prior load to be part of the conditional, +for example, as follows: + + if (ACCESS_ONCE(a) > 0) { + ACCESS_ONCE(b) = q / 2; + do_something(); + } else { + ACCESS_ONCE(b) = q / 3; + do_something_else(); + } + +This will again ensure that the load from variable 'a' is ordered before the +stores to variable 'b'. + +In addition, you need to be careful what you do with the local variable 'q', +otherwise the compiler might be able to guess the value and again remove +the needed conditional. For example: + + q = ACCESS_ONCE(a); + if (q % MAX) { + ACCESS_ONCE(b) = p; + do_something(); + } else { + ACCESS_ONCE(b) = p; + do_something_else(); + } + +If MAX is defined to be 1, then the compiler knows that (q % MAX) is +equal to zero, in which case the compiler is within its rights to +transform the above code into the following: + + q = ACCESS_ONCE(a); + ACCESS_ONCE(b) = p; + do_something_else(); + +This transformation loses the ordering between the load from variable 'a' +and the store to variable 'b'. If you are relying on this ordering, you +should do something like the following: + + q = ACCESS_ONCE(a); + BUILD_BUG_ON(MAX <= 1); /* Order load from a with store to b. */ + if (q % MAX) { + ACCESS_ONCE(b) = p; + do_something(); + } else { + ACCESS_ONCE(b) = p; + do_something_else(); + } + +Finally, control dependencies do -not- provide transitivity. This is +demonstrated by two related examples: + + CPU 0 CPU 1 + ===================== ===================== + r1 = ACCESS_ONCE(x); r2 = ACCESS_ONCE(y); + if (r1 >= 0) if (r2 >= 0) + ACCESS_ONCE(y) = 1; ACCESS_ONCE(x) = 1; + + assert(!(r1 == 1 && r2 == 1)); + +The above two-CPU example will never trigger the assert(). However, +if control dependencies guaranteed transitivity (which they do not), +then adding the following two CPUs would guarantee a related assertion: + + CPU 2 CPU 3 + ===================== ===================== + ACCESS_ONCE(x) = 2; ACCESS_ONCE(y) = 2; + + assert(!(r1 == 2 && r2 == 2 && x == 1 && y == 1)); /* FAILS!!! */ + +But because control dependencies do -not- provide transitivity, the +above assertion can fail after the combined four-CPU example completes. +If you need the four-CPU example to provide ordering, you will need +smp_mb() between the loads and stores in the CPU 0 and CPU 1 code fragments. + +In summary: + + (*) Control dependencies can order prior loads against later stores. + However, they do -not- guarantee any other sort of ordering: + Not prior loads against later loads, nor prior stores against + later anything. If you need these other forms of ordering, + use smb_rmb(), smp_wmb(), or, in the case of prior stores and + later loads, smp_mb(). + + (*) Control dependencies require at least one run-time conditional + between the prior load and the subsequent store. If the compiler + is able to optimize the conditional away, it will have also + optimized away the ordering. Careful use of ACCESS_ONCE() can + help to preserve the needed conditional. + + (*) Control dependencies require that the compiler avoid reordering the + dependency into nonexistence. Careful use of ACCESS_ONCE() or + barrier() can help to preserve your control dependency. Please + see the Compiler Barrier section for more information. + + (*) Control dependencies do -not- provide transitivity. If you + need transitivity, use smp_mb(). SMP BARRIER PAIRING @@ -561,23 +749,23 @@ barrier, though a general barrier would also be viable. Similarly a read barrier or a data dependency barrier should always be paired with at least an write barrier, though, again, a general barrier is viable: - CPU 1 CPU 2 - =============== =============== - a = 1; + CPU 1 CPU 2 + =============== =============== + ACCESS_ONCE(a) = 1; <write barrier> - b = 2; x = b; - <read barrier> - y = a; + ACCESS_ONCE(b) = 2; x = ACCESS_ONCE(b); + <read barrier> + y = ACCESS_ONCE(a); Or: - CPU 1 CPU 2 - =============== =============================== + CPU 1 CPU 2 + =============== =============================== a = 1; <write barrier> - b = &a; x = b; - <data dependency barrier> - y = *x; + ACCESS_ONCE(b) = &a; x = ACCESS_ONCE(b); + <data dependency barrier> + y = *x; Basically, the read barrier always has to be there, even though it can be of the "weaker" type. @@ -586,13 +774,13 @@ the "weaker" type. match the loads after the read barrier or the data dependency barrier, and vice versa: - CPU 1 CPU 2 - =============== =============== - a = 1; }---- --->{ v = c - b = 2; } \ / { w = d - <write barrier> \ <read barrier> - c = 3; } / \ { x = a; - d = 4; }---- --->{ y = b; + CPU 1 CPU 2 + =================== =================== + ACCESS_ONCE(a) = 1; }---- --->{ v = ACCESS_ONCE(c); + ACCESS_ONCE(b) = 2; } \ / { w = ACCESS_ONCE(d); + <write barrier> \ <read barrier> + ACCESS_ONCE(c) = 3; } / \ { x = ACCESS_ONCE(a); + ACCESS_ONCE(d) = 4; }---- --->{ y = ACCESS_ONCE(b); EXAMPLES OF MEMORY BARRIER SEQUENCES @@ -882,12 +1070,12 @@ cache it for later use. Consider: - CPU 1 CPU 2 + CPU 1 CPU 2 ======================= ======================= - LOAD B - DIVIDE } Divide instructions generally - DIVIDE } take a long time to perform - LOAD A + LOAD B + DIVIDE } Divide instructions generally + DIVIDE } take a long time to perform + LOAD A Which might appear as this: @@ -910,13 +1098,13 @@ Which might appear as this: Placing a read barrier or a data dependency barrier just before the second load: - CPU 1 CPU 2 + CPU 1 CPU 2 ======================= ======================= - LOAD B - DIVIDE - DIVIDE + LOAD B + DIVIDE + DIVIDE <read barrier> - LOAD A + LOAD A will force any value speculatively obtained to be reconsidered to an extent dependent on the type of barrier used. If there was no change made to the @@ -1042,10 +1230,277 @@ compiler from moving the memory accesses either side of it to the other side: barrier(); -This is a general barrier - lesser varieties of compiler barrier do not exist. +This is a general barrier -- there are no read-read or write-write variants +of barrier(). However, ACCESS_ONCE() can be thought of as a weak form +for barrier() that affects only the specific accesses flagged by the +ACCESS_ONCE(). + +The barrier() function has the following effects: + + (*) Prevents the compiler from reordering accesses following the + barrier() to precede any accesses preceding the barrier(). + One example use for this property is to ease communication between + interrupt-handler code and the code that was interrupted. + + (*) Within a loop, forces the compiler to load the variables used + in that loop's conditional on each pass through that loop. + +The ACCESS_ONCE() function can prevent any number of optimizations that, +while perfectly safe in single-threaded code, can be fatal in concurrent +code. Here are some examples of these sorts of optimizations: + + (*) The compiler is within its rights to merge successive loads from + the same variable. Such merging can cause the compiler to "optimize" + the following code: + + while (tmp = a) + do_something_with(tmp); + + into the following code, which, although in some sense legitimate + for single-threaded code, is almost certainly not what the developer + intended: + + if (tmp = a) + for (;;) + do_something_with(tmp); + + Use ACCESS_ONCE() to prevent the compiler from doing this to you: + + while (tmp = ACCESS_ONCE(a)) + do_something_with(tmp); + + (*) The compiler is within its rights to reload a variable, for example, + in cases where high register pressure prevents the compiler from + keeping all data of interest in registers. The compiler might + therefore optimize the variable 'tmp' out of our previous example: + + while (tmp = a) + do_something_with(tmp); + + This could result in the following code, which is perfectly safe in + single-threaded code, but can be fatal in concurrent code: + + while (a) + do_something_with(a); + + For example, the optimized version of this code could result in + passing a zero to do_something_with() in the case where the variable + a was modified by some other CPU between the "while" statement and + the call to do_something_with(). + + Again, use ACCESS_ONCE() to prevent the compiler from doing this: + + while (tmp = ACCESS_ONCE(a)) + do_something_with(tmp); + + Note that if the compiler runs short of registers, it might save + tmp onto the stack. The overhead of this saving and later restoring + is why compilers reload variables. Doing so is perfectly safe for + single-threaded code, so you need to tell the compiler about cases + where it is not safe. + + (*) The compiler is within its rights to omit a load entirely if it knows + what the value will be. For example, if the compiler can prove that + the value of variable 'a' is always zero, it can optimize this code: + + while (tmp = a) + do_something_with(tmp); -The compiler barrier has no direct effect on the CPU, which may then reorder -things however it wishes. + Into this: + + do { } while (0); + + This transformation is a win for single-threaded code because it gets + rid of a load and a branch. The problem is that the compiler will + carry out its proof assuming that the current CPU is the only one + updating variable 'a'. If variable 'a' is shared, then the compiler's + proof will be erroneous. Use ACCESS_ONCE() to tell the compiler + that it doesn't know as much as it thinks it does: + + while (tmp = ACCESS_ONCE(a)) + do_something_with(tmp); + + But please note that the compiler is also closely watching what you + do with the value after the ACCESS_ONCE(). For example, suppose you + do the following and MAX is a preprocessor macro with the value 1: + + while ((tmp = ACCESS_ONCE(a)) % MAX) + do_something_with(tmp); + + Then the compiler knows that the result of the "%" operator applied + to MAX will always be zero, again allowing the compiler to optimize + the code into near-nonexistence. (It will still load from the + variable 'a'.) + + (*) Similarly, the compiler is within its rights to omit a store entirely + if it knows that the variable already has the value being stored. + Again, the compiler assumes that the current CPU is the only one + storing into the variable, which can cause the compiler to do the + wrong thing for shared variables. For example, suppose you have + the following: + + a = 0; + /* Code that does not store to variable a. */ + a = 0; + + The compiler sees that the value of variable 'a' is already zero, so + it might well omit the second store. This would come as a fatal + surprise if some other CPU might have stored to variable 'a' in the + meantime. + + Use ACCESS_ONCE() to prevent the compiler from making this sort of + wrong guess: + + ACCESS_ONCE(a) = 0; + /* Code that does not store to variable a. */ + ACCESS_ONCE(a) = 0; + + (*) The compiler is within its rights to reorder memory accesses unless + you tell it not to. For example, consider the following interaction + between process-level code and an interrupt handler: + + void process_level(void) + { + msg = get_message(); + flag = true; + } + + void interrupt_handler(void) + { + if (flag) + process_message(msg); + } + + There is nothing to prevent the the compiler from transforming + process_level() to the following, in fact, this might well be a + win for single-threaded code: + + void process_level(void) + { + flag = true; + msg = get_message(); + } + + If the interrupt occurs between these two statement, then + interrupt_handler() might be passed a garbled msg. Use ACCESS_ONCE() + to prevent this as follows: + + void process_level(void) + { + ACCESS_ONCE(msg) = get_message(); + ACCESS_ONCE(flag) = true; + } + + void interrupt_handler(void) + { + if (ACCESS_ONCE(flag)) + process_message(ACCESS_ONCE(msg)); + } + + Note that the ACCESS_ONCE() wrappers in interrupt_handler() + are needed if this interrupt handler can itself be interrupted + by something that also accesses 'flag' and 'msg', for example, + a nested interrupt or an NMI. Otherwise, ACCESS_ONCE() is not + needed in interrupt_handler() other than for documentation purposes. + (Note also that nested interrupts do not typically occur in modern + Linux kernels, in fact, if an interrupt handler returns with + interrupts enabled, you will get a WARN_ONCE() splat.) + + You should assume that the compiler can move ACCESS_ONCE() past + code not containing ACCESS_ONCE(), barrier(), or similar primitives. + + This effect could also be achieved using barrier(), but ACCESS_ONCE() + is more selective: With ACCESS_ONCE(), the compiler need only forget + the contents of the indicated memory locations, while with barrier() + the compiler must discard the value of all memory locations that + it has currented cached in any machine registers. Of course, + the compiler must also respect the order in which the ACCESS_ONCE()s + occur, though the CPU of course need not do so. + + (*) The compiler is within its rights to invent stores to a variable, + as in the following example: + + if (a) + b = a; + else + b = 42; + + The compiler might save a branch by optimizing this as follows: + + b = 42; + if (a) + b = a; + + In single-threaded code, this is not only safe, but also saves + a branch. Unfortunately, in concurrent code, this optimization + could cause some other CPU to see a spurious value of 42 -- even + if variable 'a' was never zero -- when loading variable 'b'. + Use ACCESS_ONCE() to prevent this as follows: + + if (a) + ACCESS_ONCE(b) = a; + else + ACCESS_ONCE(b) = 42; + + The compiler can also invent loads. These are usually less + damaging, but they can result in cache-line bouncing and thus in + poor performance and scalability. Use ACCESS_ONCE() to prevent + invented loads. + + (*) For aligned memory locations whose size allows them to be accessed + with a single memory-reference instruction, prevents "load tearing" + and "store tearing," in which a single large access is replaced by + multiple smaller accesses. For example, given an architecture having + 16-bit store instructions with 7-bit immediate fields, the compiler + might be tempted to use two 16-bit store-immediate instructions to + implement the following 32-bit store: + + p = 0x00010002; + + Please note that GCC really does use this sort of optimization, + which is not surprising given that it would likely take more + than two instructions to build the constant and then store it. + This optimization can therefore be a win in single-threaded code. + In fact, a recent bug (since fixed) caused GCC to incorrectly use + this optimization in a volatile store. In the absence of such bugs, + use of ACCESS_ONCE() prevents store tearing in the following example: + + ACCESS_ONCE(p) = 0x00010002; + + Use of packed structures can also result in load and store tearing, + as in this example: + + struct __attribute__((__packed__)) foo { + short a; + int b; + short c; + }; + struct foo foo1, foo2; + ... + + foo2.a = foo1.a; + foo2.b = foo1.b; + foo2.c = foo1.c; + + Because there are no ACCESS_ONCE() wrappers and no volatile markings, + the compiler would be well within its rights to implement these three + assignment statements as a pair of 32-bit loads followed by a pair + of 32-bit stores. This would result in load tearing on 'foo1.b' + and store tearing on 'foo2.b'. ACCESS_ONCE() again prevents tearing + in this example: + + foo2.a = foo1.a; + ACCESS_ONCE(foo2.b) = ACCESS_ONCE(foo1.b); + foo2.c = foo1.c; + +All that aside, it is never necessary to use ACCESS_ONCE() on a variable +that has been marked volatile. For example, because 'jiffies' is marked +volatile, it is never necessary to say ACCESS_ONCE(jiffies). The reason +for this is that ACCESS_ONCE() is implemented as a volatile cast, which +has no effect when its argument is already marked volatile. + +Please note that these compiler barriers have no direct effect on the CPU, +which may then reorder things however it wishes. CPU MEMORY BARRIERS @@ -1135,7 +1590,7 @@ There are some more advanced barrier functions: clear_bit( ... ); This prevents memory operations before the clear leaking to after it. See - the subsection on "Locking Functions" with reference to UNLOCK operation + the subsection on "Locking Functions" with reference to RELEASE operation implications. See Documentation/atomic_ops.txt for more information. See the "Atomic @@ -1169,8 +1624,8 @@ provide more substantial guarantees, but these may not be relied upon outside of arch specific code. -LOCKING FUNCTIONS ------------------ +ACQUIRING FUNCTIONS +------------------- The Linux kernel has a number of locking constructs: @@ -1181,65 +1636,107 @@ The Linux kernel has a number of locking constructs: (*) R/W semaphores (*) RCU -In all cases there are variants on "LOCK" operations and "UNLOCK" operations +In all cases there are variants on "ACQUIRE" operations and "RELEASE" operations for each construct. These operations all imply certain barriers: - (1) LOCK operation implication: + (1) ACQUIRE operation implication: - Memory operations issued after the LOCK will be completed after the LOCK - operation has completed. + Memory operations issued after the ACQUIRE will be completed after the + ACQUIRE operation has completed. - Memory operations issued before the LOCK may be completed after the LOCK - operation has completed. + Memory operations issued before the ACQUIRE may be completed after the + ACQUIRE operation has completed. An smp_mb__before_spinlock(), combined + with a following ACQUIRE, orders prior loads against subsequent stores and + stores and prior stores against subsequent stores. Note that this is + weaker than smp_mb()! The smp_mb__before_spinlock() primitive is free on + many architectures. - (2) UNLOCK operation implication: + (2) RELEASE operation implication: - Memory operations issued before the UNLOCK will be completed before the - UNLOCK operation has completed. + Memory operations issued before the RELEASE will be completed before the + RELEASE operation has completed. - Memory operations issued after the UNLOCK may be completed before the - UNLOCK operation has completed. + Memory operations issued after the RELEASE may be completed before the + RELEASE operation has completed. - (3) LOCK vs LOCK implication: + (3) ACQUIRE vs ACQUIRE implication: - All LOCK operations issued before another LOCK operation will be completed - before that LOCK operation. + All ACQUIRE operations issued before another ACQUIRE operation will be + completed before that ACQUIRE operation. - (4) LOCK vs UNLOCK implication: + (4) ACQUIRE vs RELEASE implication: - All LOCK operations issued before an UNLOCK operation will be completed - before the UNLOCK operation. + All ACQUIRE operations issued before a RELEASE operation will be + completed before the RELEASE operation. - All UNLOCK operations issued before a LOCK operation will be completed - before the LOCK operation. + (5) Failed conditional ACQUIRE implication: - (5) Failed conditional LOCK implication: - - Certain variants of the LOCK operation may fail, either due to being - unable to get the lock immediately, or due to receiving an unblocked + Certain locking variants of the ACQUIRE operation may fail, either due to + being unable to get the lock immediately, or due to receiving an unblocked signal whilst asleep waiting for the lock to become available. Failed locks do not imply any sort of barrier. -Therefore, from (1), (2) and (4) an UNLOCK followed by an unconditional LOCK is -equivalent to a full barrier, but a LOCK followed by an UNLOCK is not. - -[!] Note: one of the consequences of LOCKs and UNLOCKs being only one-way - barriers is that the effects of instructions outside of a critical section - may seep into the inside of the critical section. +[!] Note: one of the consequences of lock ACQUIREs and RELEASEs being only +one-way barriers is that the effects of instructions outside of a critical +section may seep into the inside of the critical section. -A LOCK followed by an UNLOCK may not be assumed to be full memory barrier -because it is possible for an access preceding the LOCK to happen after the -LOCK, and an access following the UNLOCK to happen before the UNLOCK, and the -two accesses can themselves then cross: +An ACQUIRE followed by a RELEASE may not be assumed to be full memory barrier +because it is possible for an access preceding the ACQUIRE to happen after the +ACQUIRE, and an access following the RELEASE to happen before the RELEASE, and +the two accesses can themselves then cross: *A = a; - LOCK - UNLOCK + ACQUIRE M + RELEASE M *B = b; may occur as: - LOCK, STORE *B, STORE *A, UNLOCK + ACQUIRE M, STORE *B, STORE *A, RELEASE M + +This same reordering can of course occur if the lock's ACQUIRE and RELEASE are +to the same lock variable, but only from the perspective of another CPU not +holding that lock. + +In short, a RELEASE followed by an ACQUIRE may -not- be assumed to be a full +memory barrier because it is possible for a preceding RELEASE to pass a +later ACQUIRE from the viewpoint of the CPU, but not from the viewpoint +of the compiler. Note that deadlocks cannot be introduced by this +interchange because if such a deadlock threatened, the RELEASE would +simply complete. + +If it is necessary for a RELEASE-ACQUIRE pair to produce a full barrier, the +ACQUIRE can be followed by an smp_mb__after_unlock_lock() invocation. This +will produce a full barrier if either (a) the RELEASE and the ACQUIRE are +executed by the same CPU or task, or (b) the RELEASE and ACQUIRE act on the +same variable. The smp_mb__after_unlock_lock() primitive is free on many +architectures. Without smp_mb__after_unlock_lock(), the critical sections +corresponding to the RELEASE and the ACQUIRE can cross: + + *A = a; + RELEASE M + ACQUIRE N + *B = b; + +could occur as: + + ACQUIRE N, STORE *B, STORE *A, RELEASE M + +With smp_mb__after_unlock_lock(), they cannot, so that: + + *A = a; + RELEASE M + ACQUIRE N + smp_mb__after_unlock_lock(); + *B = b; + +will always occur as either of the following: + + STORE *A, RELEASE, ACQUIRE, STORE *B + STORE *A, ACQUIRE, RELEASE, STORE *B + +If the RELEASE and ACQUIRE were instead both operating on the same lock +variable, only the first of these two alternatives can occur. Locks and semaphores may not provide any guarantee of ordering on UP compiled systems, and so cannot be counted on in such a situation to actually achieve @@ -1253,33 +1750,33 @@ As an example, consider the following: *A = a; *B = b; - LOCK + ACQUIRE *C = c; *D = d; - UNLOCK + RELEASE *E = e; *F = f; The following sequence of events is acceptable: - LOCK, {*F,*A}, *E, {*C,*D}, *B, UNLOCK + ACQUIRE, {*F,*A}, *E, {*C,*D}, *B, RELEASE [+] Note that {*F,*A} indicates a combined access. But none of the following are: - {*F,*A}, *B, LOCK, *C, *D, UNLOCK, *E - *A, *B, *C, LOCK, *D, UNLOCK, *E, *F - *A, *B, LOCK, *C, UNLOCK, *D, *E, *F - *B, LOCK, *C, *D, UNLOCK, {*F,*A}, *E + {*F,*A}, *B, ACQUIRE, *C, *D, RELEASE, *E + *A, *B, *C, ACQUIRE, *D, RELEASE, *E, *F + *A, *B, ACQUIRE, *C, RELEASE, *D, *E, *F + *B, ACQUIRE, *C, *D, RELEASE, {*F,*A}, *E INTERRUPT DISABLING FUNCTIONS ----------------------------- -Functions that disable interrupts (LOCK equivalent) and enable interrupts -(UNLOCK equivalent) will act as compiler barriers only. So if memory or I/O +Functions that disable interrupts (ACQUIRE equivalent) and enable interrupts +(RELEASE equivalent) will act as compiler barriers only. So if memory or I/O barriers are required in such a situation, they must be provided from some other means. @@ -1418,75 +1915,81 @@ Other functions that imply barriers: (*) schedule() and similar imply full memory barriers. -================================= -INTER-CPU LOCKING BARRIER EFFECTS -================================= +=================================== +INTER-CPU ACQUIRING BARRIER EFFECTS +=================================== On SMP systems locking primitives give a more substantial form of barrier: one that does affect memory access ordering on other CPUs, within the context of conflict on any particular lock. -LOCKS VS MEMORY ACCESSES ------------------------- +ACQUIRES VS MEMORY ACCESSES +--------------------------- Consider the following: the system has a pair of spinlocks (M) and (Q), and three CPUs; then should the following sequence of events occur: CPU 1 CPU 2 =============================== =============================== - *A = a; *E = e; - LOCK M LOCK Q - *B = b; *F = f; - *C = c; *G = g; - UNLOCK M UNLOCK Q - *D = d; *H = h; + ACCESS_ONCE(*A) = a; ACCESS_ONCE(*E) = e; + ACQUIRE M ACQUIRE Q + ACCESS_ONCE(*B) = b; ACCESS_ONCE(*F) = f; + ACCESS_ONCE(*C) = c; ACCESS_ONCE(*G) = g; + RELEASE M RELEASE Q + ACCESS_ONCE(*D) = d; ACCESS_ONCE(*H) = h; Then there is no guarantee as to what order CPU 3 will see the accesses to *A through *H occur in, other than the constraints imposed by the separate locks on the separate CPUs. It might, for example, see: - *E, LOCK M, LOCK Q, *G, *C, *F, *A, *B, UNLOCK Q, *D, *H, UNLOCK M + *E, ACQUIRE M, ACQUIRE Q, *G, *C, *F, *A, *B, RELEASE Q, *D, *H, RELEASE M But it won't see any of: - *B, *C or *D preceding LOCK M - *A, *B or *C following UNLOCK M - *F, *G or *H preceding LOCK Q - *E, *F or *G following UNLOCK Q + *B, *C or *D preceding ACQUIRE M + *A, *B or *C following RELEASE M + *F, *G or *H preceding ACQUIRE Q + *E, *F or *G following RELEASE Q However, if the following occurs: CPU 1 CPU 2 =============================== =============================== - *A = a; - LOCK M [1] - *B = b; - *C = c; - UNLOCK M [1] - *D = d; *E = e; - LOCK M [2] - *F = f; - *G = g; - UNLOCK M [2] - *H = h; + ACCESS_ONCE(*A) = a; + ACQUIRE M [1] + ACCESS_ONCE(*B) = b; + ACCESS_ONCE(*C) = c; + RELEASE M [1] + ACCESS_ONCE(*D) = d; ACCESS_ONCE(*E) = e; + ACQUIRE M [2] + smp_mb__after_unlock_lock(); + ACCESS_ONCE(*F) = f; + ACCESS_ONCE(*G) = g; + RELEASE M [2] + ACCESS_ONCE(*H) = h; CPU 3 might see: - *E, LOCK M [1], *C, *B, *A, UNLOCK M [1], - LOCK M [2], *H, *F, *G, UNLOCK M [2], *D + *E, ACQUIRE M [1], *C, *B, *A, RELEASE M [1], + ACQUIRE M [2], *H, *F, *G, RELEASE M [2], *D But assuming CPU 1 gets the lock first, CPU 3 won't see any of: - *B, *C, *D, *F, *G or *H preceding LOCK M [1] - *A, *B or *C following UNLOCK M [1] - *F, *G or *H preceding LOCK M [2] - *A, *B, *C, *E, *F or *G following UNLOCK M [2] + *B, *C, *D, *F, *G or *H preceding ACQUIRE M [1] + *A, *B or *C following RELEASE M [1] + *F, *G or *H preceding ACQUIRE M [2] + *A, *B, *C, *E, *F or *G following RELEASE M [2] +Note that the smp_mb__after_unlock_lock() is critically important +here: Without it CPU 3 might see some of the above orderings. +Without smp_mb__after_unlock_lock(), the accesses are not guaranteed +to be seen in order unless CPU 3 holds lock M. -LOCKS VS I/O ACCESSES ---------------------- + +ACQUIRES VS I/O ACCESSES +------------------------ Under certain circumstances (especially involving NUMA), I/O accesses within two spinlocked sections on two different CPUs may be seen as interleaved by the @@ -1687,28 +2190,30 @@ explicit lock operations, described later). These include: xchg(); cmpxchg(); - atomic_xchg(); - atomic_cmpxchg(); - atomic_inc_return(); - atomic_dec_return(); - atomic_add_return(); - atomic_sub_return(); - atomic_inc_and_test(); - atomic_dec_and_test(); - atomic_sub_and_test(); - atomic_add_negative(); - atomic_add_unless(); /* when succeeds (returns 1) */ + atomic_xchg(); atomic_long_xchg(); + atomic_cmpxchg(); atomic_long_cmpxchg(); + atomic_inc_return(); atomic_long_inc_return(); + atomic_dec_return(); atomic_long_dec_return(); + atomic_add_return(); atomic_long_add_return(); + atomic_sub_return(); atomic_long_sub_return(); + atomic_inc_and_test(); atomic_long_inc_and_test(); + atomic_dec_and_test(); atomic_long_dec_and_test(); + atomic_sub_and_test(); atomic_long_sub_and_test(); + atomic_add_negative(); atomic_long_add_negative(); test_and_set_bit(); test_and_clear_bit(); test_and_change_bit(); -These are used for such things as implementing LOCK-class and UNLOCK-class + /* when succeeds (returns 1) */ + atomic_add_unless(); atomic_long_add_unless(); + +These are used for such things as implementing ACQUIRE-class and RELEASE-class operations and adjusting reference counters towards object destruction, and as such the implicit memory barrier effects are necessary. The following operations are potential problems as they do _not_ imply memory -barriers, but might be used for implementing such things as UNLOCK-class +barriers, but might be used for implementing such things as RELEASE-class operations: atomic_set(); @@ -1750,7 +2255,7 @@ The following operations are special locking primitives: clear_bit_unlock(); __clear_bit_unlock(); -These implement LOCK-class and UNLOCK-class operations. These should be used in +These implement ACQUIRE-class and RELEASE-class operations. These should be used in preference to other operations when implementing locking primitives, because their implementations can be optimised on many architectures. @@ -1887,8 +2392,8 @@ functions: space should suffice for PCI. [*] NOTE! attempting to load from the same location as was written to may - cause a malfunction - consider the 16550 Rx/Tx serial registers for - example. + cause a malfunction - consider the 16550 Rx/Tx serial registers for + example. Used with prefetchable I/O memory, an mmiowb() barrier may be required to force stores to be ordered. @@ -1955,19 +2460,19 @@ barriers for the most part act at the interface between the CPU and its cache : +--------+ +--------+ : +--------+ +-----------+ | | | | : | | | | +--------+ - | CPU | | Memory | : | CPU | | | | | - | Core |--->| Access |----->| Cache |<-->| | | | + | CPU | | Memory | : | CPU | | | | | + | Core |--->| Access |----->| Cache |<-->| | | | | | | Queue | : | | | |--->| Memory | - | | | | : | | | | | | - +--------+ +--------+ : +--------+ | | | | + | | | | : | | | | | | + +--------+ +--------+ : +--------+ | | | | : | Cache | +--------+ : | Coherency | : | Mechanism | +--------+ +--------+ +--------+ : +--------+ | | | | | | | | : | | | | | | | CPU | | Memory | : | CPU | | |--->| Device | - | Core |--->| Access |----->| Cache |<-->| | | | - | | | Queue | : | | | | | | + | Core |--->| Access |----->| Cache |<-->| | | | + | | | Queue | : | | | | | | | | | | : | | | | +--------+ +--------+ +--------+ : +--------+ +-----------+ : @@ -2090,7 +2595,7 @@ CPU's caches by some other cache event: p = &v; q = p; <D:request p> <B:modify p=&v> <D:commit p=&v> - <D:read p> + <D:read p> x = *q; <C:read *q> Reads from v before v updated in cache <C:unbusy> @@ -2115,7 +2620,7 @@ queue before processing any further requests: p = &v; q = p; <D:request p> <B:modify p=&v> <D:commit p=&v> - <D:read p> + <D:read p> smp_read_barrier_depends() <C:unbusy> <C:commit v=2> @@ -2177,11 +2682,11 @@ A programmer might take it for granted that the CPU will perform memory operations in exactly the order specified, so that if the CPU is, for example, given the following piece of code to execute: - a = *A; - *B = b; - c = *C; - d = *D; - *E = e; + a = ACCESS_ONCE(*A); + ACCESS_ONCE(*B) = b; + c = ACCESS_ONCE(*C); + d = ACCESS_ONCE(*D); + ACCESS_ONCE(*E) = e; they would then expect that the CPU will complete the memory operation for each instruction before moving on to the next one, leading to a definite sequence of @@ -2228,12 +2733,12 @@ However, it is guaranteed that a CPU will be self-consistent: it will see its _own_ accesses appear to be correctly ordered, without the need for a memory barrier. For instance with the following code: - U = *A; - *A = V; - *A = W; - X = *A; - *A = Y; - Z = *A; + U = ACCESS_ONCE(*A); + ACCESS_ONCE(*A) = V; + ACCESS_ONCE(*A) = W; + X = ACCESS_ONCE(*A); + ACCESS_ONCE(*A) = Y; + Z = ACCESS_ONCE(*A); and assuming no intervention by an external influence, it can be assumed that the final result will appear to be: @@ -2250,7 +2755,12 @@ accesses: in that order, but, without intervention, the sequence may have almost any combination of elements combined or discarded, provided the program's view of -the world remains consistent. +the world remains consistent. Note that ACCESS_ONCE() is -not- optional +in the above example, as there are architectures where a given CPU might +interchange successive loads to the same location. On such architectures, +ACCESS_ONCE() does whatever is necessary to prevent this, for example, on +Itanium the volatile casts used by ACCESS_ONCE() cause GCC to emit the +special ld.acq and st.rel instructions that prevent such reordering. The compiler may also combine, discard or defer elements of the sequence before the CPU even sees them. @@ -2264,13 +2774,13 @@ may be reduced to: *A = W; -since, without a write barrier, it can be assumed that the effect of the -storage of V to *A is lost. Similarly: +since, without either a write barrier or an ACCESS_ONCE(), it can be +assumed that the effect of the storage of V to *A is lost. Similarly: *A = Y; Z = *A; -may, without a memory barrier, be reduced to: +may, without a memory barrier or an ACCESS_ONCE(), be reduced to: *A = Y; Z = Y; diff --git a/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpssd.c b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpssd.c index 0c980ad40b17..4d17487d5ad9 100644 --- a/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpssd.c +++ b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpssd.c @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ static struct mic_device_desc *get_device_desc(struct mic_info *mic, int type) int i; void *dp = get_dp(mic, type); - for (i = mic_aligned_size(struct mic_bootparam); i < PAGE_SIZE; + for (i = sizeof(struct mic_bootparam); i < PAGE_SIZE; i += mic_total_desc_size(d)) { d = dp + i; @@ -445,8 +445,8 @@ init_vr(struct mic_info *mic, int fd, int type, __func__, mic->name, vr0->va, vr0->info, vr_size, vring_size(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, MIC_VIRTIO_RING_ALIGN)); mpsslog("magic 0x%x expected 0x%x\n", - vr0->info->magic, MIC_MAGIC + type); - assert(vr0->info->magic == MIC_MAGIC + type); + le32toh(vr0->info->magic), MIC_MAGIC + type); + assert(le32toh(vr0->info->magic) == MIC_MAGIC + type); if (vr1) { vr1->va = (struct mic_vring *) &va[MIC_DEVICE_PAGE_END + vr_size]; @@ -458,8 +458,8 @@ init_vr(struct mic_info *mic, int fd, int type, __func__, mic->name, vr1->va, vr1->info, vr_size, vring_size(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, MIC_VIRTIO_RING_ALIGN)); mpsslog("magic 0x%x expected 0x%x\n", - vr1->info->magic, MIC_MAGIC + type + 1); - assert(vr1->info->magic == MIC_MAGIC + type + 1); + le32toh(vr1->info->magic), MIC_MAGIC + type + 1); + assert(le32toh(vr1->info->magic) == MIC_MAGIC + type + 1); } done: return va; @@ -520,7 +520,7 @@ static void * virtio_net(void *arg) { static __u8 vnet_hdr[2][sizeof(struct virtio_net_hdr)]; - static __u8 vnet_buf[2][MAX_NET_PKT_SIZE] __aligned(64); + static __u8 vnet_buf[2][MAX_NET_PKT_SIZE] __attribute__ ((aligned(64))); struct iovec vnet_iov[2][2] = { { { .iov_base = vnet_hdr[0], .iov_len = sizeof(vnet_hdr[0]) }, { .iov_base = vnet_buf[0], .iov_len = sizeof(vnet_buf[0]) } }, @@ -1412,6 +1412,12 @@ mic_config(void *arg) } do { + ret = lseek(fd, 0, SEEK_SET); + if (ret < 0) { + mpsslog("%s: Failed to seek to file start '%s': %s\n", + mic->name, pathname, strerror(errno)); + goto close_error1; + } ret = read(fd, value, sizeof(value)); if (ret < 0) { mpsslog("%s: Failed to read sysfs entry '%s': %s\n", diff --git a/Documentation/misc-devices/mei/mei-amt-version.c b/Documentation/misc-devices/mei/mei-amt-version.c index 49e4f770864a..57d0d871dcf7 100644 --- a/Documentation/misc-devices/mei/mei-amt-version.c +++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/mei/mei-amt-version.c @@ -115,8 +115,6 @@ static bool mei_init(struct mei *me, const uuid_le *guid, struct mei_client *cl; struct mei_connect_client_data data; - mei_deinit(me); - me->verbose = verbose; me->fd = open("/dev/mei", O_RDWR); diff --git a/Documentation/module-signing.txt b/Documentation/module-signing.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2b40e04d3c49 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/module-signing.txt @@ -0,0 +1,240 @@ + ============================== + KERNEL MODULE SIGNING FACILITY + ============================== + +CONTENTS + + - Overview. + - Configuring module signing. + - Generating signing keys. + - Public keys in the kernel. + - Manually signing modules. + - Signed modules and stripping. + - Loading signed modules. + - Non-valid signatures and unsigned modules. + - Administering/protecting the private key. + + +======== +OVERVIEW +======== + +The kernel module signing facility cryptographically signs modules during +installation and then checks the signature upon loading the module. This +allows increased kernel security by disallowing the loading of unsigned modules +or modules signed with an invalid key. Module signing increases security by +making it harder to load a malicious module into the kernel. The module +signature checking is done by the kernel so that it is not necessary to have +trusted userspace bits. + +This facility uses X.509 ITU-T standard certificates to encode the public keys +involved. The signatures are not themselves encoded in any industrial standard +type. The facility currently only supports the RSA public key encryption +standard (though it is pluggable and permits others to be used). The possible +hash algorithms that can be used are SHA-1, SHA-224, SHA-256, SHA-384, and +SHA-512 (the algorithm is selected by data in the signature). + + +========================== +CONFIGURING MODULE SIGNING +========================== + +The module signing facility is enabled by going to the "Enable Loadable Module +Support" section of the kernel configuration and turning on + + CONFIG_MODULE_SIG "Module signature verification" + +This has a number of options available: + + (1) "Require modules to be validly signed" (CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_FORCE) + + This specifies how the kernel should deal with a module that has a + signature for which the key is not known or a module that is unsigned. + + If this is off (ie. "permissive"), then modules for which the key is not + available and modules that are unsigned are permitted, but the kernel will + be marked as being tainted. + + If this is on (ie. "restrictive"), only modules that have a valid + signature that can be verified by a public key in the kernel's possession + will be loaded. All other modules will generate an error. + + Irrespective of the setting here, if the module has a signature block that + cannot be parsed, it will be rejected out of hand. + + + (2) "Automatically sign all modules" (CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_ALL) + + If this is on then modules will be automatically signed during the + modules_install phase of a build. If this is off, then the modules must + be signed manually using: + + scripts/sign-file + + + (3) "Which hash algorithm should modules be signed with?" + + This presents a choice of which hash algorithm the installation phase will + sign the modules with: + + CONFIG_SIG_SHA1 "Sign modules with SHA-1" + CONFIG_SIG_SHA224 "Sign modules with SHA-224" + CONFIG_SIG_SHA256 "Sign modules with SHA-256" + CONFIG_SIG_SHA384 "Sign modules with SHA-384" + CONFIG_SIG_SHA512 "Sign modules with SHA-512" + + The algorithm selected here will also be built into the kernel (rather + than being a module) so that modules signed with that algorithm can have + their signatures checked without causing a dependency loop. + + +======================= +GENERATING SIGNING KEYS +======================= + +Cryptographic keypairs are required to generate and check signatures. A +private key is used to generate a signature and the corresponding public key is +used to check it. The private key is only needed during the build, after which +it can be deleted or stored securely. The public key gets built into the +kernel so that it can be used to check the signatures as the modules are +loaded. + +Under normal conditions, the kernel build will automatically generate a new +keypair using openssl if one does not exist in the files: + + signing_key.priv + signing_key.x509 + +during the building of vmlinux (the public part of the key needs to be built +into vmlinux) using parameters in the: + + x509.genkey + +file (which is also generated if it does not already exist). + +It is strongly recommended that you provide your own x509.genkey file. + +Most notably, in the x509.genkey file, the req_distinguished_name section +should be altered from the default: + + [ req_distinguished_name ] + O = Magrathea + CN = Glacier signing key + emailAddress = slartibartfast@magrathea.h2g2 + +The generated RSA key size can also be set with: + + [ req ] + default_bits = 4096 + + +It is also possible to manually generate the key private/public files using the +x509.genkey key generation configuration file in the root node of the Linux +kernel sources tree and the openssl command. The following is an example to +generate the public/private key files: + + openssl req -new -nodes -utf8 -sha256 -days 36500 -batch -x509 \ + -config x509.genkey -outform DER -out signing_key.x509 \ + -keyout signing_key.priv + + +========================= +PUBLIC KEYS IN THE KERNEL +========================= + +The kernel contains a ring of public keys that can be viewed by root. They're +in a keyring called ".system_keyring" that can be seen by: + + [root@deneb ~]# cat /proc/keys + ... + 223c7853 I------ 1 perm 1f030000 0 0 keyring .system_keyring: 1 + 302d2d52 I------ 1 perm 1f010000 0 0 asymmetri Fedora kernel signing key: d69a84e6bce3d216b979e9505b3e3ef9a7118079: X509.RSA a7118079 [] + ... + +Beyond the public key generated specifically for module signing, any file +placed in the kernel source root directory or the kernel build root directory +whose name is suffixed with ".x509" will be assumed to be an X.509 public key +and will be added to the keyring. + +Further, the architecture code may take public keys from a hardware store and +add those in also (e.g. from the UEFI key database). + +Finally, it is possible to add additional public keys by doing: + + keyctl padd asymmetric "" [.system_keyring-ID] <[key-file] + +e.g.: + + keyctl padd asymmetric "" 0x223c7853 <my_public_key.x509 + +Note, however, that the kernel will only permit keys to be added to +.system_keyring _if_ the new key's X.509 wrapper is validly signed by a key +that is already resident in the .system_keyring at the time the key was added. + + +========================= +MANUALLY SIGNING MODULES +========================= + +To manually sign a module, use the scripts/sign-file tool available in +the Linux kernel source tree. The script requires 4 arguments: + + 1. The hash algorithm (e.g., sha256) + 2. The private key filename + 3. The public key filename + 4. The kernel module to be signed + +The following is an example to sign a kernel module: + + scripts/sign-file sha512 kernel-signkey.priv \ + kernel-signkey.x509 module.ko + +The hash algorithm used does not have to match the one configured, but if it +doesn't, you should make sure that hash algorithm is either built into the +kernel or can be loaded without requiring itself. + + +============================ +SIGNED MODULES AND STRIPPING +============================ + +A signed module has a digital signature simply appended at the end. The string +"~Module signature appended~." at the end of the module's file confirms that a +signature is present but it does not confirm that the signature is valid! + +Signed modules are BRITTLE as the signature is outside of the defined ELF +container. Thus they MAY NOT be stripped once the signature is computed and +attached. Note the entire module is the signed payload, including any and all +debug information present at the time of signing. + + +====================== +LOADING SIGNED MODULES +====================== + +Modules are loaded with insmod, modprobe, init_module() or finit_module(), +exactly as for unsigned modules as no processing is done in userspace. The +signature checking is all done within the kernel. + + +========================================= +NON-VALID SIGNATURES AND UNSIGNED MODULES +========================================= + +If CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_FORCE is enabled or enforcemodulesig=1 is supplied on +the kernel command line, the kernel will only load validly signed modules +for which it has a public key. Otherwise, it will also load modules that are +unsigned. Any module for which the kernel has a key, but which proves to have +a signature mismatch will not be permitted to load. + +Any module that has an unparseable signature will be rejected. + + +========================================= +ADMINISTERING/PROTECTING THE PRIVATE KEY +========================================= + +Since the private key is used to sign modules, viruses and malware could use +the private key to sign modules and compromise the operating system. The +private key must be either destroyed or moved to a secure location and not kept +in the root node of the kernel source tree. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt index 8b8a05787641..8a984e994e61 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt @@ -16,8 +16,12 @@ ip_default_ttl - INTEGER Default: 64 (as recommended by RFC1700) ip_no_pmtu_disc - BOOLEAN - Disable Path MTU Discovery. - default FALSE + Disable Path MTU Discovery. If enabled and a + fragmentation-required ICMP is received, the PMTU to this + destination will be set to min_pmtu (see below). You will need + to raise min_pmtu to the smallest interface MTU on your system + manually if you want to avoid locally generated fragments. + Default: FALSE min_pmtu - INTEGER default 552 - minimum discovered Path MTU @@ -577,9 +581,6 @@ tcp_limit_output_bytes - INTEGER typical pfifo_fast qdiscs. tcp_limit_output_bytes limits the number of bytes on qdisc or device to reduce artificial RTT/cwnd and reduce bufferbloat. - Note: For GSO/TSO enabled flows, we try to have at least two - packets in flight. Reducing tcp_limit_output_bytes might also - reduce the size of individual GSO packet (64KB being the max) Default: 131072 tcp_challenge_ack_limit - INTEGER diff --git a/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt b/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt index c01223628a87..8e48e3b14227 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt @@ -123,6 +123,16 @@ Transmission process is similar to capture as shown below. [shutdown] close() --------> destruction of the transmission socket and deallocation of all associated resources. +Socket creation and destruction is also straight forward, and is done +the same way as in capturing described in the previous paragraph: + + int fd = socket(PF_PACKET, mode, 0); + +The protocol can optionally be 0 in case we only want to transmit +via this socket, which avoids an expensive call to packet_rcv(). +In this case, you also need to bind(2) the TX_RING with sll_protocol = 0 +set. Otherwise, htons(ETH_P_ALL) or any other protocol, for example. + Binding the socket to your network interface is mandatory (with zero copy) to know the header size of frames used in the circular buffer. diff --git a/Documentation/pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/pinctrl.txt index a7929cb47e7c..23f1590f49fe 100644 --- a/Documentation/pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/pinctrl.txt @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Definition of PIN CONTROLLER: - A pin controller is a piece of hardware, usually a set of registers, that can control PINs. It may be able to multiplex, bias, set load capacitance, - set drive strength etc for individual pins or groups of pins. + set drive strength, etc. for individual pins or groups of pins. Definition of PIN: @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ selected drivers, you need to select them from your machine's Kconfig entry, since these are so tightly integrated with the machines they are used on. See for example arch/arm/mach-u300/Kconfig for an example. -Pins usually have fancier names than this. You can find these in the dataheet +Pins usually have fancier names than this. You can find these in the datasheet for your chip. Notice that the core pinctrl.h file provides a fancy macro called PINCTRL_PIN() to create the struct entries. As you can see I enumerated the pins from 0 in the upper left corner to 63 in the lower right corner. @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ static struct pinctrl_desc foo_desc = { }; The pin control subsystem will call the .get_groups_count() function to -determine total number of legal selectors, then it will call the other functions +determine the total number of legal selectors, then it will call the other functions to retrieve the name and pins of the group. Maintaining the data structure of the groups is up to the driver, this is just a simple example - in practice you may need more entries in your group structure, for example specific register @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ ranges associated with each group and so on. Pin configuration ================= -Pins can sometimes be software-configured in an various ways, mostly related +Pins can sometimes be software-configured in various ways, mostly related to their electronic properties when used as inputs or outputs. For example you may be able to make an output pin high impedance, or "tristate" meaning it is effectively disconnected. You may be able to connect an input pin to VDD or GND @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ Since the pin controller subsystem have its pinspace local to the pin controller we need a mapping so that the pin control subsystem can figure out which pin controller handles control of a certain GPIO pin. Since a single pin controller may be muxing several GPIO ranges (typically SoCs that have -one set of pins but internally several GPIO silicon blocks, each modelled as +one set of pins, but internally several GPIO silicon blocks, each modelled as a struct gpio_chip) any number of GPIO ranges can be added to a pin controller instance like this: @@ -373,9 +373,9 @@ will be called on that specific pin controller. For all functionalities dealing with pin biasing, pin muxing etc, the pin controller subsystem will look up the corresponding pin number from the passed -in gpio number, and use the range's internals to retrive a pin number. After +in gpio number, and use the range's internals to retrieve a pin number. After that, the subsystem passes it on to the pin control driver, so the driver -will get an pin number into its handled number range. Further it is also passed +will get a pin number into its handled number range. Further it is also passed the range ID value, so that the pin controller knows which range it should deal with. @@ -430,8 +430,8 @@ pins you see some will be taken by things like a few VCC and GND to feed power to the chip, and quite a few will be taken by large ports like an external memory interface. The remaining pins will often be subject to pin multiplexing. -The example 8x8 PGA package above will have pin numbers 0 thru 63 assigned to -its physical pins. It will name the pins { A1, A2, A3 ... H6, H7, H8 } using +The example 8x8 PGA package above will have pin numbers 0 through 63 assigned +to its physical pins. It will name the pins { A1, A2, A3 ... H6, H7, H8 } using pinctrl_register_pins() and a suitable data set as shown earlier. In this 8x8 BGA package the pins { A8, A7, A6, A5 } can be used as an SPI port @@ -442,7 +442,7 @@ we cannot use the SPI port and I2C port at the same time. However in the inside of the package the silicon performing the SPI logic can alternatively be routed out on pins { G4, G3, G2, G1 }. -On the botton row at { A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1 } we have something +On the bottom row at { A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1 } we have something special - it's an external MMC bus that can be 2, 4 or 8 bits wide, and it will consume 2, 4 or 8 pins respectively, so either { A1, B1 } are taken or { A1, B1, C1, D1 } or all of them. If we use all 8 bits, we cannot use the SPI @@ -549,7 +549,7 @@ Assumptions: We assume that the number of possible function maps to pin groups is limited by the hardware. I.e. we assume that there is no system where any function can be -mapped to any pin, like in a phone exchange. So the available pins groups for +mapped to any pin, like in a phone exchange. So the available pin groups for a certain function will be limited to a few choices (say up to eight or so), not hundreds or any amount of choices. This is the characteristic we have found by inspecting available pinmux hardware, and a necessary assumption since we @@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ The pinmux core takes care of preventing conflicts on pins and calling the pin controller driver to execute different settings. It is the responsibility of the pinmux driver to impose further restrictions -(say for example infer electronic limitations due to load etc) to determine +(say for example infer electronic limitations due to load, etc.) to determine whether or not the requested function can actually be allowed, and in case it is possible to perform the requested mux setting, poke the hardware so that this happens. @@ -755,7 +755,7 @@ Pin control interaction with the GPIO subsystem Note that the following implies that the use case is to use a certain pin from the Linux kernel using the API in <linux/gpio.h> with gpio_request() and similar functions. There are cases where you may be using something -that your datasheet calls "GPIO mode" but actually is just an electrical +that your datasheet calls "GPIO mode", but actually is just an electrical configuration for a certain device. See the section below named "GPIO mode pitfalls" for more details on this scenario. @@ -871,7 +871,7 @@ hardware and shall be put into different subsystems: - Registers (or fields within registers) that control muxing of signals from various other HW blocks (e.g. I2C, MMC, or GPIO) onto pins should - be exposed through the pinctrl subssytem, as mux functions. + be exposed through the pinctrl subsystem, as mux functions. - Registers (or fields within registers) that control GPIO functionality such as setting a GPIO's output value, reading a GPIO's input value, or @@ -895,7 +895,7 @@ Example: a pin is usually muxed in to be used as a UART TX line. But during system sleep, we need to put this pin into "GPIO mode" and ground it. If you make a 1-to-1 map to the GPIO subsystem for this pin, you may start -to think that you need to come up with something real complex, that the +to think that you need to come up with something really complex, that the pin shall be used for UART TX and GPIO at the same time, that you will grab a pin control handle and set it to a certain state to enable UART TX to be muxed in, then twist it over to GPIO mode and use gpio_direction_output() @@ -964,12 +964,12 @@ GPIO mode. This will give the desired effect without any bogus interaction with the GPIO subsystem. It is just an electrical configuration used by that device when going to sleep, it might imply that the pin is set into something the -datasheet calls "GPIO mode" but that is not the point: it is still used +datasheet calls "GPIO mode", but that is not the point: it is still used by that UART device to control the pins that pertain to that very UART driver, putting them into modes needed by the UART. GPIO in the Linux kernel sense are just some 1-bit line, and is a different use case. -How the registers are poked to attain the push/pull and output low +How the registers are poked to attain the push or pull, and output low configuration and the muxing of the "u0" or "gpio-mode" group onto these pins is a question for the driver. @@ -977,7 +977,7 @@ Some datasheets will be more helpful and refer to the "GPIO mode" as "low power mode" rather than anything to do with GPIO. This often means the same thing electrically speaking, but in this latter case the software engineers will usually quickly identify that this is some -specific muxing/configuration rather than anything related to the GPIO +specific muxing or configuration rather than anything related to the GPIO API. @@ -1024,8 +1024,7 @@ up the device struct (just like with clockdev or regulators). The function name must match a function provided by the pinmux driver handling this pin range. As you can see we may have several pin controllers on the system and thus -we need to specify which one of them that contain the functions we wish -to map. +we need to specify which one of them contains the functions we wish to map. You register this pinmux mapping to the pinmux subsystem by simply: @@ -1254,10 +1253,10 @@ The semantics of the pinctrl APIs are: pinctrl_get(). - pinctrl_lookup_state() is called in process context to obtain a handle to a - specific state for a the client device. This operation may be slow too. + specific state for a client device. This operation may be slow, too. - pinctrl_select_state() programs pin controller hardware according to the - definition of the state as given by the mapping table. In theory this is a + definition of the state as given by the mapping table. In theory, this is a fast-path operation, since it only involved blasting some register settings into hardware. However, note that some pin controllers may have their registers on a slow/IRQ-based bus, so client devices should not assume they diff --git a/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt b/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt index 3f10b39b0346..89a8816990ff 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt @@ -135,11 +135,11 @@ CAPACITY_LEVEL - capacity level. This corresponds to POWER_SUPPLY_CAPACITY_LEVEL_*. TEMP - temperature of the power supply. -TEMP_ALERT_MIN - minimum battery temperature alert value in milli centigrade. -TEMP_ALERT_MAX - maximum battery temperature alert value in milli centigrade. +TEMP_ALERT_MIN - minimum battery temperature alert. +TEMP_ALERT_MAX - maximum battery temperature alert. TEMP_AMBIENT - ambient temperature. -TEMP_AMBIENT_ALERT_MIN - minimum ambient temperature alert value in milli centigrade. -TEMP_AMBIENT_ALERT_MAX - maximum ambient temperature alert value in milli centigrade. +TEMP_AMBIENT_ALERT_MIN - minimum ambient temperature alert. +TEMP_AMBIENT_ALERT_MAX - maximum ambient temperature alert. TIME_TO_EMPTY - seconds left for battery to be considered empty (i.e. while battery powers a load) diff --git a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt index 0f54333b0ff2..b6ce00b2be9a 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt @@ -547,13 +547,11 @@ helper functions described in Section 4. In that case, pm_runtime_resume() should be used. Of course, for this purpose the device's runtime PM has to be enabled earlier by calling pm_runtime_enable(). -If the device bus type's or driver's ->probe() callback runs -pm_runtime_suspend() or pm_runtime_idle() or their asynchronous counterparts, -they will fail returning -EAGAIN, because the device's usage counter is -incremented by the driver core before executing ->probe(). Still, it may be -desirable to suspend the device as soon as ->probe() has finished, so the driver -core uses pm_runtime_put_sync() to invoke the subsystem-level idle callback for -the device at that time. +It may be desirable to suspend the device once ->probe() has finished. +Therefore the driver core uses the asyncronous pm_request_idle() to submit a +request to execute the subsystem-level idle callback for the device at that +time. A driver that makes use of the runtime autosuspend feature, may want to +update the last busy mark before returning from ->probe(). Moreover, the driver core prevents runtime PM callbacks from racing with the bus notifier callback in __device_release_driver(), which is necessary, because the @@ -656,7 +654,7 @@ out the following operations: __pm_runtime_disable() with 'false' as the second argument for every device right before executing the subsystem-level .suspend_late() callback for it. - * During system resume it calls pm_runtime_enable() and pm_runtime_put_sync() + * During system resume it calls pm_runtime_enable() and pm_runtime_put() for every device right after executing the subsystem-level .resume_early() callback and right after executing the subsystem-level .resume() callback for it, respectively. diff --git a/Documentation/pwm.txt b/Documentation/pwm.txt index 1039b68fe9c6..93cb97974986 100644 --- a/Documentation/pwm.txt +++ b/Documentation/pwm.txt @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ New users should use the pwm_get() function and pass to it the consumer device or a consumer name. pwm_put() is used to free the PWM device. Managed variants of these functions, devm_pwm_get() and devm_pwm_put(), also exist. -After being requested a PWM has to be configured using: +After being requested, a PWM has to be configured using: int pwm_config(struct pwm_device *pwm, int duty_ns, int period_ns); @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ for new drivers to use the generic PWM framework. A new PWM controller/chip can be added using pwmchip_add() and removed again with pwmchip_remove(). pwmchip_add() takes a filled in struct pwm_chip as argument which provides a description of the PWM chip, the -number of PWM devices provider by the chip and the chip-specific +number of PWM devices provided by the chip and the chip-specific implementation of the supported PWM operations to the framework. Locking diff --git a/Documentation/rfkill.txt b/Documentation/rfkill.txt index 03c9d9299c6b..f430004df73c 100644 --- a/Documentation/rfkill.txt +++ b/Documentation/rfkill.txt @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ To create an rfkill driver, driver's Kconfig needs to have depends on RFKILL || !RFKILL to ensure the driver cannot be built-in when rfkill is modular. The !RFKILL -case allows the driver to be built when rfkill is not configured, which which +case allows the driver to be built when rfkill is not configured, which case all rfkill API can still be used but will be provided by static inlines which compile to almost nothing. diff --git a/Documentation/robust-futex-ABI.txt b/Documentation/robust-futex-ABI.txt index fd1cd8aae4eb..16eb314f56cc 100644 --- a/Documentation/robust-futex-ABI.txt +++ b/Documentation/robust-futex-ABI.txt @@ -146,8 +146,8 @@ On removal: 1) set the 'list_op_pending' word to the address of the 'lock entry' to be removed, 2) remove the lock entry for this lock from the 'head' list, - 2) release the futex lock, and - 2) clear the 'lock_op_pending' word. + 3) release the futex lock, and + 4) clear the 'lock_op_pending' word. On exit, the kernel will consider the address stored in 'list_op_pending' and the address of each 'lock word' found by walking diff --git a/Documentation/rt-mutex-design.txt b/Documentation/rt-mutex-design.txt index a5bcd7f5c33f..8666070d3189 100644 --- a/Documentation/rt-mutex-design.txt +++ b/Documentation/rt-mutex-design.txt @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ is something called unbounded priority inversion. That is when the high priority process is prevented from running by a lower priority process for an undetermined amount of time. -The classic example of unbounded priority inversion is were you have three +The classic example of unbounded priority inversion is where you have three processes, let's call them processes A, B, and C, where A is the highest priority process, C is the lowest, and B is in between. A tries to grab a lock that C owns and must wait and lets C run to release the lock. But in the diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/00-INDEX b/Documentation/scsi/00-INDEX index 9b0787f965e9..2044be565d93 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/scsi/00-INDEX @@ -42,8 +42,6 @@ aic79xx.txt - Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI host adapters aic7xxx.txt - info on driver for Adaptec controllers -aic7xxx_old.txt - - info on driver for Adaptec controllers, old generation arcmsr_spec.txt - ARECA FIRMWARE SPEC (for IOP331 adapter) dc395x.txt diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx_old.txt b/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx_old.txt deleted file mode 100644 index ecfc474f36a8..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx_old.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,511 +0,0 @@ - AIC7xxx Driver for Linux - -Introduction ----------------------------- -The AIC7xxx SCSI driver adds support for Adaptec (http://www.adaptec.com) -SCSI controllers and chipsets. Major portions of the driver and driver -development are shared between both Linux and FreeBSD. Support for the -AIC-7xxx chipsets have been in the default Linux kernel since approximately -linux-1.1.x and fairly stable since linux-1.2.x, and are also in FreeBSD -2.1.0 or later. - - Supported cards/chipsets - ---------------------------- - Adaptec Cards - ---------------------------- - AHA-274x - AHA-274xT - AHA-2842 - AHA-2910B - AHA-2920C - AHA-2930 - AHA-2930U - AHA-2930CU - AHA-2930U2 - AHA-2940 - AHA-2940W - AHA-2940U - AHA-2940UW - AHA-2940UW-PRO - AHA-2940AU - AHA-2940U2W - AHA-2940U2 - AHA-2940U2B - AHA-2940U2BOEM - AHA-2944D - AHA-2944WD - AHA-2944UD - AHA-2944UWD - AHA-2950U2 - AHA-2950U2W - AHA-2950U2B - AHA-29160M - AHA-3940 - AHA-3940U - AHA-3940W - AHA-3940UW - AHA-3940AUW - AHA-3940U2W - AHA-3950U2B - AHA-3950U2D - AHA-3960D - AHA-39160M - AHA-3985 - AHA-3985U - AHA-3985W - AHA-3985UW - - Motherboard Chipsets - ---------------------------- - AIC-777x - AIC-785x - AIC-786x - AIC-787x - AIC-788x - AIC-789x - AIC-3860 - - Bus Types - ---------------------------- - W - Wide SCSI, SCSI-3, 16bit bus, 68pin connector, will also support - SCSI-1/SCSI-2 50pin devices, transfer rates up to 20MB/s. - U - Ultra SCSI, transfer rates up to 40MB/s. - U2- Ultra 2 SCSI, transfer rates up to 80MB/s. - D - Differential SCSI. - T - Twin Channel SCSI. Up to 14 SCSI devices. - - AHA-274x - EISA SCSI controller - AHA-284x - VLB SCSI controller - AHA-29xx - PCI SCSI controller - AHA-394x - PCI controllers with two separate SCSI controllers on-board. - AHA-398x - PCI RAID controllers with three separate SCSI controllers - on-board. - - Not Supported Devices - ------------------------------ - Adaptec Cards - ---------------------------- - AHA-2920 (Only the cards that use the Future Domain chipset are not - supported, any 2920 cards based on Adaptec AIC chipsets, - such as the 2920C, are supported) - AAA-13x Raid Adapters - AAA-113x Raid Port Card - - Motherboard Chipsets - ---------------------------- - AIC-7810 - - Bus Types - ---------------------------- - R - Raid Port busses are not supported. - - The hardware RAID devices sold by Adaptec are *NOT* supported by this - driver (and will people please stop emailing me about them, they are - a totally separate beast from the bare SCSI controllers and this driver - cannot be retrofitted in any sane manner to support the hardware RAID - features on those cards - Doug Ledford). - - - People - ------------------------------ - Justin T Gibbs gibbs@plutotech.com - (BSD Driver Author) - Dan Eischen deischen@iworks.InterWorks.org - (Original Linux Driver Co-maintainer) - Dean Gehnert deang@teleport.com - (Original Linux FTP/patch maintainer) - Jess Johnson jester@frenzy.com - (AIC7xxx FAQ author) - Doug Ledford dledford@redhat.com - (Current Linux aic7xxx-5.x.x Driver/Patch/FTP maintainer) - - Special thanks go to John Aycock (aycock@cpsc.ucalgary.ca), the original - author of the driver. John has since retired from the project. Thanks - again for all his work! - - Mailing list - ------------------------------ - There is a mailing list available for users who want to track development - and converse with other users and developers. This list is for both - FreeBSD and Linux support of the AIC7xxx chipsets. - - To subscribe to the AIC7xxx mailing list send mail to the list server, - with "subscribe AIC7xxx" in the body (no Subject: required): - To: majordomo@FreeBSD.ORG - --- - subscribe AIC7xxx - - To unsubscribe from the list, send mail to the list server with: - To: majordomo@FreeBSD.ORG - --- - unsubscribe AIC7xxx - - Send regular messages and replies to: AIC7xxx@FreeBSD.ORG - - Boot Command line options - ------------------------------ - "aic7xxx=no_reset" - Eliminate the SCSI bus reset during startup. - Some SCSI devices need the initial reset that this option disables - in order to work. If you have problems at bootup, please make sure - you aren't using this option. - - "aic7xxx=reverse_scan" - Certain PCI motherboards scan for devices at - bootup by scanning from the highest numbered PCI device to the - lowest numbered PCI device, others do just the opposite and scan - from lowest to highest numbered PCI device. There is no reliable - way to autodetect this ordering. So, we default to the most common - order, which is lowest to highest. Then, in case your motherboard - scans from highest to lowest, we have this option. If your BIOS - finds the drives on controller A before controller B but the linux - kernel finds your drives on controller B before A, then you should - use this option. - - "aic7xxx=extended" - Force the driver to detect extended drive translation - on your controller. This helps those people who have cards without - a SEEPROM make sure that linux and all other operating systems think - the same way about your hard drives. - - "aic7xxx=scbram" - Some cards have external SCB RAM that can be used to - give the card more hardware SCB slots. This allows the driver to use - that SCB RAM. Without this option, the driver won't touch the SCB - RAM because it is known to cause problems on a few cards out there - (such as 3985 class cards). - - "aic7xxx=irq_trigger:x" - Replace x with either 0 or 1 to force the kernel - to use the correct IRQ type for your card. This only applies to EISA - based controllers. On these controllers, 0 is for Edge triggered - interrupts, and 1 is for Level triggered interrupts. If you aren't - sure or don't know which IRQ trigger type your EISA card uses, then - let the kernel autodetect the trigger type. - - "aic7xxx=verbose" - This option can be used in one of two ways. If you - simply specify aic7xxx=verbose, then the kernel will automatically - pick the default set of verbose messages for you to see. - Alternatively, you can specify the command as - "aic7xxx=verbose:0xXXXX" where the X entries are replaced with - hexadecimal digits. This option is a bit field type option. For - a full listing of the available options, search for the - #define VERBOSE_xxxxxx lines in the aic7xxx.c file. If you want - verbose messages, then it is recommended that you simply use the - aic7xxx=verbose variant of this command. - - "aic7xxx=pci_parity:x" - This option controls whether or not the driver - enables PCI parity error checking on the PCI bus. By default, this - checking is disabled. To enable the checks, simply specify pci_parity - with no value afterwords. To reverse the parity from even to odd, - supply any number other than 0 or 255. In short: - pci_parity - Even parity checking (even is the normal PCI parity) - pci_parity:x - Where x > 0, Odd parity checking - pci_parity:0 - No check (default) - NOTE: In order to get Even PCI parity checking, you must use the - version of the option that does not include the : and a number at - the end (unless you want to enter exactly 2^32 - 1 as the number). - - "aic7xxx=no_probe" - This option will disable the probing for any VLB - based 2842 controllers and any EISA based controllers. This is - needed on certain newer motherboards where the normal EISA I/O ranges - have been claimed by other PCI devices. Probing on those machines - will often result in the machine crashing or spontaneously rebooting - during startup. Examples of machines that need this are the - Dell PowerEdge 6300 machines. - - "aic7xxx=seltime:2" - This option controls how long the card waits - during a device selection sequence for the device to respond. - The original SCSI spec says that this "should be" 256ms. This - is generally not required with modern devices. However, some - very old SCSI I devices need the full 256ms. Most modern devices - can run fine with only 64ms. The default for this option is - 64ms. If you need to change this option, then use the following - table to set the proper value in the example above: - 0 - 256ms - 1 - 128ms - 2 - 64ms - 3 - 32ms - - "aic7xxx=panic_on_abort" - This option is for debugging and will cause - the driver to panic the linux kernel and freeze the system the first - time the drivers abort or reset routines are called. This is most - helpful when some problem causes infinite reset loops that scroll too - fast to see. By using this option, you can write down what the errors - actually are and send that information to me so it can be fixed. - - "aic7xxx=dump_card" - This option will print out the *entire* set of - configuration registers on the card during the init sequence. This - is a debugging aid used to see exactly what state the card is in - when we finally finish our initialization routines. If you don't - have documentation on the chipsets, this will do you absolutely - no good unless you are simply trying to write all the information - down in order to send it to me. - - "aic7xxx=dump_sequencer" - This is the same as the above options except - that instead of dumping the register contents on the card, this - option dumps the contents of the sequencer program RAM. This gives - the ability to verify that the instructions downloaded to the - card's sequencer are indeed what they are supposed to be. Again, - unless you have documentation to tell you how to interpret these - numbers, then it is totally useless. - - "aic7xxx=override_term:0xffffffff" - This option is used to force the - termination on your SCSI controllers to a particular setting. This - is a bit mask variable that applies for up to 8 aic7xxx SCSI channels. - Each channel gets 4 bits, divided as follows: - bit 3 2 1 0 - | | | Enable/Disable Single Ended Low Byte Termination - | | En/Disable Single Ended High Byte Termination - | En/Disable Low Byte LVD Termination - En/Disable High Byte LVD Termination - - The upper 2 bits that deal with LVD termination only apply to Ultra2 - controllers. Furthermore, due to the current Ultra2 controller - designs, these bits are tied together such that setting either bit - enables both low and high byte LVD termination. It is not possible - to only set high or low byte LVD termination in this manner. This is - an artifact of the BIOS definition on Ultra2 controllers. For other - controllers, the only important bits are the two lowest bits. Setting - the higher bits on non-Ultra2 controllers has no effect. A few - examples of how to use this option: - - Enable low and high byte termination on a non-ultra2 controller that - is the first aic7xxx controller (the correct bits are 0011), - aic7xxx=override_term:0x3 - - Enable all termination on the third aic7xxx controller, high byte - termination on the second aic7xxx controller, and low and high byte - SE termination on the first aic7xxx controller - (bits are 1111 0010 0011), - aic7xxx=override_term:0xf23 - - No attempt has been made to make this option non-cryptic. It really - shouldn't be used except in dire circumstances, and if that happens, - I'm probably going to be telling you what to set this to anyway :) - - "aic7xxx=stpwlev:0xffffffff" - This option is used to control the STPWLEV - bit in the DEVCONFIG PCI register. Currently, this is one of the - very few registers that we have absolutely *no* way of detecting - what the variable should be. It depends entirely on how the chipset - and external terminators were coupled by the card/motherboard maker. - Further, a chip reset (at power up) always sets this bit to 0. If - there is no BIOS to run on the chipset/card (such as with a 2910C - or a motherboard controller with the BIOS totally disabled) then - the variable may not get set properly. Of course, if the proper - setting was 0, then that's what it would be after the reset, but if - the proper setting is actually 1.....you get the picture. Now, since - we can't detect this at all, I've added this option to force the - setting. If you have a BIOS on your controller then you should never - need to use this option. However, if you are having lots of SCSI - reset problems and can't seem to get them knocked out, this may help. - - Here's a test to know for certain if you need this option. Make - a boot floppy that you can use to boot your computer up and that - will detect the aic7xxx controller. Next, power down your computer. - While it's down, unplug all SCSI cables from your Adaptec SCSI - controller. Boot the system back up to the Adaptec EZ-SCSI BIOS - and then make sure that termination is enabled on your adapter (if - you have an Adaptec BIOS of course). Next, boot up the floppy you - made and wait for it to detect the aic7xxx controller. If the kernel - finds the controller fine, says scsi : x hosts and then tries to - detect your devices like normal, up to the point where it fails to - mount your root file system and panics, then you're fine. If, on - the other hand, the system goes into an infinite reset loop, then - you need to use this option and/or the previous option to force the - proper termination settings on your controller. If this happens, - then you next need to figure out what your settings should be. - - To find the correct settings, power your machine back down, connect - back up the SCSI cables, and boot back into your machine like normal. - However, boot with the aic7xxx=verbose:0x39 option. Record the - initial DEVCONFIG values for each of your aic7xxx controllers as - they are listed, and also record what the machine is detecting as - the proper termination on your controllers. NOTE: the order in - which the initial DEVCONFIG values are printed out is not guaranteed - to be the same order as the SCSI controllers are registered. The - above option and this option both work on the order of the SCSI - controllers as they are registered, so make sure you match the right - DEVCONFIG values with the right controllers if you have more than - one aic7xxx controller. - - Once you have the detected termination settings and the initial - DEVCONFIG values for each controller, then figure out what the - termination on each of the controllers *should* be. Hopefully, that - part is correct, but it could possibly be wrong if there is - bogus cable detection logic on your controller or something similar. - If all the controllers have the correct termination settings, then - don't set the aic7xxx=override_term variable at all, leave it alone. - Next, on any controllers that go into an infinite reset loop when - you unplug all the SCSI cables, get the starting DEVCONFIG value. - If the initial DEVCONFIG value is divisible by 2, then the correct - setting for that controller is 0. If it's an odd number, then - the correct setting for that controller is 1. For any other - controllers that didn't have an infinite reset problem, then reverse - the above options. If DEVCONFIG was even, then the correct setting - is 1, if not then the correct setting is 0. - - Now that you know what the correct setting was for each controller, - we need to encode that into the aic7xxx=stpwlev:0x... variable. - This variable is a bit field encoded variable. Bit 0 is for the first - aic7xxx controller, bit 1 for the next, etc. Put all these bits - together and you get a number. For example, if the third aic7xxx - needed a 1, but the second and first both needed a 0, then the bits - would be 100 in binary. This then translates to 0x04. You would - therefore set aic7xxx=stpwlev:0x04. This is fairly standard binary - to hexadecimal conversions here. If you aren't up to speed on the - binary->hex conversion then send an email to the aic7xxx mailing - list and someone can help you out. - - "aic7xxx=tag_info:{{8,8..},{8,8..},..}" - This option is used to disable - or enable Tagged Command Queueing (TCQ) on specific devices. As of - driver version 5.1.11, TCQ is now either on or off by default - according to the setting you choose during the make config process. - In order to en/disable TCQ for certain devices at boot time, a user - may use this boot param. The driver will then parse this message out - and en/disable the specific device entries that are present based upon - the value given. The param line is parsed in the following manner: - - { - first instance indicates the start of this parameter values - second instance is the start of entries for a particular - device entry - } - end the entries for a particular host adapter, or end the entire - set of parameter entries - , - move to next entry. Inside of a set of device entries, this - moves us to the next device on the list. Outside of device - entries, this moves us to the next host adapter - . - Same effect as , but is safe to use with insmod. - x - the number to enter into the array at this position. - 0 = Enable tagged queueing on this device and use the default - queue depth - 1-254 = Enable tagged queueing on this device and use this - number as the queue depth - 255 = Disable tagged queueing on this device. - Note: anything above 32 for an actual queue depth is wasteful - and not recommended. - - A few examples of how this can be used: - - tag_info:{{8,12,,0,,255,4}} - This line will only effect the first aic7xxx card registered. It - will set scsi id 0 to a queue depth of 8, id 1 to 12, leave id 2 - at the default, set id 3 to tagged queueing enabled and use the - default queue depth, id 4 default, id 5 disabled, and id 6 to 4. - Any not specified entries stay at the default value, repeated - commas with no value specified will simply increment to the next id - without changing anything for the missing values. - - tag_info:{,,,{,,,255}} - First, second, and third adapters at default values. Fourth - adapter, id 3 is disabled. Notice that leading commas simply - increment what the first number effects, and there are no need - for trailing commas. When you close out an adapter, or the - entire entry, anything not explicitly set stays at the default - value. - - A final note on this option. The scanner I used for this isn't - perfect or highly robust. If you mess the line up, the worst that - should happen is that the line will get ignored. If you don't - close out the entire entry with the final bracket, then any other - aic7xxx options after this will get ignored. So, in general, be - sure of what you are entering, and after you have it right, just - add it to the lilo.conf file so there won't be any mistakes. As - a means of checking this parser, the entire tag_info array for - each card is now printed out in the /proc/scsi/aic7xxx/x file. You - can use that to verify that your options were parsed correctly. - - Boot command line options may be combined to form the proper set of options - a user might need. For example, the following is valid: - - aic7xxx=verbose,extended,irq_trigger:1 - - The only requirement is that individual options be separated by a comma or - a period on the command line. - - Module Loading command options - ------------------------------ - When loading the aic7xxx driver as a module, the exact same options are - available to the user. However, the syntax to specify the options changes - slightly. For insmod, you need to wrap the aic7xxx= argument in quotes - and replace all ',' with '.'. So, for example, a valid insmod line - would be: - - insmod aic7xxx aic7xxx='verbose.irq_trigger:1.extended' - - This line should result in the *exact* same behaviour as if you typed - it in at the lilo prompt and the driver was compiled into the kernel - instead of being a module. The reason for the single quote is so that - the shell won't try to interpret anything in the line, such as {. - Insmod assumes any options starting with a letter instead of a number - is a character string (which is what we want) and by switching all of - the commas to periods, insmod won't interpret this as more than one - string and write junk into our binary image. I consider it a bug in - the insmod program that even if you wrap your string in quotes (quotes - that pass the shell mind you and that insmod sees) it still treats - a comma inside of those quotes as starting a new variable, resulting - in memory scribbles if you don't switch the commas to periods. - - - Kernel Compile options - ------------------------------ - The various kernel compile time options for this driver are now fairly - well documented in the file drivers/scsi/Kconfig. In order to - see this documentation, you need to use one of the advanced configuration - programs (menuconfig and xconfig). If you are using the "make menuconfig" - method of configuring your kernel, then you would simply highlight the - option in question and hit the ? key. If you are using the "make xconfig" - method of configuring your kernel, then simply click on the help button - next to the option you have questions about. The help information from - the Configure.help file will then get automatically displayed. - - /proc support - ------------------------------ - The /proc support for the AIC7xxx can be found in the /proc/scsi/aic7xxx/ - directory. That directory contains a file for each SCSI controller in - the system. Each file presents the current configuration and transfer - statistics (enabled with #define in aic7xxx.c) for each controller. - - Thanks to Michael Neuffer for his upper-level SCSI help, and - Matthew Jacob for statistics support. - - Debugging the driver - ------------------------------ - Should you have problems with this driver, and would like some help in - getting them solved, there are a couple debugging items built into - the driver to facilitate getting the needed information from the system. - In general, I need a complete description of the problem, with as many - logs as possible concerning what happens. To help with this, there is - a command option aic7xxx=panic_on_abort. This option, when set, forces - the driver to panic the kernel on the first SCSI abort issued by the - mid level SCSI code. If your system is going to reset loops and you - can't read the screen, then this is what you need. Not only will it - stop the system, but it also prints out a large amount of state - information in the process. Second, if you specify the option - "aic7xxx=verbose:0x1ffff", the system will print out *SOOOO* much - information as it runs that you won't be able to see anything. - However, this can actually be very useful if your machine simply - locks up when trying to boot, since it will pin-point what was last - happening (in regards to the aic7xxx driver) immediately prior to - the lockup. This is really only useful if your machine simply can - not boot up successfully. If you can get your machine to run, then - this will produce far too much information. - - FTP sites - ------------------------------ - ftp://ftp.redhat.com/pub/aic/ - - Out of date. I used to keep stuff here, but too many people - complained about having a hard time getting into Red Hat's ftp - server. So use the web site below instead. - ftp://ftp.pcnet.com/users/eischen/Linux/ - - Dan Eischen's driver distribution area - ftp://ekf2.vsb.cz/pub/linux/kernel/aic7xxx/ftp.teleport.com/ - - European Linux mirror of Teleport site - - Web sites - ------------------------------ - http://people.redhat.com/dledford/ - - My web site, also the primary aic7xxx site with several related - pages. - -Dean W. Gehnert -deang@teleport.com - -$Revision: 3.0 $ - -Modified by Doug Ledford 1998-2000 - diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_eh.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_eh.txt index 6ff16b620d84..a0c85110a07e 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_eh.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_eh.txt @@ -42,20 +42,14 @@ discussion. Once LLDD gets hold of a scmd, either the LLDD will complete the command by calling scsi_done callback passed from midlayer when -invoking hostt->queuecommand() or SCSI midlayer will time it out. +invoking hostt->queuecommand() or the block layer will time it out. [1-2-1] Completing a scmd w/ scsi_done For all non-EH commands, scsi_done() is the completion callback. It -does the following. - - 1. Delete timeout timer. If it fails, it means that timeout timer - has expired and is going to finish the command. Just return. - - 2. Link scmd to per-cpu scsi_done_q using scmd->en_entry - - 3. Raise SCSI_SOFTIRQ +just calls blk_complete_request() to delete the block layer timer and +raise SCSI_SOFTIRQ SCSI_SOFTIRQ handler scsi_softirq calls scsi_decide_disposition() to determine what to do with the command. scsi_decide_disposition() @@ -64,10 +58,12 @@ with the command. - SUCCESS scsi_finish_command() is invoked for the command. The - function does some maintenance choirs and notify completion by - calling scmd->done() callback, which, for fs requests, would - be HLD completion callback - sd:sd_rw_intr, sr:rw_intr, - st:st_intr. + function does some maintenance chores and then calls + scsi_io_completion() to finish the I/O. + scsi_io_completion() then notifies the block layer on + the completed request by calling blk_end_request and + friends or figures out what to do with the remainder + of the data in case of an error. - NEEDS_RETRY - ADD_TO_MLQUEUE @@ -86,33 +82,45 @@ function 1. invokes optional hostt->eh_timed_out() callback. Return value can be one of - - EH_HANDLED - This indicates that eh_timed_out() dealt with the timeout. The - scmd is passed to __scsi_done() and thus linked into per-cpu - scsi_done_q. Normal command completion described in [1-2-1] - follows. + - BLK_EH_HANDLED + This indicates that eh_timed_out() dealt with the timeout. + The command is passed back to the block layer and completed + via __blk_complete_requests(). + + *NOTE* After returning BLK_EH_HANDLED the SCSI layer is + assumed to be finished with the command, and no other + functions from the SCSI layer will be called. So this + should typically only be returned if the eh_timed_out() + handler raced with normal completion. - - EH_RESET_TIMER + - BLK_EH_RESET_TIMER This indicates that more time is required to finish the command. Timer is restarted. This action is counted as a retry and only allowed scmd->allowed + 1(!) times. Once the - limit is reached, action for EH_NOT_HANDLED is taken instead. + limit is reached, action for BLK_EH_NOT_HANDLED is taken instead. - *NOTE* This action is racy as the LLDD could finish the scmd - after the timeout has expired but before it's added back. In - such cases, scsi_done() would think that timeout has occurred - and return without doing anything. We lose completion and the - command will time out again. - - - EH_NOT_HANDLED - This is the same as when eh_timed_out() callback doesn't exist. + - BLK_EH_NOT_HANDLED + eh_timed_out() callback did not handle the command. Step #2 is taken. + 2. If the host supports asynchronous completion (as indicated by the + no_async_abort setting in the host template) scsi_abort_command() + is invoked to schedule an asynchrous abort. If that fails + Step #3 is taken. + 2. scsi_eh_scmd_add(scmd, SCSI_EH_CANCEL_CMD) is invoked for the command. See [1-3] for more information. +[1-3] Asynchronous command aborts + + After a timeout occurs a command abort is scheduled from + scsi_abort_command(). If the abort is successful the command + will either be retried (if the number of retries is not exhausted) + or terminated with DID_TIME_OUT. + Otherwise scsi_eh_scmd_add() is invoked for the command. + See [1-4] for more information. -[1-3] How EH takes over +[1-4] How EH takes over scmds enter EH via scsi_eh_scmd_add(), which does the following. @@ -320,7 +328,8 @@ scmd->allowed. <<scsi_eh_abort_cmds>> - This action is taken for each timed out command. + This action is taken for each timed out command when + no_async_abort is enabled in the host template. hostt->eh_abort_handler() is invoked for each scmd. The handler returns SUCCESS if it has succeeded to make LLDD and all related hardware forget about the scmd. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt index 2b06aba4fa0f..d6a9bdeee7f2 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt @@ -882,8 +882,11 @@ Details: * * Calling context: kernel thread * - * Notes: Invoked from scsi_eh thread. No other commands will be - * queued on current host during eh. + * Notes: If 'no_async_abort' is defined this callback + * will be invoked from scsi_eh thread. No other commands + * will then be queued on current host during eh. + * Otherwise it will be called whenever scsi_times_out() + * is called due to a command timeout. * * Optionally defined in: LLD **/ @@ -1257,6 +1260,8 @@ of interest: address space use_clustering - 1=>SCSI commands in mid level's queue can be merged, 0=>disallow SCSI command merging + no_async_abort - 1=>Asynchronous aborts are not supported + 0=>Timed-out commands will be aborted asynchronously hostt - pointer to driver's struct scsi_host_template from which this struct Scsi_Host instance was spawned hostt->proc_name - name of LLD. This is the driver name that sysfs uses diff --git a/Documentation/security/00-INDEX b/Documentation/security/00-INDEX index 414235c1fcfc..45c82fd3e9d3 100644 --- a/Documentation/security/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/security/00-INDEX @@ -22,3 +22,5 @@ keys.txt - description of the kernel key retention service. tomoyo.txt - documentation on the TOMOYO Linux Security Module. +IMA-templates.txt + - documentation on the template management mechanism for IMA. diff --git a/Documentation/security/IMA-templates.txt b/Documentation/security/IMA-templates.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a4e102dddfea --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/security/IMA-templates.txt @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + IMA Template Management Mechanism + + +==== INTRODUCTION ==== + +The original 'ima' template is fixed length, containing the filedata hash +and pathname. The filedata hash is limited to 20 bytes (md5/sha1). +The pathname is a null terminated string, limited to 255 characters. +To overcome these limitations and to add additional file metadata, it is +necessary to extend the current version of IMA by defining additional +templates. For example, information that could be possibly reported are +the inode UID/GID or the LSM labels either of the inode and of the process +that is accessing it. + +However, the main problem to introduce this feature is that, each time +a new template is defined, the functions that generate and display +the measurements list would include the code for handling a new format +and, thus, would significantly grow over the time. + +The proposed solution solves this problem by separating the template +management from the remaining IMA code. The core of this solution is the +definition of two new data structures: a template descriptor, to determine +which information should be included in the measurement list; a template +field, to generate and display data of a given type. + +Managing templates with these structures is very simple. To support +a new data type, developers define the field identifier and implement +two functions, init() and show(), respectively to generate and display +measurement entries. Defining a new template descriptor requires +specifying the template format, a string of field identifiers separated +by the '|' character. While in the current implementation it is possible +to define new template descriptors only by adding their definition in the +template specific code (ima_template.c), in a future version it will be +possible to register a new template on a running kernel by supplying to IMA +the desired format string. In this version, IMA initializes at boot time +all defined template descriptors by translating the format into an array +of template fields structures taken from the set of the supported ones. + +After the initialization step, IMA will call ima_alloc_init_template() +(new function defined within the patches for the new template management +mechanism) to generate a new measurement entry by using the template +descriptor chosen through the kernel configuration or through the newly +introduced 'ima_template=' kernel command line parameter. It is during this +phase that the advantages of the new architecture are clearly shown: +the latter function will not contain specific code to handle a given template +but, instead, it simply calls the init() method of the template fields +associated to the chosen template descriptor and store the result (pointer +to allocated data and data length) in the measurement entry structure. + +The same mechanism is employed to display measurements entries. +The functions ima[_ascii]_measurements_show() retrieve, for each entry, +the template descriptor used to produce that entry and call the show() +method for each item of the array of template fields structures. + + + +==== SUPPORTED TEMPLATE FIELDS AND DESCRIPTORS ==== + +In the following, there is the list of supported template fields +('<identifier>': description), that can be used to define new template +descriptors by adding their identifier to the format string +(support for more data types will be added later): + + - 'd': the digest of the event (i.e. the digest of a measured file), + calculated with the SHA1 or MD5 hash algorithm; + - 'n': the name of the event (i.e. the file name), with size up to 255 bytes; + - 'd-ng': the digest of the event, calculated with an arbitrary hash + algorithm (field format: [<hash algo>:]digest, where the digest + prefix is shown only if the hash algorithm is not SHA1 or MD5); + - 'n-ng': the name of the event, without size limitations; + - 'sig': the file signature. + + +Below, there is the list of defined template descriptors: + - "ima": its format is 'd|n'; + - "ima-ng" (default): its format is 'd-ng|n-ng'; + - "ima-sig": its format is 'd-ng|n-ng|sig'. + + + +==== USE ==== + +To specify the template descriptor to be used to generate measurement entries, +currently the following methods are supported: + + - select a template descriptor among those supported in the kernel + configuration ('ima-ng' is the default choice); + - specify a template descriptor name from the kernel command line through + the 'ima_template=' parameter. diff --git a/Documentation/security/keys.txt b/Documentation/security/keys.txt index 7b4145d00452..a4c33f1a7c6d 100644 --- a/Documentation/security/keys.txt +++ b/Documentation/security/keys.txt @@ -865,15 +865,14 @@ encountered: calling processes has a searchable link to the key from one of its keyrings. There are three functions for dealing with these: - key_ref_t make_key_ref(const struct key *key, - unsigned long possession); + key_ref_t make_key_ref(const struct key *key, bool possession); struct key *key_ref_to_ptr(const key_ref_t key_ref); - unsigned long is_key_possessed(const key_ref_t key_ref); + bool is_key_possessed(const key_ref_t key_ref); The first function constructs a key reference from a key pointer and - possession information (which must be 0 or 1 and not any other value). + possession information (which must be true or false). The second function retrieves the key pointer from a reference and the third retrieves the possession flag. @@ -961,14 +960,17 @@ payload contents" for more information. the argument will not be parsed. -(*) Extra references can be made to a key by calling the following function: +(*) Extra references can be made to a key by calling one of the following + functions: + struct key *__key_get(struct key *key); struct key *key_get(struct key *key); - These need to be disposed of by calling key_put() when they've been - finished with. The key pointer passed in will be returned. If the pointer - is NULL or CONFIG_KEYS is not set then the key will not be dereferenced and - no increment will take place. + Keys so references will need to be disposed of by calling key_put() when + they've been finished with. The key pointer passed in will be returned. + + In the case of key_get(), if the pointer is NULL or CONFIG_KEYS is not set + then the key will not be dereferenced and no increment will take place. (*) A key's serial number can be obtained by calling: diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/overview.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/overview.txt index 138ac88c1461..ff88f52eec98 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/overview.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/overview.txt @@ -49,18 +49,23 @@ features :- * Machine specific controls: Allow machines to add controls to the sound card (e.g. volume control for speaker amplifier). -To achieve all this, ASoC basically splits an embedded audio system into 3 -components :- +To achieve all this, ASoC basically splits an embedded audio system into +multiple re-usable component drivers :- - * Codec driver: The codec driver is platform independent and contains audio - controls, audio interface capabilities, codec DAPM definition and codec IO - functions. + * Codec class drivers: The codec class driver is platform independent and + contains audio controls, audio interface capabilities, codec DAPM + definition and codec IO functions. This class extends to BT, FM and MODEM + ICs if required. Codec class drivers should be generic code that can run + on any architecture and machine. - * Platform driver: The platform driver contains the audio DMA engine and audio - interface drivers (e.g. I2S, AC97, PCM) for that platform. + * Platform class drivers: The platform class driver includes the audio DMA + engine driver, digital audio interface (DAI) drivers (e.g. I2S, AC97, PCM) + and any audio DSP drivers for that platform. - * Machine driver: The machine driver handles any machine specific controls and - audio events (e.g. turning on an amp at start of playback). + * Machine class driver: The machine driver class acts as the glue that + decribes and binds the other component drivers together to form an ALSA + "sound card device". It handles any machine specific controls and + machine level audio events (e.g. turning on an amp at start of playback). Documentation @@ -84,3 +89,7 @@ machine.txt: Machine driver internals. pop_clicks.txt: How to minimise audio artifacts. clocking.txt: ASoC clocking for best power performance. + +jack.txt: ASoC jack detection. + +DPCM.txt: Dynamic PCM - Describes DPCM with DSP examples. diff --git a/Documentation/static-keys.txt b/Documentation/static-keys.txt index 9f5263d3152c..c4407a41b0fc 100644 --- a/Documentation/static-keys.txt +++ b/Documentation/static-keys.txt @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ The branch(es) can then be switched via: static_key_slow_dec(&key); Thus, 'static_key_slow_inc()' means 'make the branch true', and -'static_key_slow_dec()' means 'make the the branch false' with appropriate +'static_key_slow_dec()' means 'make the branch false' with appropriate reference counting. For example, if the key is initialized true, a static_key_slow_dec(), will switch the branch to false. And a subsequent static_key_slow_inc(), will change the branch back to true. Likewise, if the @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ label case adds: If we then include the padding bytes, the jump label code saves, 16 total bytes of instruction memory for this small function. In this case the non-jump label -function is 80 bytes long. Thus, we have have saved 20% of the instruction +function is 80 bytes long. Thus, we have saved 20% of the instruction footprint. We can in fact improve this even further, since the 5-byte no-op really can be a 2-byte no-op since we can reach the branch with a 2-byte jmp. However, we have not yet implemented optimal no-op sizes (they are currently diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt index 26b7ee491df8..6d486404200e 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt @@ -428,11 +428,6 @@ rate for each task. numa_balancing_scan_size_mb is how many megabytes worth of pages are scanned for a given scan. -numa_balancing_settle_count is how many scan periods must complete before -the schedule balancer stops pushing the task towards a preferred node. This -gives the scheduler a chance to place the task on an alternative node if the -preferred node is overloaded. - numa_balancing_migrate_deferred is how many page migrations get skipped unconditionally, after a page migration is skipped because a page is shared with other tasks. This reduces page migration overhead, and determines diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt index 1fbd4eb7b64a..9f5481bdc5a4 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt @@ -47,6 +47,7 @@ Currently, these files are in /proc/sys/vm: - numa_zonelist_order - oom_dump_tasks - oom_kill_allocating_task +- overcommit_kbytes - overcommit_memory - overcommit_ratio - page-cluster @@ -574,6 +575,17 @@ The default value is 0. ============================================================== +overcommit_kbytes: + +When overcommit_memory is set to 2, the committed address space is not +permitted to exceed swap plus this amount of physical RAM. See below. + +Note: overcommit_kbytes is the counterpart of overcommit_ratio. Only one +of them may be specified at a time. Setting one disables the other (which +then appears as 0 when read). + +============================================================== + overcommit_memory: This value contains a flag that enables memory overcommitment. diff --git a/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py b/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py index 54d29c1320ed..230ce71f4d75 100755 --- a/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py +++ b/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py @@ -440,15 +440,15 @@ def tcm_mod_build_configfs(proto_ident, fabric_mod_dir_var, fabric_mod_name): buf += " /*\n" buf += " * Setup default attribute lists for various fabric->tf_cit_tmpl\n" buf += " */\n" - buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_wwn_cit.ct_attrs = " + fabric_mod_name + "_wwn_attrs;\n" - buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_base_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" - buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_attrib_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" - buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_param_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" - buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_np_base_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" - buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_nacl_base_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" - buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_nacl_attrib_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" - buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_nacl_auth_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" - buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_nacl_param_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " fabric->tf_cit_tmpl.tfc_wwn_cit.ct_attrs = " + fabric_mod_name + "_wwn_attrs;\n" + buf += " fabric->tf_cit_tmpl.tfc_tpg_base_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " fabric->tf_cit_tmpl.tfc_tpg_attrib_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " fabric->tf_cit_tmpl.tfc_tpg_param_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " fabric->tf_cit_tmpl.tfc_tpg_np_base_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " fabric->tf_cit_tmpl.tfc_tpg_nacl_base_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " fabric->tf_cit_tmpl.tfc_tpg_nacl_attrib_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " fabric->tf_cit_tmpl.tfc_tpg_nacl_auth_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " fabric->tf_cit_tmpl.tfc_tpg_nacl_param_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" buf += " /*\n" buf += " * Register the fabric for use within TCM\n" buf += " */\n" diff --git a/Documentation/timers/00-INDEX b/Documentation/timers/00-INDEX index a9248da5cdbc..ef2ccbf77fa2 100644 --- a/Documentation/timers/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/timers/00-INDEX @@ -8,5 +8,9 @@ hpet_example.c - sample hpet timer test program hrtimers.txt - subsystem for high-resolution kernel timers +NO_HZ.txt + - Summary of the different methods for the scheduler clock-interrupts management. +timers-howto.txt + - how to insert delays in the kernel the right (tm) way. timer_stats.txt - timer usage statistics diff --git a/Documentation/trace/events.txt b/Documentation/trace/events.txt index 37732a220d33..c94435df2037 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/events.txt +++ b/Documentation/trace/events.txt @@ -287,3 +287,210 @@ their old filters): prev_pid == 0 # cat sched_wakeup/filter common_pid == 0 + +6. Event triggers +================= + +Trace events can be made to conditionally invoke trigger 'commands' +which can take various forms and are described in detail below; +examples would be enabling or disabling other trace events or invoking +a stack trace whenever the trace event is hit. Whenever a trace event +with attached triggers is invoked, the set of trigger commands +associated with that event is invoked. Any given trigger can +additionally have an event filter of the same form as described in +section 5 (Event filtering) associated with it - the command will only +be invoked if the event being invoked passes the associated filter. +If no filter is associated with the trigger, it always passes. + +Triggers are added to and removed from a particular event by writing +trigger expressions to the 'trigger' file for the given event. + +A given event can have any number of triggers associated with it, +subject to any restrictions that individual commands may have in that +regard. + +Event triggers are implemented on top of "soft" mode, which means that +whenever a trace event has one or more triggers associated with it, +the event is activated even if it isn't actually enabled, but is +disabled in a "soft" mode. That is, the tracepoint will be called, +but just will not be traced, unless of course it's actually enabled. +This scheme allows triggers to be invoked even for events that aren't +enabled, and also allows the current event filter implementation to be +used for conditionally invoking triggers. + +The syntax for event triggers is roughly based on the syntax for +set_ftrace_filter 'ftrace filter commands' (see the 'Filter commands' +section of Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt), but there are major +differences and the implementation isn't currently tied to it in any +way, so beware about making generalizations between the two. + +6.1 Expression syntax +--------------------- + +Triggers are added by echoing the command to the 'trigger' file: + + # echo 'command[:count] [if filter]' > trigger + +Triggers are removed by echoing the same command but starting with '!' +to the 'trigger' file: + + # echo '!command[:count] [if filter]' > trigger + +The [if filter] part isn't used in matching commands when removing, so +leaving that off in a '!' command will accomplish the same thing as +having it in. + +The filter syntax is the same as that described in the 'Event +filtering' section above. + +For ease of use, writing to the trigger file using '>' currently just +adds or removes a single trigger and there's no explicit '>>' support +('>' actually behaves like '>>') or truncation support to remove all +triggers (you have to use '!' for each one added.) + +6.2 Supported trigger commands +------------------------------ + +The following commands are supported: + +- enable_event/disable_event + + These commands can enable or disable another trace event whenever + the triggering event is hit. When these commands are registered, + the other trace event is activated, but disabled in a "soft" mode. + That is, the tracepoint will be called, but just will not be traced. + The event tracepoint stays in this mode as long as there's a trigger + in effect that can trigger it. + + For example, the following trigger causes kmalloc events to be + traced when a read system call is entered, and the :1 at the end + specifies that this enablement happens only once: + + # echo 'enable_event:kmem:kmalloc:1' > \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/syscalls/sys_enter_read/trigger + + The following trigger causes kmalloc events to stop being traced + when a read system call exits. This disablement happens on every + read system call exit: + + # echo 'disable_event:kmem:kmalloc' > \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/syscalls/sys_exit_read/trigger + + The format is: + + enable_event:<system>:<event>[:count] + disable_event:<system>:<event>[:count] + + To remove the above commands: + + # echo '!enable_event:kmem:kmalloc:1' > \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/syscalls/sys_enter_read/trigger + + # echo '!disable_event:kmem:kmalloc' > \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/syscalls/sys_exit_read/trigger + + Note that there can be any number of enable/disable_event triggers + per triggering event, but there can only be one trigger per + triggered event. e.g. sys_enter_read can have triggers enabling both + kmem:kmalloc and sched:sched_switch, but can't have two kmem:kmalloc + versions such as kmem:kmalloc and kmem:kmalloc:1 or 'kmem:kmalloc if + bytes_req == 256' and 'kmem:kmalloc if bytes_alloc == 256' (they + could be combined into a single filter on kmem:kmalloc though). + +- stacktrace + + This command dumps a stacktrace in the trace buffer whenever the + triggering event occurs. + + For example, the following trigger dumps a stacktrace every time the + kmalloc tracepoint is hit: + + # echo 'stacktrace' > \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kmem/kmalloc/trigger + + The following trigger dumps a stacktrace the first 5 times a kmalloc + request happens with a size >= 64K + + # echo 'stacktrace:5 if bytes_req >= 65536' > \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kmem/kmalloc/trigger + + The format is: + + stacktrace[:count] + + To remove the above commands: + + # echo '!stacktrace' > \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kmem/kmalloc/trigger + + # echo '!stacktrace:5 if bytes_req >= 65536' > \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kmem/kmalloc/trigger + + The latter can also be removed more simply by the following (without + the filter): + + # echo '!stacktrace:5' > \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kmem/kmalloc/trigger + + Note that there can be only one stacktrace trigger per triggering + event. + +- snapshot + + This command causes a snapshot to be triggered whenever the + triggering event occurs. + + The following command creates a snapshot every time a block request + queue is unplugged with a depth > 1. If you were tracing a set of + events or functions at the time, the snapshot trace buffer would + capture those events when the trigger event occured: + + # echo 'snapshot if nr_rq > 1' > \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/block/block_unplug/trigger + + To only snapshot once: + + # echo 'snapshot:1 if nr_rq > 1' > \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/block/block_unplug/trigger + + To remove the above commands: + + # echo '!snapshot if nr_rq > 1' > \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/block/block_unplug/trigger + + # echo '!snapshot:1 if nr_rq > 1' > \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/block/block_unplug/trigger + + Note that there can be only one snapshot trigger per triggering + event. + +- traceon/traceoff + + These commands turn tracing on and off when the specified events are + hit. The parameter determines how many times the tracing system is + turned on and off. If unspecified, there is no limit. + + The following command turns tracing off the first time a block + request queue is unplugged with a depth > 1. If you were tracing a + set of events or functions at the time, you could then examine the + trace buffer to see the sequence of events that led up to the + trigger event: + + # echo 'traceoff:1 if nr_rq > 1' > \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/block/block_unplug/trigger + + To always disable tracing when nr_rq > 1 : + + # echo 'traceoff if nr_rq > 1' > \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/block/block_unplug/trigger + + To remove the above commands: + + # echo '!traceoff:1 if nr_rq > 1' > \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/block/block_unplug/trigger + + # echo '!traceoff if nr_rq > 1' > \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/block/block_unplug/trigger + + Note that there can be only one traceon or traceoff trigger per + triggering event. diff --git a/Documentation/trace/uprobetracer.txt b/Documentation/trace/uprobetracer.txt index d9c3e682312c..f1cf9a34ad9d 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/uprobetracer.txt +++ b/Documentation/trace/uprobetracer.txt @@ -19,18 +19,44 @@ user to calculate the offset of the probepoint in the object. Synopsis of uprobe_tracer ------------------------- - p[:[GRP/]EVENT] PATH:SYMBOL[+offs] [FETCHARGS] : Set a uprobe - r[:[GRP/]EVENT] PATH:SYMBOL[+offs] [FETCHARGS] : Set a return uprobe (uretprobe) - -:[GRP/]EVENT : Clear uprobe or uretprobe event + p[:[GRP/]EVENT] PATH:OFFSET [FETCHARGS] : Set a uprobe + r[:[GRP/]EVENT] PATH:OFFSET [FETCHARGS] : Set a return uprobe (uretprobe) + -:[GRP/]EVENT : Clear uprobe or uretprobe event GRP : Group name. If omitted, "uprobes" is the default value. EVENT : Event name. If omitted, the event name is generated based - on SYMBOL+offs. + on PATH+OFFSET. PATH : Path to an executable or a library. - SYMBOL[+offs] : Symbol+offset where the probe is inserted. + OFFSET : Offset where the probe is inserted. FETCHARGS : Arguments. Each probe can have up to 128 args. %REG : Fetch register REG + @ADDR : Fetch memory at ADDR (ADDR should be in userspace) + @+OFFSET : Fetch memory at OFFSET (OFFSET from same file as PATH) + $stackN : Fetch Nth entry of stack (N >= 0) + $stack : Fetch stack address. + $retval : Fetch return value.(*) + +|-offs(FETCHARG) : Fetch memory at FETCHARG +|- offs address.(**) + NAME=FETCHARG : Set NAME as the argument name of FETCHARG. + FETCHARG:TYPE : Set TYPE as the type of FETCHARG. Currently, basic types + (u8/u16/u32/u64/s8/s16/s32/s64), "string" and bitfield + are supported. + + (*) only for return probe. + (**) this is useful for fetching a field of data structures. + +Types +----- +Several types are supported for fetch-args. Uprobe tracer will access memory +by given type. Prefix 's' and 'u' means those types are signed and unsigned +respectively. Traced arguments are shown in decimal (signed) or hex (unsigned). +String type is a special type, which fetches a "null-terminated" string from +user space. +Bitfield is another special type, which takes 3 parameters, bit-width, bit- +offset, and container-size (usually 32). The syntax is; + + b<bit-width>@<bit-offset>/<container-size> + Event Profiling --------------- diff --git a/Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt b/Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt index 8ec2a67c39b7..4cf53e406613 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ Linux provides a number of functions for gadgets to use. Creating a gadget means deciding what configurations there will be and which functions each configuration will provide. -Configfs (please see Documentation/filesystems/configfs/*) lends itslef nicely +Configfs (please see Documentation/filesystems/configfs/*) lends itself nicely for the purpose of telling the kernel about the above mentioned decision. This document is about how to do it. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ directories must be created: $ mkdir configs/<name>.<number> where <name> can be any string which is legal in a filesystem and the -<numebr> is the configuration's number, e.g.: +<number> is the configuration's number, e.g.: $ mkdir configs/c.1 @@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ from the buffer to the cs), but it is up to the implementer of the two functions to decide what they actually do. typedef struct configured_structure cs; -typedef struc specific_attribute sa; +typedef struct specific_attribute sa; sa +----------------------------------+ diff --git a/Documentation/usb/gadget_multi.txt b/Documentation/usb/gadget_multi.txt index 80f4ef0eb75b..7d66a8636cb5 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/gadget_multi.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/gadget_multi.txt @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ A CDC ECM (Ethernet) function may be turned on via a Kconfig option and RNDIS can be turned off. If they are both enabled the gadget will have two configurations -- one with RNDIS and another with CDC ECM[3]. -Please not that if you use non-standard configuration (that is enable +Please note that if you use non-standard configuration (that is enable CDC ECM) you may need to change vendor and/or product ID. * Host drivers diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt index 5056baf574f4..6cd63a9010fb 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt @@ -2105,7 +2105,7 @@ Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error Allows setting an eventfd to directly trigger a guest interrupt. kvm_irqfd.fd specifies the file descriptor to use as the eventfd and kvm_irqfd.gsi specifies the irqchip pin toggled by this event. When -an event is tiggered on the eventfd, an interrupt is injected into +an event is triggered on the eventfd, an interrupt is injected into the guest using the specified gsi pin. The irqfd is removed using the KVM_IRQFD_FLAG_DEASSIGN flag, specifying both kvm_irqfd.fd and kvm_irqfd.gsi. @@ -2116,7 +2116,7 @@ interrupts. When KVM_IRQFD_FLAG_RESAMPLE is set the user must pass an additional eventfd in the kvm_irqfd.resamplefd field. When operating in resample mode, posting of an interrupt through kvm_irq.fd asserts the specified gsi in the irqchip. When the irqchip is resampled, such -as from an EOI, the gsi is de-asserted and the user is notifed via +as from an EOI, the gsi is de-asserted and the user is notified via kvm_irqfd.resamplefd. It is the user's responsibility to re-queue the interrupt if the device making use of it still requires service. Note that closing the resamplefd is not sufficient to disable the @@ -2328,7 +2328,7 @@ current state. "addr" is ignored. Capability: basic Architectures: arm, arm64 Type: vcpu ioctl -Parameters: struct struct kvm_vcpu_init (in) +Parameters: struct kvm_vcpu_init (in) Returns: 0 on success; -1 on error Errors: EINVAL: the target is unknown, or the combination of features is invalid. @@ -2392,7 +2392,8 @@ struct kvm_reg_list { This ioctl returns the guest registers that are supported for the KVM_GET_ONE_REG/KVM_SET_ONE_REG calls. -4.85 KVM_ARM_SET_DEVICE_ADDR + +4.85 KVM_ARM_SET_DEVICE_ADDR (deprecated) Capability: KVM_CAP_ARM_SET_DEVICE_ADDR Architectures: arm, arm64 @@ -2430,6 +2431,10 @@ must be called after calling KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP, but before calling KVM_RUN on any of the VCPUs. Calling this ioctl twice for any of the base addresses will return -EEXIST. +Note, this IOCTL is deprecated and the more flexible SET/GET_DEVICE_ATTR API +should be used instead. + + 4.86 KVM_PPC_RTAS_DEFINE_TOKEN Capability: KVM_CAP_PPC_RTAS diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/arm-vgic.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/arm-vgic.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7f4e91b1316b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/arm-vgic.txt @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ +ARM Virtual Generic Interrupt Controller (VGIC) +=============================================== + +Device types supported: + KVM_DEV_TYPE_ARM_VGIC_V2 ARM Generic Interrupt Controller v2.0 + +Only one VGIC instance may be instantiated through either this API or the +legacy KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP api. The created VGIC will act as the VM interrupt +controller, requiring emulated user-space devices to inject interrupts to the +VGIC instead of directly to CPUs. + +Groups: + KVM_DEV_ARM_VGIC_GRP_ADDR + Attributes: + KVM_VGIC_V2_ADDR_TYPE_DIST (rw, 64-bit) + Base address in the guest physical address space of the GIC distributor + register mappings. + + KVM_VGIC_V2_ADDR_TYPE_CPU (rw, 64-bit) + Base address in the guest physical address space of the GIC virtual cpu + interface register mappings. + + KVM_DEV_ARM_VGIC_GRP_DIST_REGS + Attributes: + The attr field of kvm_device_attr encodes two values: + bits: | 63 .... 40 | 39 .. 32 | 31 .... 0 | + values: | reserved | cpu id | offset | + + All distributor regs are (rw, 32-bit) + + The offset is relative to the "Distributor base address" as defined in the + GICv2 specs. Getting or setting such a register has the same effect as + reading or writing the register on the actual hardware from the cpu + specified with cpu id field. Note that most distributor fields are not + banked, but return the same value regardless of the cpu id used to access + the register. + Limitations: + - Priorities are not implemented, and registers are RAZ/WI + Errors: + -ENODEV: Getting or setting this register is not yet supported + -EBUSY: One or more VCPUs are running + + KVM_DEV_ARM_VGIC_GRP_CPU_REGS + Attributes: + The attr field of kvm_device_attr encodes two values: + bits: | 63 .... 40 | 39 .. 32 | 31 .... 0 | + values: | reserved | cpu id | offset | + + All CPU interface regs are (rw, 32-bit) + + The offset specifies the offset from the "CPU interface base address" as + defined in the GICv2 specs. Getting or setting such a register has the + same effect as reading or writing the register on the actual hardware. + + The Active Priorities Registers APRn are implementation defined, so we set a + fixed format for our implementation that fits with the model of a "GICv2 + implementation without the security extensions" which we present to the + guest. This interface always exposes four register APR[0-3] describing the + maximum possible 128 preemption levels. The semantics of the register + indicate if any interrupts in a given preemption level are in the active + state by setting the corresponding bit. + + Thus, preemption level X has one or more active interrupts if and only if: + + APRn[X mod 32] == 0b1, where n = X / 32 + + Bits for undefined preemption levels are RAZ/WI. + + Limitations: + - Priorities are not implemented, and registers are RAZ/WI + Errors: + -ENODEV: Getting or setting this register is not yet supported + -EBUSY: One or more VCPUs are running diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/hypercalls.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/hypercalls.txt index 022198e389d7..c8d040e27046 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/hypercalls.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/hypercalls.txt @@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ S390: S390 uses diagnose instruction as hypercall (0x500) along with hypercall number in R1. + For further information on the S390 diagnose call as supported by KVM, + refer to Documentation/virtual/kvm/s390-diag.txt. + PowerPC: It uses R3-R10 and hypercall number in R11. R4-R11 are used as output registers. Return value is placed in R3. @@ -74,7 +77,7 @@ Usage example : A vcpu of a paravirtualized guest that is busywaiting in guest kernel mode for an event to occur (ex: a spinlock to become available) can execute HLT instruction once it has busy-waited for more than a threshold time-interval. Execution of HLT instruction would cause the hypervisor to put -the vcpu to sleep until occurence of an appropriate event. Another vcpu of the +the vcpu to sleep until occurrence of an appropriate event. Another vcpu of the same guest can wakeup the sleeping vcpu by issuing KVM_HC_KICK_CPU hypercall, specifying APIC ID (a1) of the vcpu to be woken up. An additional argument (a0) is used in the hypercall for future use. diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/locking.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/locking.txt index f8869410d40c..d68af4dc3006 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/locking.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/locking.txt @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ The Dirty bit is lost in this case. In order to avoid this kind of issue, we always treat the spte as "volatile" if it can be updated out of mmu-lock, see spte_has_volatile_bits(), it means, -the spte is always atomicly updated in this case. +the spte is always atomically updated in this case. 3): flush tlbs due to spte updated If the spte is updated from writable to readonly, we should flush all TLBs, @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ be flushed caused by this reason in mmu_spte_update() since this is a common function to update spte (present -> present). Since the spte is "volatile" if it can be updated out of mmu-lock, we always -atomicly update the spte, the race caused by fast page fault can be avoided, +atomically update the spte, the race caused by fast page fault can be avoided, See the comments in spte_has_volatile_bits() and mmu_spte_update(). 3. Reference diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt index 4cd076febb02..4643cde517c4 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ If any other bit changes in the MSR, please still use mtmsr(d). Patched instructions ==================== -The "ld" and "std" instructions are transormed to "lwz" and "stw" instructions +The "ld" and "std" instructions are transformed to "lwz" and "stw" instructions respectively on 32 bit systems with an added offset of 4 to accommodate for big endianness. diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/s390-diag.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/s390-diag.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f1de4fbade15 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/s390-diag.txt @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +The s390 DIAGNOSE call on KVM +============================= + +KVM on s390 supports the DIAGNOSE call for making hypercalls, both for +native hypercalls and for selected hypercalls found on other s390 +hypervisors. + +Note that bits are numbered as by the usual s390 convention (most significant +bit on the left). + + +General remarks +--------------- + +DIAGNOSE calls by the guest cause a mandatory intercept. This implies +all supported DIAGNOSE calls need to be handled by either KVM or its +userspace. + +All DIAGNOSE calls supported by KVM use the RS-a format: + +-------------------------------------- +| '83' | R1 | R3 | B2 | D2 | +-------------------------------------- +0 8 12 16 20 31 + +The second-operand address (obtained by the base/displacement calculation) +is not used to address data. Instead, bits 48-63 of this address specify +the function code, and bits 0-47 are ignored. + +The supported DIAGNOSE function codes vary by the userspace used. For +DIAGNOSE function codes not specific to KVM, please refer to the +documentation for the s390 hypervisors defining them. + + +DIAGNOSE function code 'X'500' - KVM virtio functions +----------------------------------------------------- + +If the function code specifies 0x500, various virtio-related functions +are performed. + +General register 1 contains the virtio subfunction code. Supported +virtio subfunctions depend on KVM's userspace. Generally, userspace +provides either s390-virtio (subcodes 0-2) or virtio-ccw (subcode 3). + +Upon completion of the DIAGNOSE instruction, general register 2 contains +the function's return code, which is either a return code or a subcode +specific value. + +Subcode 0 - s390-virtio notification and early console printk + Handled by userspace. + +Subcode 1 - s390-virtio reset + Handled by userspace. + +Subcode 2 - s390-virtio set status + Handled by userspace. + +Subcode 3 - virtio-ccw notification + Handled by either userspace or KVM (ioeventfd case). + + General register 2 contains a subchannel-identification word denoting + the subchannel of the virtio-ccw proxy device to be notified. + + General register 3 contains the number of the virtqueue to be notified. + + General register 4 contains a 64bit identifier for KVM usage (the + kvm_io_bus cookie). If general register 4 does not contain a valid + identifier, it is ignored. + + After completion of the DIAGNOSE call, general register 2 may contain + a 64bit identifier (in the kvm_io_bus cookie case). + + See also the virtio standard for a discussion of this hypercall. + + +DIAGNOSE function code 'X'501 - KVM breakpoint +---------------------------------------------- + +If the function code specifies 0x501, breakpoint functions may be performed. +This function code is handled by userspace. diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/timekeeping.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/timekeeping.txt index df8946377cb6..76808a17ad84 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/timekeeping.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/timekeeping.txt @@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ at any time. This causes problems as the passage of real time, the injection of machine interrupts and the associated clock sources are no longer completely synchronized with real time. -This same problem can occur on native harware to a degree, as SMM mode may +This same problem can occur on native hardware to a degree, as SMM mode may steal cycles from the naturally on X86 systems when SMM mode is used by the BIOS, but not in such an extreme fashion. However, the fact that SMM mode may cause similar problems to virtualization makes it a good justification for diff --git a/Documentation/vm/00-INDEX b/Documentation/vm/00-INDEX index 5481c8ba3412..a39d06680e1c 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/vm/00-INDEX @@ -4,10 +4,12 @@ active_mm.txt - An explanation from Linus about tsk->active_mm vs tsk->mm. balance - various information on memory balancing. -hugepage-mmap.c - - Example app using huge page memory with the mmap system call. -hugepage-shm.c - - Example app using huge page memory with Sys V shared memory system calls. +cleancache.txt + - Intro to cleancache and page-granularity victim cache. +frontswap.txt + - Outline frontswap, part of the transcendent memory frontend. +highmem.txt + - Outline of highmem and common issues. hugetlbpage.txt - a brief summary of hugetlbpage support in the Linux kernel. hwpoison.txt @@ -16,21 +18,23 @@ ksm.txt - how to use the Kernel Samepage Merging feature. locking - info on how locking and synchronization is done in the Linux vm code. -map_hugetlb.c - - an example program that uses the MAP_HUGETLB mmap flag. numa - information about NUMA specific code in the Linux vm. numa_memory_policy.txt - documentation of concepts and APIs of the 2.6 memory policy support. overcommit-accounting - description of the Linux kernels overcommit handling modes. -page-types.c - - Tool for querying page flags page_migration - description of page migration in NUMA systems. pagemap.txt - pagemap, from the userspace perspective slub.txt - a short users guide for SLUB. +soft-dirty.txt + - short explanation for soft-dirty PTEs +transhuge.txt + - Transparent Hugepage Support, alternative way of using hugepages. unevictable-lru.txt - Unevictable LRU infrastructure +zswap.txt + - Intro to compressed cache for swap pages diff --git a/Documentation/vm/overcommit-accounting b/Documentation/vm/overcommit-accounting index 8eaa2fc4b8fa..cbfaaa674118 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/overcommit-accounting +++ b/Documentation/vm/overcommit-accounting @@ -14,8 +14,8 @@ The Linux kernel supports the following overcommit handling modes 2 - Don't overcommit. The total address space commit for the system is not permitted to exceed swap + a - configurable percentage (default is 50) of physical RAM. - Depending on the percentage you use, in most situations + configurable amount (default is 50%) of physical RAM. + Depending on the amount you use, in most situations this means a process will not be killed while accessing pages but will receive errors on memory allocation as appropriate. @@ -26,7 +26,8 @@ The Linux kernel supports the following overcommit handling modes The overcommit policy is set via the sysctl `vm.overcommit_memory'. -The overcommit percentage is set via `vm.overcommit_ratio'. +The overcommit amount can be set via `vm.overcommit_ratio' (percentage) +or `vm.overcommit_kbytes' (absolute value). The current overcommit limit and amount committed are viewable in /proc/meminfo as CommitLimit and Committed_AS respectively. diff --git a/Documentation/vm/split_page_table_lock b/Documentation/vm/split_page_table_lock index 7521d367f21d..6dea4fd5c961 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/split_page_table_lock +++ b/Documentation/vm/split_page_table_lock @@ -63,9 +63,9 @@ levels. PMD split lock enabling requires pgtable_pmd_page_ctor() call on PMD table allocation and pgtable_pmd_page_dtor() on freeing. -Allocation usually happens in pmd_alloc_one(), freeing in pmd_free(), but -make sure you cover all PMD table allocation / freeing paths: i.e X86_PAE -preallocate few PMDs on pgd_alloc(). +Allocation usually happens in pmd_alloc_one(), freeing in pmd_free() and +pmd_free_tlb(), but make sure you cover all PMD table allocation / freeing +paths: i.e X86_PAE preallocate few PMDs on pgd_alloc(). With everything in place you can set CONFIG_ARCH_ENABLE_SPLIT_PMD_PTLOCK. diff --git a/Documentation/vme_api.txt b/Documentation/vme_api.txt index 856efa35f6e3..ffe6e22a2ccd 100644 --- a/Documentation/vme_api.txt +++ b/Documentation/vme_api.txt @@ -393,4 +393,14 @@ Slot Detection This function returns the slot ID of the provided bridge. - int vme_slot_get(struct vme_dev *dev); + int vme_slot_num(struct vme_dev *dev); + + +Bus Detection +============= + +This function returns the bus ID of the provided bridge. + + int vme_bus_num(struct vme_dev *dev); + + diff --git a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt index f4f268c2b826..cb81741d3b0b 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt @@ -608,6 +608,9 @@ Protocol: 2.12+ - If 1, the kernel supports the 64-bit EFI handoff entry point given at handover_offset + 0x200. + Bit 4 (read): XLF_EFI_KEXEC + - If 1, the kernel supports kexec EFI boot with EFI runtime support. + Field name: cmdline_size Type: read Offset/size: 0x238/4 diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt index 1228b22e142b..5223479291a2 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt @@ -78,14 +78,6 @@ APICs no_timer_check Don't check the IO-APIC timer. This can work around problems with incorrect timer initialization on some boards. - - apicmaintimer Run time keeping from the local APIC timer instead - of using the PIT/HPET interrupt for this. This is useful - when the PIT/HPET interrupts are unreliable. - - noapicmaintimer Don't do time keeping using the APIC timer. - Useful when this option was auto selected, but doesn't work. - apicpmtimer Do APIC timer calibration using the pmtimer. Implies apicmaintimer. Useful when your PIT timer is totally @@ -144,11 +136,6 @@ Non Executable Mappings on Enable(default) off Disable -SMP - - additional_cpus=NUM Allow NUM more CPUs for hotplug - (defaults are specified by the BIOS, see Documentation/x86/x86_64/cpu-hotplug-spec) - NUMA numa=off Only set up a single NUMA node spanning all memory. @@ -289,16 +276,6 @@ Debugging kstack=N Print N words from the kernel stack in oops dumps. - pagefaulttrace Dump all page faults. Only useful for extreme debugging - and will create a lot of output. - - call_trace=[old|both|newfallback|new] - old: use old inexact backtracer - new: use new exact dwarf2 unwinder - both: print entries from both - newfallback: use new unwinder but fall back to old if it gets - stuck (default) - Miscellaneous nogbpages diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt index 881582f75c9c..c584a51add15 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt @@ -28,4 +28,11 @@ reference. Current X86-64 implementations only support 40 bits of address space, but we support up to 46 bits. This expands into MBZ space in the page tables. +->trampoline_pgd: + +We map EFI runtime services in the aforementioned PGD in the virtual +range of 64Gb (arbitrarily set, can be raised if needed) + +0xffffffef00000000 - 0xffffffff00000000 + -Andi Kleen, Jul 2004 diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/HOWTO b/Documentation/zh_CN/HOWTO index 7fba5aab9ef9..6c914aa87e71 100644 --- a/Documentation/zh_CN/HOWTO +++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/HOWTO @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Linux内核代码中包含有大量的文档。这些文档对于学习如何与 其他关于如何正确地生成补丁的优秀文档包括： "The Perfect Patch" - http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt + http://www.ozlabs.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt "Linux kernel patch submission format" http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html @@ -515,7 +515,7 @@ Linux内核社区并不喜欢一下接收大段的代码。修改需要被恰当 想了解它具体应该看起来像什么，请查阅以下文档中的“ChangeLog”章节： “The Perfect Patch” - http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt + http://www.ozlabs.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt 这些事情有时候做起来很难。要在任何方面都做到完美可能需要好几年时间。这是 diff --git a/Documentation/zorro.txt b/Documentation/zorro.txt index d5829d14774a..90a64d52bea2 100644 --- a/Documentation/zorro.txt +++ b/Documentation/zorro.txt @@ -95,8 +95,9 @@ The treatment of these regions depends on the type of Zorro space: ------------- linux/include/linux/zorro.h -linux/include/asm-{m68k,ppc}/zorro.h -linux/include/linux/zorro_ids.h +linux/include/uapi/linux/zorro.h +linux/include/uapi/linux/zorro_ids.h +linux/arch/m68k/include/asm/zorro.h linux/drivers/zorro /proc/bus/zorro |